PTC Global Services

Fundamentals of Drawing
Release 2001 T782-320-01

Copyright
Fundamentals of Drawing
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. This Fundamentals of Drawing Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to any form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means, electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance. User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS, CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo. Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary 3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS, DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker, Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK, NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator, PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment, Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and ICEM logo.

Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc. Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI. HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

PRINTING HISTORY Document No. Date T782-320-01

Description

07/10/01 Revisions to Fundamentals of Drawing for Release 2001

Order Number DT-782-320-EN Printed in U.S.A

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
Education Services Registration in North America
Tel: Fax: (888) 782-3773 (781) 370-5553

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.) (781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.) Fax: (781) 370-5650

License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.) (781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.) Fax: (781) 370-5795

Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.) (781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also find general information about PTC, Pro/ENGINEER, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and Pro/PARTNERS.

Training Agenda
Fundamentals of Drawing
Day 1
Welcome and Introduction to Fundamentals of Drawing Creating Views Assembly and Multiple Model Drawings Modifying Views

Day 2
Showing Dimensions and Manipulating Detail Creating Dimensions Creating Notes Tolerances on Drawings

Day 3
Drawing Tables Cosmetic Features 2-D Drafting Symbols Using Layers to Control Drawing Display

Day Four
Resolving Regeneration Problems Drawing Formats Creating a Bill of Materials Family Tables

Day 5
Working with Large Drawings Drawing Standards and Templates Plotting Markup Mode

Table of Contents
Fundamentals of Drawing
INTRODUCTION 1-1
PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER .........................................................1-2

Using Drawing Templates ..........................................................................1-2 Using Configuration Files ..........................................................................1-3 Files Automatically Loaded by the System ................................................1-5 Editing the Configuration File during a Pro/ENGINEER Session.............1-5 Using Drawing Setup Files.........................................................................1-6
DRAWING INTERFACE ..................................................................................................1-7

Performing Tasks........................................................................................1-7 Messages...................................................................................................1-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................1-12

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing Using a Configuration file ........1-12 EXERCISE 2: Create a Drawing Using a Template ................................1-14 EXERCISE 3: Set Up a Default Drawing Setup File ...............................1-17
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................1-19

CREATING VIEWS

2-1

VIEW CREATION.............................................................................................................2-2

Creating Different View Types ..................................................................2-2 Controlling the View Display.....................................................................2-5 Adding Cross-Sections ...............................................................................2-6 Specifying the View Scale..........................................................................2-8
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................2-8 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.................................................................................2-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................2-13

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger...................................2-13 EXERCISE 2: Create an Align Cross-Section .........................................2-22
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................2-26

ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS

3-1

ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS.................................................................................................3-2

Adding Exploded Views.............................................................................3-2

MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS ......................................................................................... 3-2

Applications ............................................................................................... 3-2 Creating and Manipulating Multi-Model Drawings................................... 3-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 3-5

EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a Drawing ........................ 3-5
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-12

MODIFYING VIEWS

4-1

MANIPULATING VIEWS................................................................................................ 4-2

Changing Location ..................................................................................... 4-2
CONTROLLING THE VIEW DISPLAY ......................................................................... 4-5

Using Hidden Line and Tangent Line Display........................................... 4-5 Removing Views ........................................................................................ 4-6 Modifying the View Scale.......................................................................... 4-6 Modifying View Boundaries, Callouts, and the Reference Point .............. 4-6 Changing a Cross-Section .......................................................................... 4-9 Modifying Assembly Views..................................................................... 4-10 Creating Exploded Views......................................................................... 4-13 Changing View Type ............................................................................... 4-14
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 4-15

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ...................................................... 4-16
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 4-18

EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views......................................................... 4-19 EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views ......................................... 4-25 EXERCISE 3: Modifying Assembly and Multi-Model Drawing ............ 4-28
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 4-36

SHOWING DIMENSIONS

5-1

DRAWING DETAILS....................................................................................................... 5-2

Showing and Erasing Detail Items ............................................................. 5-2
MANIPULATING DETAIL ITEMS................................................................................. 5-5

Changing Location ..................................................................................... 5-5 Changing Dimension Displays................................................................... 5-7
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 5-12 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 5-14 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 5-18

EXERCISE 1: Displaying Dimensions .................................................... 5-19 EXERCISE 2: Displaying Axes............................................................... 5-29 EXERCISE 3: Displaying Symbolic Dimensions.................................... 5-31 EXERCISE 4: Displaying Dual Dimensions ........................................... 5-36

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-41

CREATING DIMENSIONS

6-1

CREATING DIMENSIONS ON A DRAWING................................................................6-2

Creating Driven Ordinate Dimensions .......................................................6-2 Creating Reference Dimensions .................................................................6-3 Redefining Features in Drawing.................................................................6-3 Creating Draft Dimensions .........................................................................6-4 Hole Tables.................................................................................................6-4
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................6-5 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..........................................................................................6-7

EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing ...................................6-8 EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme..............................6-13 EXERCISE 3: Create Ordinate Dimension Automatically and Create a Hole Table ................................................................................................6-16
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................6-19

CREATING NOTES

7-1

ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING ................................................................................7-2

Specifying the Content of a Note................................................................7-2 Manipulating Notes ....................................................................................7-3 Saving Notes...............................................................................................7-6 Modifying the Text Style............................................................................7-6 Creating Style Libraries..............................................................................7-8
INSERTING OLE OBJECTS.............................................................................................7-8

Manipulating the Embedded Object ...........................................................7-9
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................7-11 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................7-11 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................7-12

EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing ...........................................7-12 EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes................................................7-17 EXERCISE 3: Manipulating the Note and Inserted Objects ....................7-19
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................7-21

TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS

8-1

LINEAR TOLERANCES...................................................................................................8-2

Tolerance Standard .....................................................................................8-2 Specify Dimension Tolerances before Model Creation..............................8-2 Displaying Dimension Tolerances..............................................................8-3

Changing Dimension Tolerances ............................................................... 8-3
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES.......................................................................................... 8-4

Creating a Geometric Tolerance ................................................................ 8-4 Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings........................................... 8-7 Modifying a Geometric Tolerance ............................................................. 8-7
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS................................................................................ 8-7 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................ 8-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 8-10

EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric Tolerances ......................... 8-10
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-17

DRAWING TABLES

9-1

PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES................................................................................ 9-2

Creating a Drawing Table .......................................................................... 9-2 Setting the Justification for Each Column.................................................. 9-3 Adding Text to the Cells ............................................................................ 9-4 Manipulating a Drawing Table .................................................................. 9-5 Repositioning Drawing Tables................................................................... 9-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 9-8

EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing Table ......................... 9-8 EXERCISE 2: Manipulate an Embedded Excel Spreadsheet and Movie Object ....................................................................................................... 9-15
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 9-17

COSMETIC FEATURES

10-1

COSMETIC SKETCHES ................................................................................................ 10-2

Working with Regular Sections ............................................................... 10-2 Working with Projected Sections............................................................. 10-2 Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing.............................................. 10-3
COSMETIC THREADS .................................................................................................. 10-3

Creating Cosmetic Threads ...................................................................... 10-3 Displaying Cosmetic Threads and Parameters on a Drawing .................. 10-5 Changing the Format of a Thread Note.................................................... 10-6
USER-DEFINED FEATURES ........................................................................................ 10-7

Creating a UDF ........................................................................................ 10-8 Placing a UDF ........................................................................................ 10-11 Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic Threads UDF............... 10-13 Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole .................................. 10-13
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 10-15

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch ........................................... 10-15

EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads ............................................10-18 EXERCISE 3: Using UDF to Standardize a Thread Note......................10-22 EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard Holes .......................10-27
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................10-30

2-D DRAFTING

11-1

2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES ...................................................................................11-2

2-D Drafting Applications ........................................................................11-2 Types Draft Geometry ..............................................................................11-2 Locating Draft Geometry..........................................................................11-3 Manipulating Draft Geometry ..................................................................11-5 Modifying Draft Geometry.......................................................................11-6
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................11-7 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................11-8

EXERCISE 1: Updating a 2-D Drawing ..................................................11-8
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................11-13

SYMBOLS

12-1 Creating Symbol Geometry ......................................................................12-2 Adding Text to a Symbol..........................................................................12-2 Grouping Symbol Geometry.....................................................................12-3 Controlling Symbols.................................................................................12-4 Storing Symbols .......................................................................................12-5

CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS ..............................................................................12-2

PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING ......................................................................12-6

Defining the Relationship between the Symbol Instance and Original Symbol......................................................................................................12-7 Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol Instance.............................12-7 Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance .............................................12-8
REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS ...........................................................................12-9

Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing............................................12-9
USING WELDING SYMBOLS.......................................................................................12-9 USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS........................................................................12-10 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................12-11 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................12-12

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text...........................12-12 EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups ................................................12-18
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................12-24

USING LAYERS TO CONTROL DRAWING DISPLAY

13-1

LAYERS IN DRAWING MODE .................................................................................... 13-2

Setting up Default Layers in Drawing...................................................... 13-2 Creating a Layer Manually in a Drawing................................................. 13-5 Specifying the Display of a Layer............................................................ 13-6 Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing............................................... 13-7
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 13-8 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 13-9

EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing Display ...................... 13-9
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-14

RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS

14-1

RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES ............................................................................ 14-2

Identifying the Failed Feature .................................................................. 14-2 Determining the Cause of the Failure ...................................................... 14-3 Fixing the Failure ..................................................................................... 14-4 Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures ................................................ 14-5
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 14-6

EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features................................................ 14-6
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 14-11

DRAWING FORMATS

15-1

CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT............................................................................ 15-2

Importing a Format from Another System............................................... 15-2 Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting....................................................... 15-3 Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode ....................................................... 15-4
ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT ................................................................. 15-4

Including Parametric Information in a Format......................................... 15-4
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 15-6 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 15-7

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing Format ......................... 15-7
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 15-17

CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS

16-1

CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT ................................................................. 16-2

Generating a BOM Report ....................................................................... 16-2 Manipulating a BOM Report.................................................................... 16-4 Using Repeat Region Relations................................................................ 16-7 Calculating a Total Cost........................................................................... 16-8

Creating a Summation ..............................................................................16-9 Pagination .................................................................................................16-9 Showing BOM Balloons.........................................................................16-10
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................16-11 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................16-12

EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM..........................................16-12
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................16-23

FAMILY TABLES

17-1

ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES ...........................................................17-2

Saving Space with Instances.....................................................................17-2 Reducing Development Time ...................................................................17-2
CREATING A FAMILY TABLE ....................................................................................17-2

Creating the Generic Part..........................................................................17-2 Specifying Items for the Table to Drive ...................................................17-3 Creating New Instances ............................................................................17-3 Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances .........................................17-5
USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE........................................................17-5

Creating a Parts Catalog ...........................................................................17-5 Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance .......................................17-8
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................17-11 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................17-12

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table .................................................17-12 EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing ...........................17-18 EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each Instance ..............17-21
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................17-22

WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS

18-1

MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS ...............................................................................18-2

Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration Process ..........................................18-2
APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT .............................................18-3

Reducing the Repaint Time ......................................................................18-3 Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time...........................................18-4 Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time...........................................................18-8 Implementing the Large Drawing Configuration File Settings ................18-8 Drawing Rep Tool ....................................................................................18-9 Merging Drawings ..................................................................................18-10 Model Simplification..............................................................................18-11
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................18-14

EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint Time.....................18-14

EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations ............................. 18-19 EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One .................................. 18-21 EXERCISE 4: Create a Drawings Rep .................................................. 18-23
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-25

DRAWING STANDARDS AND TEMPLATES

19-1

SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS.......................................................... 19-2

Setting up Your Configuration File.......................................................... 19-2 Setting up Your Drawing Setup File ........................................................ 19-2
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 19-4 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 19-5 CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES ......................................................................... 19-9

Model Requirements .............................................................................. 19-10 Template View Definition...................................................................... 19-10 Dimension and Balloon Priority............................................................. 19-11 View Symbol.......................................................................................... 19-11
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 19-12

EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through the Drawing Setup File.......................................................................................................... 19-12 EXERCISE 2: Creating Drawing Templates ......................................... 19-16
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-25

PLOTTING

20-1 Print Destination....................................................................................... 20-2

PLOTTING INTERACTIVELY...................................................................................... 20-2 Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility ............................................................................ 20-6

Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment............................................... 20-6
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 20-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 20-12

EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings ................................... 20-12
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 20-16

MARKUP MODEL

21-1

ENGINEERING MARKUPS .......................................................................................... 21-2

Creating a Markup.................................................................................... 21-2 Saving and Viewing a Markup................................................................. 21-3 Retrieving Markups.................................................................................. 21-3
OVERLAYS .................................................................................................................... 21-4 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 21-5

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing .....................................21-5
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................21-9

CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS

A-1

CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP FILES ........................................A-2

Using Configuration File Options ............................................................. A-2 Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options................................................... A-3
TOLERANCE TABLES....................................................................................................A-5

Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards ............................................... A-5
ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS ................................................................................A-7 LABORATORY PRACTICAL .........................................................................................A-9

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance with the ISO Standard ..................................................................................................... A-9
MODULE SUMMARY...................................................................................................A-22

USING PTC HELP

B-1

PTC HELP OVERVIEW...................................................................................................B-2

PTC Help Features..................................................................................... B-2
USING THE Pro/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM ...............................................................B-2

Launching Help: Four Methods................................................................. B-2 There are four procedures for launching the help system.......................... B-2
PTC HELP MODULE LIST..............................................................................................B-7

PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT

C-1

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE...................................................C-2 OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS ..................................................................C-2

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail ............................................ C-2 Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone ...................................... C-3 Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web ......................................... C-3 Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support .......................................... C-3 Routing Your Technical Support Calls ..................................................... C-4 Assigning Technical Support Call Priorities ............................................. C-5 Software Performance Report Priorities.................................................... C-5
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT.....................................................................C-5 ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................C-5 ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................C-6 FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ................................................C-6

Terminology used by Technical Support................................................... C-7
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION ....................................................................C-8

CONTACT INFORMATION ........................................................................................... C-9

PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services. ..........................C-9 Telephone .................................................................................................C-10
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ C-14

INDEX…………………………………………………………………………………….I-1

Module

1
Introduction
In this module, you learn how to use configuration and drawing setup files to change various characteristics of the drawing. You also learn how to automate the drawing creation process using templates.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create and modify configuration and drawing setup files. Use an existing drawing template.

Page 1-1

NOTES

PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER
Pro/ENGINEER drawings are generated from 3-D models instead of drafting lines. The resulting drawings are fully associated to the models. That is, when you make a change to the model, the system reflects that change in the drawing; likewise, when you make a change to the drawing, it reflects that change in the associated models. The drawing appearance can be easily controlled and customized during the drawing creation process. However, in order to reduce repeated work, to achieve a consistent look and for standardization purposes, it is very important to define the drawing appearance in advance. You can use configuration files, drawing setup files and drawing templates to predefine drawing appearance prior to drawing creation.

Using Drawing Templates
Templates can help significantly automate the drawing creation process. However, they are often practically used as a good starting point for creating a production-ready drawing and typically need some sort of manipulation. For instance, after the drawing is created using a template, you might need to add views and insert detailed items to suit your need. Within drawing templates you can set up parametric views, tables, notes, symbols, and other intelligent information. Information from the model can also be extracted, and fed into drawing automatically. Drawing templates can automate the drawing creation process in the following ways: • • • • • • Define the layout of views Set view display Place notes Define tables Create snap lines Show dimensions

Pag e 1 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 1 Creating a drawing using a drawing template.

There are default templates provided by the system. Customized drawing templates can also be created. These drawing templates will typically be created and maintained by a system administrator. The creation of drawing templates will be discussed in a later chapter. Once these templates are created, they can be used during drawing creation.

Using Configuration Files
Using Pro/ENGINEER configuration files, you can customize your working environment by specifying startup values for environment options and other global settings. For example, you can turn the bell on or off, select a suitable background color, or set the model display to hidden line mode.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 3

NOTES

Some configuration file options are not retroactive. For example, you can use the configuration file options to define the value and the format of the dimensional tolerances when you create the model. However you can not use the same technique to change the value and the format of the dimensional tolerances already exist in a model and it’s drawing. So it is very important to customize the configuration files in advance. The following table lists some of the configuration file options that affect the appearance of a drawing. For a complete listing of the configuration file options available in Pro/ENGINEER, refer to PTC HELP.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawings

Option
drawing_file_editor drawing_setup_file

Value
editor protab filename.dtl

Description
Sets the editor that you can use to edit drawing setup files (.dtl). Points the system to the file containing drawing setup parameters. All new drawings use this file as the default setup file. Makes the model (part, or assembly) read-only in a drawing. If set to “yes,” the system defines the current draft coordinate values as model units rather than drawing units. Controls the default option from the PICK MANY menu. If set to “yes,” the default is Across Box . If set to “no,” the default is Inside Box . Sets up macros, allowing you execute a set of commands using an established key sequence. Specifies the directory in which the system should store drawing setup files. If you do not set it, the system uses the default setup directory. Controls whether the system copies associated drawings automatically with parts and assemblies.

draw_models_read_only draw_points_in_model_ units dwg_select_across_ pick_box mapkey

no yes no yes no yes keystroke

pro_dtl_setup_dir

directory path

rename_drawings_with_ object

none part assem both

save_objects

changed_and _specified changed all

Controls whether the system stores an object and its dependent objects (such as a part used in an assembly).

Pag e 1 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Files Automatically Loaded by the System
Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several directories. If a particular option is present in more than one configuration file, however, it uses the latest value. When the system initially starts, it reads in configuration files from the following directories, in the order in which they are listed: •
Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which you install Pro/ENGINEER) – Usually, only the system administrator has the ability to change the options in this file because they are generally company standards and you cannot override them with other configuration files. Use this file to lock in certain requirements for all users.

(the directory in which you install Pro/ENGINEER) – The system administrator also manages this file to set global search paths to library directories. Other configuration files can override the options in this file.
Config.pro in the loadpoint/text directory Config.pro in the your home directory – This file is located in your home directory. If the system encounters an option in this file that is the same as one in the loadpoint config.pro file, it uses this option, overriding the option in the other file. Config.pro in the current directory

– This file is located in the directory from which you launched Pro/ENGINEER. If the system encounters an option in this file that is the same as one in the loadpoint config.pro directory or the home directory config.pro, it uses this option, overriding the others. Note:
If you do not set an option in any of these configuration files, the system uses the default value for that option.

Editing the Configuration File during a Pro/ENGINEER Session
You should set the options in your configuration file before you start a Pro/ENGINEER session.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 5

NOTES

Global Considerations
Keep in mind that configuration file options impact your model globally— that is, they affect the model in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER and they affect every associated drawing. To control the appearance of an individual drawing, you can modify your drawing setup file.

Using Drawing Setup Files
To change the drawing appearance, you can modify the individual items, such as the height of a selected text. You can also change the characteristics of all items of a drawing by accessing the drawing setup file of that drawing. By modifying this drawing setup file, you can customize the characteristics of the current drawing such as dimension and note text height, text orientation, geometric tolerance standards, font properties, drafting standards, and arrow lengths, etc. The drawing setup file of a drawing is a local copy of the system default drawing setup file. When creating a drawing, PRO/ENGINEER copies the default drawing setup file into the new drawing. You can then modify this local copy to control the appearance of the current drawing, without affecting other modes of Pro/ENGINEER or other drawings.

Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File
In order to standardize drawing and reduce repeated work, you should set the options in the default drawing setup file to appropriate values. You can specify your default drawing setup file by setting the configuration file drawing_setup_file. This option is not retroactive. So it is important to perform this step before starting your drawing.

Pag e 1 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING INTERFACE
Drawing mode interface is similar to that of part mode and assembly mode.

Performing Tasks
Drawing mode provides multiple ways of performing tasks. Depending on the type of the task, you can use DRAWING menu, pull-down menus, popup menu, icons or even the MODEL TREE.

Drawing Menu
The DRAWING menu is located to the right of the graphic pane. It is also known as side menu or MENU MANAGER. You can access commands to perform tasks such as, view creation, table creation, drawing setup etc.

Pull-Down Menu
The pull-down menus are located on the top of the graphic pane. You can use them to perform tasks that are available in other modes of Pro/ENGINEER. You can also use them to perform various drawing specific tasks such as, inserting and editing detail items, changing the format of detail items etc.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 7

NOTES

Figure 2: Edit and Insert menus

Figure 3: Sketch and Format menus

Pag e 1 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Icons
Icons are short cuts for commands located in MENU MANAGER and pulldown menus. Using icons located on the top and right side of the graphic pane, you can perform various drawing tasks. You can also add the system defined icons, create mapkeys and assign icons to mapkeys just like in other modes of Pro/ENGINEER.
Table 2: Drawing icons

Icon

Description
Set active drawing model icon. Move and align several objects. Delete one or more drawing objects. Clean up dimensions in one or more views. Switch one or more detail items to another view. Change sheet. Enable sketching chain. Remember parametric sketching references. Select. Create lines. Create circles and ellipses. Create arcs. Create a fillet. Create a spline curve. Create a point. Create a chamfer.

Pop-up Menu
A quick and easy way to perform a task is to use the pop-up menu. To access the pop-up menu, you need to go through the following steps: • • • Click [Select] icon.

Select the object using left mouse button. To select multiple objects, press and hold < Shift > key. Press and hold the right mouse button to access a pop-up menu.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 9

NOTES

Right mouse button is object sensitive. Depending on the type of selected object, a specific set of commands will be enabled. The following figure contains examples of object specific commands for views and dimensions.

Figure 4: Object Sensitive Pop-up Menu

Model Tree
You can use the Model Tree to perform drafting selections and contextsensitive actions such as showing dimensions.

Figure 5: Use the MODEL TREE Short Cut Commands

Messages
Just like other using modes of Pro/ENGINEER, it is important to read messages in drawing mode. When performing tasks such as showing axis by view, and inserting note with leaders, the messages will guide you through the process. By default, the message area is located on top of the graphic pane and below the icons.
Pag e 1 - 1 0 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Option drawing_units Value inch foot mm cm m drawing_text_height 0.15625 value Specifies the default text height for all text in the drawing using the units set by the configuration file option drawing_units. Specifies the default thickness for new text. Specifies the default ratio between the text width and the text height. The system maintains this ratio until you change the width using the Text Width option. Description Specifies the units for all drawing parameters.

text_thickness text_width_factor

0.000000 0<value<0.5 0.80000 0.235<value<8

Introduction

Pag e 1- 11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To customize Pro/ENGINEER by creating a configuration and drawing setup file.

Method
In first exercise, a configuration file is created in the current working directory. In second exercise, drawing templates are used to automate the drawing creation process. In second exercise, a drawing setup file is created and the default values for options are modified.

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing Using a Configuration file
Task 1. file. Customize your working session by creating a configuration

1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_320. Click File > Set Working Directory > FUND_DRAW_320 > OK . 2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. Click Utilities > Options . The OPTIONS dialog box appears on the screen. 3. In the OPTION input box of the OPTIONS dialog box, begin entering the first option listed in the table below. The system will complete the option. Select the VALUE from the drop down list. Click Add/Change . Do the same for each option.

Pag e 1 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 4: Configuration File Options Option bell display highlight_new_dims parenthesize_ref_dim Value NO HIDDENVIS YES YES

4. Apply the changes and save the configuration file to a new name. Click Apply , followed by as the name and click OK . [Save as ]. Enter [ my_config ]

5. Click Close from the OPTIONS dialog box.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 13

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Create a Drawing Using a Template
Task 1. Create a new drawing of a rotor shield part with a previously created drawing template. 1. Click File > New > Drawing . 2. Enter [rotor_shield] as the name. Leave the Use defult template checkbox checked and click OK . 3. Specify the default model. In the DEFAULT MODEL area, click Browse and locate 1490_SHIELD.PRT, followed by Open . 4. In the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area, leave the Use template checkbox checked. 5. Specify the template. In the TEMPLATE area, click Browse . Locate TEMPLATE_PRT.DRW, followed by Open . 6. Click OK in the NEW DRAWING dialog box. 7. This model has a family table. Specify the generic instance as the default model. In the SELECT INSTANCE dialog box, leave The generic highlighted. Click Open . 8. As you can see, the views are placed automatically. Parametric information are extracted from the model and filled in tables and notes. 9. Save and erase the drawing. Task 2. Create a new drawing using a drawing template.

1. Click File > New > Drawing . 2. Enter [X123456] for the name and click OK . Ensure the Use Default Template checkbox is checked. You will need to browse for both the Default Model and template. 3. Click the Browse button to locate the Default Model and Template. Make sure the NEW DRAWING dialog box options are selected as shown in the following figure. The model and the template are both stored in your current directory.

Pag e 1 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 6: New Drawing Dialog Box

4. Click OK . The drawing should look like the following figure. 5. Save the drawing.

Figure 7: The Initial Drawing

Introduction

Pag e 1- 15

NOTES

Note:
The template specified the following actions to take place automatically: - Place four views - Set the scale of all views to .500 - Set the display of the isometric view to No Hidden - Set the display of the planar views to Hidden Line - Place a standard note on the drawing - Create snap lines offset a predefined distance from the views - Show the dimensions for the model with a view location priority of FRONT, RIGHT and TOP. -Locate the dimensions on the snap lines

Pag e 1 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Set Up a Default Drawing Setup File
Task 1. Edit the drawing setup file of an existing drawing and save it to the disk. 1. Modify the existing drawing setup file. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . The OPTIONS dialog box appears with the initial settings for the drawing setup file. 2. Change the options as shown in the following table. Scroll down through the list, select the option, enter the value and click Add/Change .
Table 5: Drawing Setup File Options Option drawing_text_height crossec_arrow_length crossec_arrow_width witness_line_offset draw_arrow_style circle_axis_offset Value 0.2 0.25 0.1 0.15 filled 0.25

3. Save the changes to the file. Click type [my_dtl ]and click OK . 4. Click OK from the OPTIONS dialog box.

[Save as], for the name

5. Zoom-in to view the changes to the arrowhead styles. Task 2. Add an option to the configuration file so that the system always loads the drawing setup file that you just created for all new drawings.
1.

Click Utilities > Options . The default configuration file is
CURRENT_SESSION.

2. Open the file MY_CONFIG.PRO. Click MY_CONFIG.PRO, and click Open.

[Open], select

Introduction

Pag e 1- 17

NOTES

3. For option, type [drawing_setup_file] click Browse , select MY_DTL.DTL, and click Open . Click Add/Change . 4. Click OK to close the OPTIONS dialog box. 5. Close the current window. Click Window > Close.

Pag e 1 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can use configuration files to customize the drawing. You use drawing setup files to customize the drawing. You can use a drawing template to automate the drawing creation.

Introduction

Pag e 1- 19

Module

2
Creating Views
In this module, you learn about the different view types and how to place views on a drawing.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create a drawing and place various types of views. Create different types of cross-section views.

Page 2-1

NOTES

VIEW CREATION
There are several different types of views you can add to a Pro/ENGINEER drawing. These include general, detailed, projection, auxiliary, and revolved, as shown in the following figure. As you create each view type, you can specify how much of the model should be visible in the drawing, and whether the view should be of a single surface on the model or have a cross-section. You can also specify view scales for certain types of views.
Revolved View Auxiliary View

General View

Projection View

General View

Detail View

Figure 1: View Types.

Creating Different View Types
General Views
When a drawing is created without a template, the first view of a model that the system places on a drawing is a general view. These view types are unique because they enable you to specify any orientation of the model for the view. Initially, the system places a general view in its default
Pag e 2 - 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

orientation; you can then reorient it using default datum planes or predefined named views.

Orienting General Views Using Predefined Named Views
You can define the orientation of a general view by using a named view that has been saved previously in a Part or Assembly. When creating saved views, you should use default datum planes as the references because they are the only references on your model that will never change.

Orienting General Views Using Default Datum Planes
When manually orienting a general view, you should specify top, bottom, left, right, front, or back as the primary direction (corresponding to the direction of your computer screen such as front of the screen, top of the screen, etc.). You should use default datum planes as the references because they are the only references on your model that will never change. When specifying datum planes for references, keep in mind that the yellow side of the datum plane faces the side of the screen that you pick. For example, if you select top and DTM2, the yellow side of DTM2 faces the topside of the screen.

Projection Views
A projection view is an orthographic projection seen from the top, bottom, left, or right of a selected drawing view. To create it, you specify a location with respect to another drawing view and Pro/ENGINEER automatically determines how to project it. Once it determines a suitable view, it automatically orients and positions it correctly. Once you have placed a projection view, the system associates it with the view from which it projected it. If the parent view moves, the projection view maintains its alignment.

Auxiliary Views
An auxiliary view is a projection of another view 90 degrees from an inclined surface, a datum plane, or along an axis. Consider an auxiliary view to be a projection at an odd angle, as opposed to the right, left, top, or bottom.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 3

NOTES

• • •

If you pick an edge as the reference, the view shows the surface to which the edge belongs, parallel to the computer screen. If you pick a datum plane, the view shows the datum plane parallel to the computer screen. If you pick a datum axis, the view looks along the datum axis. This would be useful for looking through a hole on a model.

As with projection views, once you have placed an auxiliary view, the system associates it with the view from which it is projected. If the parent view moves, the auxiliary view maintains its alignment.

Detailed Views
A detailed view displays a portion of an existing view in a larger scale, making it easier to see the geometry and dimensions. To create a detailed view, you must specify: • • • • A location for the detailed view A reference point on the model to define the location of interest. A view boundary. You will sketch a spline around the area that you want to show. A location for the callout note

Pro/ENGINEER relates a detailed view to the view from which you create it, but you can move the detail view independently of its parent.

Revolved Views
A revolved view is a section view revolved 90 degrees about the cutting plane line and offset along its length. The section is an area cross-section, showing only material cut by the cutting plane.

Graph Views
A graph view shows a datum graph on a drawing to associate a function with the part. Once you have created the datum graph feature, you can show it in your drawing, as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 2 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 2: Graph View

Controlling the View Display
In addition to determining which type of view to place, you can also control how much of the model the system shows in the view by using these options in the VIEW TYPE menu, as shown in the following figure: • • •
Full View

– Displays the entire model in the view.

Half View – Displays only a portion of the model using a datum plane to control how much is visible. Broken View

– Displays a portion of a large model by removing an area of the model from the display and brings the pieces of the model on either side of the removed area closer together. ! Several options exist for defining what the break will look like. You can manually sketch the break geometry or choose S-curve or heartbeat break geometry.

Partial View – Shows a localized portion of the model using the same technique that you would use to create a detailed view.
Broken View Partial View

Full View

Half View

Figure 3: View Options.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 5

NOTES

Adding Cross-Sections
You can add the following types of cross-sections to a view, as shown in the following figure: • • •
Full Half

– Displays the entire view as a cross-section.

– Displays the cross-section on one side of a datum plane without affecting the other side.

Local

– Displays the cross-section in localized areas by sketching a boundary (using the same techniques that you would use to create detailed and partial views).

– Displays the entire model as one cross-section while a local area displays another.
Full and Local

Note:
Use the Of Surface option in the VIEW TYPE menu to show only one surface in a particular view.

Figure 4: Cross-Section Types. From the top left, clockwise: Full cross-section, Half cross-section, Full & Local cross-section Local cross-section.

Full Cross-Sectional Views
Using the XSEC TYPE menu, you can manipulate full cross-sectional views in the following ways:

Pag e 2 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• • • • • •

Use Total Xsec to show all edges of a full cross-section, including those behind the cutting plane, as shown in the following figure. Use Total Align to show a total cross-section that is unfolded around an axis. Use Total Unfold to show a total cross-section unfolded so that the cutting planes are parallel to the screen. Use Area Xsec to show only the geometry on the cutting plane, as shown in the following figure. Use Align Xsec to show an area cross-section that is unfolded around an axis, as shown in the following figure. Use Unfold Xsec to show an area cross-section unfolded so that the cutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5: Total versus Area cross-section. From the left, Total cross-section, Area cross-section

Figure 6: Aligned Cross-Section

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 7

NOTES

Figure 7: Unfolded Cross-Section

Specifying the View Scale
When you create a view in a drawing, the scale of the view appears at the bottom of the graphics area. Pro/ENGINEER determines the scale based on the model and drawing sheet size. When creating a general view and a detailed view, you have the option to specify a unique scale for the new view.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists configuration file options that affect view display. The default values are shown in italics.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting View Display Option default_draw_scale Value no value (positive) Definition Sets the default drawing scale for views added with the No Scale option. When set to “no,” the system does not set a default scale. You can set this option to a positive number to predefine the scale when you choose No Scale. Adds view names automatically for projection views in the format “VIEW viewnameviewname.” Establishes the view orientation as isometric, user-defined, or trimetric.

make_proj_view_notes

no yes

orientation

trimetric isometric user_default

Pag e 2 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

selection_of_removed_ entities

yes no

Controls the selection of entities in front of a crosssection. If set to “yes,” you can select entities even if they are in front of the cross-section, clipped, or erased with the EDGE DISP menu.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the drawing setup file options that affect view display. The default values are shown in italics.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting View Display Option broken_view_offset Value 1.0 value Definition Sets the offset distance between the two halves of a broken view.

crossec_arrow_length

0.0625 value

Sets the length of the cross-section cutting plane arrow heads.

crossec_arrow_width

0.1875 value

Sets the width of the cross-section cutting plane arrows.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 9

NOTES

crossec_arrow_style

tail_online head_online

Sets the arrowhead display, either head online or tail online.

crossec_text_place

after_head before_tail above_tail above_line no_text

Sets location of the crosssection text.

cutting_line_adapt

no yes

If set to “yes,” the system uses adaptive line fonts to display cross-section arrows; that is, they begin and end in the middle of a complete line segment. Sets the default text height for view names and arrows in crosssection and detailed views. Sets the default text thickness for view names and arrows in crosssection and detailed views. Sets the line style for circles indicating a detailed view in a drawing. The value for this option can be any available system-defined or user-defined line styles. Determines the text displayed in non-ASME94 detail view reference notes.

def_view_text_height

0 value

def_view_text_thickness

0 value

detail_circle_line_style

solidfont font_name

detail_circle_note_text

default

Pag e 2 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

detailed_view_circle

on off

Controls the display of the circle encompassing the detailed view. Controls the display of the half view. If set to “solid,” system draws solid lines where material is present. If set to “symmetry,” system draws a centerline extending beyond the part and acting as a break line. If set to “none,” the system draws the object a short distance past the symmetry line. You must specify a datum to create the half view and use a centerline to indicate the actual half.

half_view_line

solid symmetry none

Solid

Symmetry

None

projection_type show_total_unfold_seam

third_angle first_angle yes no

Specifies the projection type: first or third angle. Controls the display of seams in a total unfolded cross-section.

view_scale_denominator

0 integer

Determines the view scale denominator for the view scale before you simplify the fraction.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 11

NOTES

view_scale_format

decimal fractional ratio_colon

Determines whether the system expresses a scale as a decimal, fraction, or ratio.

Pag e 2 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create a drawing and place different views types on the drawing.

Method
In the first exercise, a new drawing of a plunger part is created and different view types are created. In the second exercise, a new drawing of a barrel part is created and views are created. The barrel part is modified, and the associative drawing also updates.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger

Figure 8: Finished Plunger Body Drawing

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 13

NOTES

Task 1.

Retrieve the plunger part to become familiar with its geometry.

1. Click File > Open > PLUNGER_BODY.PRT > Open. 2. Spin the model to review the geometry. 3. Click Window > Close Widow . Task 2. Create a new drawing named PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as shown in the preceding figure. Use PLUNGER_BODY.PRT as the model. Place a general view and two projection views. 1. Click File > New > Drawing , enter [PLUNGER_BODY] as drawing name. Clear the Use default template checkbox and click OK . 2. Accept the defaults in the NEW DRAWING dialog box and click OK . 3. Place a general view. Click Views , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view by centering it at the bottom of the drawing. 4. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. Accept defaults and select DTM1 on the screen for the Front and DTM2 on the screen for the Top. Click OK .

Figure 9: First View

Pag e 2 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Note:
You should use default datum planes to orient general views. When picking datum planes to face in a particular direction, the yellow side of the datum will face in the specified direction.

5. Place a projection view to the left of the first view, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view to the left of the first view.

Figure 10: First Projection

6. Place a second projection view above the first projection view that you just created, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view above the projection view.

Figure 11: Second Projection
C reat ing Vi ew s Pag e 2- 15

NOTES

Task 3. Create a general view with a cross-section through the middle of the model. 1. Click Add View > General > Full View >Section > No Scale > Done . 2. To define the type of cross-section, accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view above the first view. 3. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. Expand the Saved Views list, select FRONT and click Set > OK .

Figure 12: Cross-section A-A 4. Click Create , accept the defaults and click Done . Enter [A] as the cross-section name. 5. Specify DTM3 as the plane to use for the cross-section. Select DTM3 from the MODEL TREE. 6. Select the second projection view in the upper left corner of the screen as the view in which to locate the cutting plane arrows. Task 4. Create a detailed view that displays the tab in the lower right corner of the second projection view. 1. Click Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the following figure. Enter [4] as the scale.

Pag e 2 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 13: DETAIL 1

2. Define the center point of the detail view. Zoom in on the lower right corner of the second projection view. Select the edge as shown in the following figure.

Figure 14: DETAIL 1 Center Point

3. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to the previous figures). Click the middle mouse button to complete the spline. 4. Enter [1] as the name. 5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the lower left of the circle.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 17

NOTES

Task 5. Create a detailed view displaying the geometry of two of the cooling fins on the plunger body shown in Section A-A. 1. Click Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15: DETAIL 2

2. Enter [4] as the scale of the detailed view. 3. Zoom in on Section A-A and select the edge of the flange that is second from the right as the center point, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 16: DETAIL 2 Center Point 4. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to the previous figures). Enter [2] as the name of the detailed view. 5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the upper left of the callout.

Pag e 2 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 6. Create a partial view that displays the cross-sectional geometry of one of the tabs on the plunger body. 1. Click Add View > General > Partial View > Section > Scale > Done . 2. Click Done to accept the default values for the type of section to be created. 3. Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the following figure. Enter [4] as the scale for the partial view.

Figure 17: Cross-Section B-B

4. Orient the view using the FRONT saved view. Click OK . 5. Create a planar cross-section through the hole of one of the tabs on the plunger body. Click Create , accept defaults, and click Done . Enter [B] as the name of the cross-section. 6. Click Make Datum and create a datum that goes through the axis in the tab and parallel to DTM3. If the axis or datum plane is not visible on the drawing, turn on the display and pan the drawing to
C reat ing Vi ew s Pag e 2- 19

NOTES

repaint. You may find it helpful to select DTM3 from the model tree. 7. Select the projection view in the upper left corner of the screen to specify the view in which to place the cross-section arrows. 8. Specify the center point for the outer boundary on the current view. Select an edge of the through hole, as shown in the following figure, and sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the geometry for the partial view.

Figure 18: Partial View Center Point

Task 7.

Create a 3-D view in an isometric orientation.

1. Click Add View > General > Done . Locate the view in the upper right corner of the drawing. 2. Orient the view similar to the view shown in the following figure. Temporarily orient the model to the FRONT saved view. 3. From the TYPE pull-down list select ANGLES. From the REFERENCE pull-down list select VERTICAL as the first reference, enter [-45], and click Apply . 4. Click Add to add a second rotation. From the TYPE pull-down list select HORIZONTAL as the reference and enter [35] and click Apply . 5. If the view is oriented correctly as shown in the following figure, click OK . If the orientation is not correct, repeat steps 2 through 5 of this task.

Pag e 2 - 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 19: Isometric View

6. Click Views > Move View and reposition the views as shown in the finished drawing in the beginning of this exercise. 7. Save the drawing. Click File > Save and accept default name. 8. Close the window.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 21

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Create an Align Cross-Section

Figure 20: Finished Barrel Drawing Task 1. Retrieve the barrel drawing. Create a projection view with an align cross-section through the patterned holes to the right of the first view. 1. Click File > Open > BARREL.DRW > Open . 2. Click Views > Add View > Projection > Full View > Section > Done . 3. Specify the cross-section type. Click Align XSEC > Done . Locate the view to the right of the first view, as shown in the following figure.
Pag e 2 - 2 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 21: Section A-A

4. Click Create > Offset > Done to create an offset cross-section through the center hole and two of the patterned holes. Note:
The One Side/Both Sides options define which way the system cuts the cross-section: in one or both directions perpendicular to the sketching plane. In this case, you could use either one because of DTM2 position, but you should use the default Both Sides .

5. Enter [A] as the name of the cross-section. The barrel part appears on the screen. 6. Select DTM2 as the sketching plane and click Okay to view the sketching plane from above. 7. You may have to show the DTMS_PART_DEF layer to see the datum planes. Click View > Layers and show the layer. Repaint the screen to see the axes and close the LAYERS dialog box 8. For the reference plane click Bottom and select DTM3. Pro/ENGINEER orients the view and places you in Intent Manager. Close the Sketcher Enhancement- Intent Manager window if it appears. 9. Create the section as shown in the following figure. For additional references, select the axes and cylindrical surface of the barrel from the screen as shown in the following figure. 10. Close the REFERENCES dialog box when you have selected the references needed for this sketch. 11. Click Sketch > Line and sketch the two lines shown in the following figure.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 23

NOTES

Select Axis A_2 as a reference

Sketch these lines

Select Axis A_5 as a reference

Select Axis A_1 as a reference Select the both halves of the outside surface as a reference

Figure 22: Sketch for Align Cross-Section

12. Click Sketch > Done to complete the section. 13. Select axis A_1 in the current view as the axis to unfold around. 14. Press the middle mouse button to abort section arrow creation. Task 2. Place a projection view to the right of cross-section A-A. After placing the view, retrieve the model and modify the number of holes. Return to the drawing to observe how the drawing updated and verify that the cross-section is still valid. 1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu, then click Projection > Done . Locate the view to the right of Section A-A, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 23: Projection View Location

Pag e 2 - 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 3. Retrieve the barrel part and modify the number of holes in the barrel to verify that the cross-section updates correctly. 1. Open the barrel part. 2. Click Modify, select one of the 5 patterned holes and select the parameter controlling the number of instances in the pattern. 3. Enter [7] and click Regenerate . 4. View the updated drawing. Click Window > BARREL.DRW . There are now seven holes and the align cross-section updated correctly. 5. Click Window > BARREL.PRT . Change the number of holes back to five and regenerate the model. 6. Save and close BARREL.DRW.

C reat ing Vi ew s

Pag e 2- 25

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can create different view types on a drawing. Views can contain all of the model geometry, a portion of the geometry, or a planar section of the geometry. Drawing views are associative and will update to reflect changes in the model.

Pag e 2 - 2 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

3
Assembly and Multi-Model Drawings
In this module, you learn to create an assembly model drawing. You also learn how to create a drawing with two or more models in the same drawing.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create assembly drawings with exploded views. Create drawings that display views of multiple models.

Page 3-1

NOTES

ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
To create a drawing of an assembly, you must specify an assembly as the model for your drawing. The system then displays the name and type of the model along the bottom of the window.

Adding Exploded Views
When placing an exploded view of an assembly, you can place it in the default explode state, as shown in the following figure. However, if the assembly has multiple explode states, the system allows you to specify which one to display. If you place the default exploded view on the drawing, it automatically updates with any changes that you make to the explode state in the assembly. You can also modify the exploded view on the drawing.

Figure 1: An Exploded View

MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS
Applications
You may need to use two or more models on the same drawing, as shown in the following figure. For example, you may want to create a drawing of a component and the assembly in which it is used. By creating a multi-

Pag e 3 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

model drawing, you can display an assembly and all of its component parts. You can also do the following: • • • Clearly show all part and assembly dimensions in the same drawing. Display several members of the same family with different sets of features. Work with detail items, tables, repeat regions, and so on that belong to any one of the models.

Figure 2: Multi-Model Drawing

Creating and Manipulating Multi-Model Drawings
Adding the Model to the Drawing
Before you can use a model in a view, you must add it to the drawing. However, adding a model to a drawing does not place a view of that model—it only enables the drawing to reference the model so that you can place a view. After you add the model, the system retrieves the part or assembly when you retrieve the drawing.

Setting the Active Model
In multi-model drawings, many operations are model related. For example adding a view, setting the drawing scale and writing relations.

Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings

Pag e 3- 3

NOTES

To add views of a particular model, you must set that model as active, but only one model on the drawing can be the active model at any given time. The system references the active model any time that it needs a default model to perform an operation, such as when you add views or regenerate a model. The last model that you add to a drawing becomes the current model. The system sets the drawing scale of each model independently. You may notice the scale value at the bottom-left corner changing when you set different models. To modify the scale for each model, it must be active. When you add relations, the system adds them to the current model; therefore, you should select a model before adding a relation. The active model name is displayed at the bottom of the graphic pane.

• •

Tips for Working with Multiple Models in a Drawing
When working with multi-model drawings, keep in mind the following: • Pro/ENGINEER allows you to use as many models on a drawing as you need; however, you must add all models that are shown in the drawing to the drawing before you can display them as views. The system retrieves all part and assembly files when it retrieves the drawing. This may dramatically increase your retrieval time for the drawing. Deleting the views of a model does not disassociate the model from the drawing. Once you add a model to a drawing, the system associates that drawing to it, regardless of whether any views are showing. To disassociate a model, you must delete that model from the drawing.

Pag e 3 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create drawings of assembly models and drawings with more than one model.

Method
This exercise creates a new drawing of an assembly and creates the drawing views including exploded views. We also add a second model to the drawing and create views of second model.

EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a Drawing

Figure 3: Upper Housing Drawing

Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings

Pag e 3- 5

NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve the end cap part and the upper housing assembly to view the models that you are going to include in this drawing. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and become familiar with its geometry. 2. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part. 3. Close the active window. 4. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM and become familiar with its geometry. 5. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part. 6. Close the active window. Task 2. Create a new drawing called UPPER_HOUSING that includes the upper housing assembly and the end cap part, as shown in the following figure. 1. Click File>New>Drawing . 2. Enter [UPPER_HOUSING] as the drawing name. Clear the Use default template check box. Confirm that UPPER_HOUSING.ASM is the drawing model and specify a Csize sheet and landscape orientation. Task 3. Place a cross-sectional exploded view of the upper housing assembly on the drawing. The cross-section should be planar and pass through the middle of the housing. 1. Click Views > Section > Exploded > Done . For the cross-section type, accept the defaults and click Done . 2. Place the view in the bottom right corner of the sheet and select the default exploded view. From the SEL STATE menu, confirm that the Default check box is selected and click Done .

Pag e 3 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 4: Exploded View

3. Once you have placed the view, orient it to look like the view shown in the preceding figure. From the ORIENTATION dialog box, click Saved Views to display any views that have been. From the list of saved views, select SIDE and click Set> OK . 4. Create a new cross-section that passes through the middle of the assembly parallel to the screen. Click Create , accept the defaults, and click Done . Enter [A] as the cross-section name. Select datum plane ADTM3 to create the cross-section. Select ADTM3 by clicking Sel By Menu > ADTM3 > Select . 5. Do not display arrows on the drawing at this time. Press the middle mouse button to continue drawing creation without displaying any cross-section arrows for section A-A. 6. After you have placed the view on the drawing, turn off the display for the datum planes and coordinate systems. Task 4. Place a projection view of the upper housing assembly to the left of the first view. Explode the view without a cross-section. Place a second projection view directly above section A-A. Unexplode the view without a cross-section. 1. Create an exploded projection view to the left of section A-A, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Exploded > Done . Locate the view to the left of section A-A. 2. Create an unexploded projection view above section A-A, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Done . Locate the view above section A-A.

Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings

Pag e 3- 7

NOTES

Figure 5: Projection Views

Task 5. Add the plunger cap part as a second model to the drawing. Place a general view of this model in the upper left corner of the drawing and orient the view, then place a projection view to the right of the first view of the plunger cap. 1. Click Dwg Models > Add Model . A dialog box lists all of the parts and assemblies in the current directory. Select PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and click Open . 2. Add a general view of the plunger cap to the drawing. Place the view in the upper left corner of the sheet. Click Add View > Done . Locate the view in the upper left corner of the sheet. 3. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. From the REFERENCE 1 drop-down list, select BACK and select DTM2 on the screen. From the REFERENCE 2 drop-down list, select RIGHT and select DTM1. After orienting the view correctly, click OK .

Pag e 3 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 6: Plunger Cap

Note:
Although you turned off the display of datum planes earlier, the system temporarily turned them back on when orienting the view. After you place the view, the system automatically turns off the datum plane display.

4. Create a projection view of the plunger cap to the right of the first view, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Done . Locate the view to the right of the first view of the plunger cap.

Figure 7: Projection View

Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings

Pag e 3- 9

NOTES

Task 6. Add a 3-D view of the upper housing assembly by setting the upper housing as the active model. Any views that you add to a drawing are for the active model only. 1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model . Select UPPER_HOUSING from the list of models associated with the drawing. It is now the active model. Note:
You can only add views of the active model. Before placing a view on a drawing that contains multiple models, make sure that the correct model is active. Pro/ENGINEER displays the name and type of the active model at the bottom of the screen.

2. Create an exploded view in a 3-D orientation, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View > General > Exploded > Scale > Done .

Figure 8: 3-D View Location

Pag e 3 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. Place the view on the left side of the sheet and select the default exploded view. Locate the view on the left side of the drawing. From the SEL STATE menu, confirm the Default check box is selected and click Done . Enter [.75] as the view scale. 4. Retain the view in the default orientation. In the ORIENTATION dialog box, from the SAVED VIEWS list select DEFAULT and click Set > OK . 5. Save the drawing and close the window.

Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings

Pag e 3- 11

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded views in the drawing. You can create a drawing to display views of more than one model in the same drawing.

Pag e 3 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

4
Modifying Views
In this module, you learn various ways to modify drawing views.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Change view location, orientation, and origin. Remove views from drawings. Modify view boundaries and callouts.

Page 4-1

NOTES

MANIPULATING VIEWS
After placing views in your drawing, you can sometimes improve its appearance by changing the location, orientation, or origin of a view.

Changing Location
You can easily move a view from one place to another within a drawing, however, if it is a parent or child of any other view in the drawing, the parent view causes the child view to move accordingly. For example, moving a General view causes its Projection view, Auxiliary view and Revolved view to update their location because of the position dependency. Remove the position dependency by changing the Child view to a General view for more flexibility. Be aware that this also removes other dependencies and causes the Child view to be completely independent.

Alignment
Using Alignment, you can easily add and remove position dependency between views. You can align a general view to another general view or projection view. This establishes position dependency between the views and causes them to move together. You can unalign a child view to remove only the position dependency. This preserves the view type and the position dependency can be easily reestablished.

Orientation
You can change the initial orientation of a general view at any time after you create it, but remember that the change also affects the orientation of any dependent views. When reorienting a general view, Pro/ENGINEER warns you that the change is also going to affect the child views as well and highlights them on the screen.

Pag e 4 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Note:
When you reorient a general view that has a cross-section, the cross-section must remain parallel to the screen. If the change in orientation does not allow this, Pro/ENGINEER does not reorient the general view.

Origin
Every view has an origin, which controls how the system moves and locates the view, and how the view is affected by changes in the model. By default, the origin of a drawing view is at the intersection of the two diagonals connecting the corners of the view extent, as shown in the following figure.

View origin

Figure 1: View Origin

You may want to prevent a projection view from overlapping other views when the size of the model changes, as shown in the following figure. To set the origin of a drawing view, you can parametrically reference model geometry and the selected point on the model will remain fixed as the view changes.

Note:
The setting of the view origin does not change the current position of the view. The change in origin is only noticeable when views update to changes in the model geometry.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 3

NOTES

Original views

Views overlap with default

Origin set at edge

Figure 2: Changing the View Origin

When specifying a new view origin, keep in mind the following: • • For a general view, the selected location on the geometry becomes fixed. If the feature you reference becomes suppressed or deleted, the system automatically issues a warning and indicates the name of the view with the missing origin. For a projection or auxiliary view, the system transfers the selected point onto a ray passing through the origin of the parent view in the direction of the projection. This projected point becomes the origin of the view. You should control the location of the view origin when entities are related to a view. For example, if draft geometry is related to a view, locate the geometry with respect to the view origin, not the geometry of the model in the view.

Pag e 4 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

CONTROLLING THE VIEW DISPLAY
With View Display settings you can control hidden line display, tangent line display and color of model geometry. You can also remove views from a drawing and modify the view scale.

Using Hidden Line and Tangent Line Display
The display of hidden and tangent lines can be initially set in the drawing setup file. It can also be controlled at the drawing level through environment display settings and in individual views. The preferred method for controlling hidden and tangent line display on your drawing views is to manually set the display of the individual views. This allows you to override the environment display settings, which may vary each time the drawing is opened. See the following figure.

Wireframe Tangent Solid

Hidden Line Tangent Centerline

No Hidden Tangent Phantom

Figure 3: Display Modes

Color of Model Geometry
You can toggle the color display of selected views in Drawing mode between the assigned drawing colors and the colors used in the original model. This saves time because one command allows you to reuse the model colors in the drawing.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 5

NOTES

Removing Views
You can remove views from a drawing by permanently deleting them or temporarily erasing them from the display. You can only delete a view if it does not have any child views dependent on it.

Tips & Techniques:
Erasing and resuming views is an effective technique for improving the view regeneration and repaint times of complicated drawings.

When erasing views, keep in mind the following: • If a note or symbol is attached to the erased view as well as other views, the system also erases the leaders attached to the erased view. When you resume the view, the leaders reappear. You cannot show dimensions on another view if you showed them on the erased view. A detailed view of a view with a local X-sec, erase parent view, or detailed view does not change to a full cross section.

• •

Modifying the View Scale
When you place a view on a drawing, the system controls the scale in one of two ways: by giving it its own separate scale value or by using the drawing scale. Pro/ENGINEER uses the drawing scale in the lower left corner of the screen to control all views that are created without an independent scale. Modifying this global value will cause all views using it to update automatically. In addition, when you create any new views using the drawing scale, the system uses this value. When placing a detailed or general view, you can specify a separate scale value to control only that view and any associated child views.

Modifying View Boundaries, Callouts, and the Reference Point
You can modify the following: • Boundaries of a detailed view, partial view, or local cross-section to show more or less detail.

Pag e 4 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• •

Shape of the detailed view callout. Geometry that the view displays.

The following figure shows one detailed view with the outer boundary and another without it.

Outer boundary shown

Outer boundary erased

Figure 4: Manipulating the View Boundary

Changing the Callout
The size of the spline you use to create the detailed view determines the size of the callout. Therefore, to modify the size of the callout, you must modify the spline. You can use one of several options to define the shape of a callout. See the following figure.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 7

NOTES

Figure 5: Detailed View Callout

Moving the Reference Point
You can move the reference point of the view to a new location to change the geometry that is displayed in the view. The reference point is attached to specific model geometry; if the geometry moves, the view boundary moves with it.
Pag e 4 - 8 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Changing a Cross-Section
In Pro/ENGINEER you can modify cross-sections in the following ways to achieve the correct display: • • • • • • Change the boundary, reference point, and outer display of a local cross-section to show greater or lesser detail of a particular area. Remove it from the view entirely or replace it with another crosssection. Change the direction in which the cutting arrows point. Add a cross-section to a view that was originally placed without one. Add and remove cutting arrows. Assign the cross-hatching based on the material of the model and create user defined cross-hatching style.

Changing Cross-Hatching
• • You can assign the cross-hatching based on the material of the model. You can modify the cross-hatching displayed for a cross-section by changing the angle, spacing, line style, and offset distance between the lines, as well as adding or removing lines. After you have defined a cross-hatching pattern, you can save it in a library for future use on other drawings.

Assembly Cross-Hatching
When modifying the cross-hatching in an assembly view, you can alter the cross-hatching displayed for each component intersected by the cutting plane, as shown in the following figure.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 9

NOTES

Figure 6: Modified Assembly Cross-Hatching

Modifying Assembly Views
In many cases, you may need to create a drawing of an assembly or show a view of the assembly on a part drawing in order to visualize the part. When you alter an assembly view for this purpose, keep in mind the following: • The system must now retrieve every model that it uses in the assembly when it retrieves the drawing. If the assembly is large, the retrieval time could be significant. To avoid this problem, you can create a snapshot. The view may be cluttered by too many hidden lines, which could make it more difficult to visualize the model. To change the line display, you can use several options. You may not be able to view the components on the default exploded view, but you can modify an exploded assembly view.

Pag e 4 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Creating a Snapshot
When you want to show an assembly view on a part drawing without having to retrieve the assembly and all of its parts, you can convert the assembly view to a snapshot, which is a collection of 2-D draft entities that are not associated to the corresponding model. You can then delete the assembly model from the drawing because none of the drawing views reference it. When you convert a view into a snapshot, the following changes occur: • • • • • • • All visible geometry, axes, datums, and other entities in the view become draft entities. All draft entities that were previously associated to the view become free. All attached drawing items (notes, gtols, symbols, draft dimensions, etc.) become unattached. All visible model dimensions become draft dimensions. The system deletes the original view from the drawing. If you select a view that has child views, the system also makes those into snapshots and deletes the original views. If you select a view that has erased children, the system deletes those as well. Note:
Once you convert a view to a snapshot, the system no longer parametrically associates it to the original model in any way. Therefore, if you change the model, the snapshot geometry does not update to reflect the changes.

Removing Entities
You can remove entities from a view by controlling the display of members in an assembly or by using Z-Clipping to exclude geometry behind a specified plane.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 11

NOTES

Controlling the Display of Assembly Members

By setting the display for each component in an assembly individually as shown in the following figure, you can display some members in Hidden Line mode and others in No Hidden mode, as well as blank individual components from the screen. You can also manipulate individual edges of the model by blanking them or changing their display.

Figure 7: Changing Member Display from the default to Phantom Transparent

Excluding Geometry Behind a Specified Plane
Using Z-Clipping, you can modify the view display by excluding all the geometry behind a specified plane. This technique is useful if you want to see some of the hidden lines but not all of them, as shown in the following figure. Using Z-Clipping, you can remove many background lines quickly. When you perform Z-Clipping in a view, keep in mind the following: • • • • If the system cannot regenerate the reference for the clipping plane, ZClipping does not take effect for the view, it displays an error message. You cannot perform Z-Clipping in unfolded cross-sectional, area cross-sectional, exploded, and perspective views. The Z-Clipping of a detailed view is always the same as its parent. You cannot modify it individually. You can place the Z-Clipping reference point on any view.

Pag e 4 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 8: Before and After applying a Z-Clipping

Creating Exploded Views
When you place an assembly view on a drawing, you can place it in a default-exploded state or choose from any existing exploded state. In Drawing mode, you control which components explode, as well as the actual explode distance, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 9: Assembly Explode Modification

When modifying an exploded view, you must specify the following: •
Setting up preferences – Preferences enables you to control whether the components move incrementally or smoothly, the number of components to move at a time (one or many), and whether child components should move with the parent components.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 13

NOTES

While changing the explode distances for a component, you can select a variety of model references to set the explode direction.
Controlling the direction of movement –

– You can drag all components to a new location at the same time so that the system offsets them at the same explode distance.
Specifying the components to move

Note:
If you modify an exploded view in the drawing, the view becomes independent of the exploded view of the assembly. If you make changes to the exploded state in the assembly, the system does not reflect them in the modified drawing view.

Changing View Type
You can modify certain view types for more flexibility. For example, you can change a non-scaled general view to a scaled general view or you can change a detail view to a general view, and so on.

Note:
Changing detail views to general views enables you to set edge display and blanking of components in the detail view, independent from the parent view.

Pag e 4 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that you can use to modify views in a drawing. Table 1: Configuration File Options Controlling View Modification
Option drawing_view_origin_csys Value none name of CSYS hlr_for_quilts no yes pro_crosshatch_dir directory path Description Specifies a coordinate system as the origin of a newly created view. Includes or excludes quilts from the hidden line removal process (not cross-sectional views). Specifies the default directory for a library of cross-hatching patterns. If set to “no,” all items moved or copied to a different sheet retain the same size on paper. If set to “yes,” some items scale and/or reposition to be the same size or position on the paper, while other items scale and/or reposition to be the same size or position on the screen.

variant_drawing_item_ sizes

no yes

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 15

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use to modify views in a drawing. Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling View Modification
Option axis_line_offset Value 0.1 value Description Sets the default distance that a linear axis extends beyond its associated feature.

circle_axis _offset

0.1 Value

Sets the default distance that a circular cross-hair axis extends beyond the circular edge.

datum_point_shape

cross dot circle triangle square

Controls the shape of a datum point.

datum_point_size

.3125 value

Controls the size of the datum points and sketched 2-D points.

Pag e 4 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

radial_pattern_axis_circle

no yes

Sets display mode for axes of rotation that are perpendicular to the screen in radial pattern features. If set to “no,'' displays axis lines (Figure a). If set to “yes,'' a circular shared axis appears, and axis lines pass through the center of a rotational pattern (Figure b).

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 17

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To improve the display and clarity of drawing views.

Method
In Exercise 1, you manipulate the views of the plunger body drawing. In Exercise 2, you manipulate the views of the barrel drawing. In Exercise 3, you manipulate the views of a assembly/multi-model drawing.

Figure 10: Plunger Body Drawing

Pag e 4 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views
Task 1. Clean up the drawing display by changing the scale and repositioning the views, cross-sectional arrows and view notes using the [Select] icon. 1. Set your working directory to the folder that corresponds to the name of the current module. 2. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW. If you have already finished the plunger body drawing, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 3. If the datum planes and datum coordinate systems appear on the screen, turn them off using the icons on the toolbar and repaint. 4. From the pull down menu, click Edit > Value and select the scale value in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter [2.00] as the new scale value. 5. Reposition the views, as shown in the preceding figure. Click the [Select] icon. Select a view from the screen to move; the system highlights that view and its child views. Place the views in the correct position. Tips & Techniques:
You can also move a view using Views > Move View

option from menu manager.

6. Move the cross-sectional arrows displayed in the upper left view to the positions shown in the following figure. With the [Select] icon still clicked, select the arrows and move them to the correct position.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 19

NOTES

Figure 11: Cross-Section Arrow Locations

7. For Detail 1, Detail 2, Section A-A, and Section B-B, reposition the view names to place them directly beneath the corresponding views. Using the [Select] icon, select the view names and move them to the correct position. Task 2. To prevent the environment settings for the hidden and tangent line display from affecting the drawing, set the display of each view. 1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select the 3-D view, both cross-sectional views, and both detail views, then click Done Sel to display the DISP MODE menu. Tips & Techniques:
To speed up the selection process, you can press the middle mouse button instead of clicking Done Sel .

2. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid . Click Det Indep to set the display mode of the detailed views differently from their parents, then click Done . 3. Select the remaining views on the drawing and press the middle mouse button. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done . Task 3. Decrease the scale of the 3-D view of the plunger.

1. Click Modify View > View Type and select the 3-D view. 2. Click Scale > Done . 3. Enter [.8] as the scale value.

Pag e 4 - 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 4. Modify the location of the tab in the upper-left view. Notice that the detailed view no longer displays the correct geometry. Redefine the reference point that you used for the detailed view so that it is attached to the tab. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRT. Note:
If you used PLUNGER_BODY.DRW in this exercise, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.PRT instead.

2. Modify the tab shown in the following figure, change the horizontal 0.50 location dimension to [0.25], and click Regenerate .

Modify the location of this tab

Figure 12: Modify the Tab Location

3. Click Window > PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW . DETAIL 1 should display as shown in the following figure. Note:
The tab is no longer centered in the detailed view because the reference point for the boundary of that detail was not an appropriate choice. You selected the side edge of the plunger body instead of the edge of the tab.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 21

NOTES

Original reference point

New reference point

Figure 13: New Tab Location

4. Move the reference point of DETAIL 1 to the edge of the tab. Click Views > Modify View > Ref Point and select DETAIL 1 as the view to alter. The original reference point displays in the upper left view. Select the edge of the tab as the new reference, as shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel > Done. 5. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRT. 6. Modify the location of the tab to [0.50]. 7. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW and notice the change that occurred in DETAIL 1. Task 5. Reduce the amount of geometry shown in the DETAIL 2 view. Modify the view boundary to include only one of the flanges. 1. Click Views > Modify View > Boundary and select DETAIL 2.

Figure 14: Original Detailed View

Pag e 4 - 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

2. Press the left mouse button to sketch a spline around one of the flanges. Use the middle mouse button to finish the spline boundary. Click Done from the VIEW BNDRY menu. Repaint the screen, if necessary. Click Done > Return from the VIEWS menu.

Figure 15: New Detailed View

Task 6. Modify the cross-hatching shown in Sections A-A, B-B, and DETAIL 2. Create new cross-hatching and save it for future drawings. 1. Click the [Select] icon, press and hold <SHIFT> and select the cross-hatching lines in Section A-A and Section B-B. Click Edit > Properties from the pull down menu. 2. Add a second line to the cross-hatching. Click Add Line , enter [45] as the angle, [.1] as the offset value, [.44] to define the distance between each segment of the new line. 3. In the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, select DOTFONT from the LINE FONT drop-down list. Click Apply > Close . 4. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching. Click Spacing and use Half and Double to achieve spacing similar to that shown in the following figure.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 23

NOTES

Figure 16: User-Defined Cross-Hatching

5. Save this cross-hatching for future use in other drawings. Click Save , enter [user_def] and click Done . Note:
The system automatically updates the cross-hatching on DETAIL 2 because a detailed view obtains its cross-hatching from its parent view by default.

6. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching of DETAIL 2. Click the [Select] icon, select the cross-hatching lines in DETAIL 2, then click Edit > Properties f rom the pull down menu. 7. The MOD XHATCH menu appears with most of the options unavailable because the cross-hatching of a detailed view is the same as its parent view by default. Click Det Indep to make the detailed view independent of its parent view. 8. Click Spacing > Half . If the cross-hatching is acceptable, click Done to finish.

Figure 17: Detailed View Cross-Hatching

9. Save the drawing and close all the windows.

Pag e 4 - 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views

Figure 18: Barrel Drawing

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 25

NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve BARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW and change the scale of the sheet and the detailed view. If the views are too close, move them to new positions. 1. Retrieve BARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW. Note:
If you have finished the barrel drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW.

2. Modify the scale of the sheet to [1.25]. From the pull down menu, click Edit > Value and select the scale value in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter [1.25] as the new scale value. 3. Modify the scale of DETAIL 1 to 2.5. From the pull down menu, click Edit > Value and select the scale value beneath DETAIL 1. Enter [2.5] as the new scale value. 4. Using the [Select] icon, position the view names directly beneath the views. Task 2. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A, retrieve the crosshatching that you saved in the previous exercise and add cross-sectional arrows to the view in the upper right corner of the sheet. 1. Click the [Select] icon, the cross-hatching lines in Section A-A, then click Edit > Properties f rom the pull down menu.. 2. Click Retrieve > user_def >Open . Click Done from the MOD XHATCH menu. 3. Click Views > Modify View > Add Arrows . Select Section A-A and select the upper right view to place the arrows. 4. Move the arrows so that they display as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 4 - 2 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 19: New Cross-Hatching and Arrows

Task 3. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it is independent of the environment settings. 1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select all of the views on the drawing, then click Done Sel . 2. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done . 3. Save and close the drawing.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 27

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Modifying Assembly and Multi-Model Drawing

Figure 20: Upper Housing Drawing

Pag e 4 - 2 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 1. Set the display of each view on the upper housing drawing so it is independent of the environment settings. 1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW. ( If you have already finished the upper housing drawing, you can work on UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.) 2. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select the two views of the plunger cap and click Done Sel . 3. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done to display hidden lines in these views and tangent lines as solid lines. 4. Select the upper housing views and press the middle mouse button. Click No Hidden > Tan Phantom > Done . Task 2. Modify the scale of the views. Move some of the views to a new sheet and change their positions. 1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP > Done/Return . 2. Click Edit > Value and select the scale value in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter [3.00] to modify the sheet scale for the plunger cap. 3. Make the UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS assembly the active model. 4. Change the sheet scale for the upper housing to [1.25]. 5. From the DRAWING menu, click Sheets > Switch Sheets , select the two plunger cap views and the 3-D assembly view, and click Done Sel > Done . 6. Position the views as shown in the following figure. Task 3. Alter the right side projection of the plunger cap part to include a cross-section. The cross-section should cut through the center of the part. After you create the cross-section, change the cross-hatching. 1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Select the right side projection of the plunger cap part and click Section > Done . 2. If the datum planes do not appear, turn them on. Repaint the screen.
M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s Pag e 4- 29

NOTES

3. Click Full > Total Xsec > Done . 4. Click Create > Planar > Done . 5. Enter [B] as the name, select DTM1 as the cutting plane and select the left view for the arrows.

Figure 21: Section B-B

6. Turn off the datum planes. 7. Select cross-hatching lines in Section B-B and click Edit > Properties . 8. Decrease the default spacing of the cross-hatching by half. Click Spacing > Half , then click Done . Task 4. Modify the orientation of the 3-D view of the upper housing assembly. Retrieve the assembly and spin the model to an appropriate 3-D view. Save the orientation as a named view and use it in the drawing. 1. Retrieve the UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.ASM. (If you retrieved the UPPER_HOUSING.DRW at the start of this exercise, retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM instead.) 2. Spin the model to an orientation similar to the one shown in the following figure.

Pag e 4 - 3 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 22: New 3-D Orientation

3. Click View > Reorient . Expand Saved Views in the ORIENTATION dialog box to display any saved views. Enter [3D] for the name and click Save > OK . 4. Click Window > Close Window . Click Window > Activate to activate the drawing window. 5. Click Views > Modify View > Reorient . 6. Select the upper 3-D assembly view to reorient. From the list of saved views, select 3D and clic k Set > OK . Task 5. Change the explode distances of the components in the upper housing assembly. Set the preferences to allow the movement of all four bolts at the same time. 1. Click Mod Expld , select the 3D view, and click Redefine > Position . 2. Click Preferences, select MOVE MANY, and click Close . 3. Set the direction of movement to be normal to the top of the upper housing part. From the MOTION REFERENCE drop-down list, select PLANE NORMAL, click Query Sel , and select the top surface of the upper housing, as shown in the following figure. When the correct surface highlights, click Accept to finish.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 31

NOTES

Select this top surface to move normal to the plunger assembly and the bolts

Locate the plunger assembly here

Figure 23: Plane Normal Surface

4. Reposition the plunger assembly below the upper housing. Click Query Sel and select the plunger assembly inside the cavity of the upper housing. Click Next until the plunger assembly is selected, then click Accept > Done Sel . Press the left mouse button and drag the plunger assembly to a position similar to the one shown in the following figure.

Plunger cap

Normal surface for the plunger cap

Plunger assembly

Figure 24: New Explode Positions in 3-D View

Pag e 4 - 3 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

5. Select the four bolt components and click Done Sel . Press the left mouse button and drag the bolts to their new position. 6. Move the plunger cap as shown in the preceding figure. In the MOTION REFERENCE area of the dialog box, click the [Select] icon and select a suitable, normal surface for the plunger cap. 7. Select the plunger cap and click Done Sel . Drag the plunger cap to its new position and press the left mouse button to finish the move. Click Done Sel > OK . 8. Return to sheet one and move the views so they are evenly spaced on the drawing. Click Sheets > Previous > Done/Return . 9. Modify the explode distances on the views of the upper housing assembly. Click View > Modify View > Mod Expld , then select the view in the lower right corner of the drawing. 10. Click Redefine > Position . 11. Click Preferences , select MOVE MANY, and click Close. Note:
The system does not save the preferences that you use to modify an exploded view. You must redo the preferences the next time that you modify explode distances.

12. Set the direction by selecting a vertical edge on the plunger body part. From the MOTION REFERENCE pull-down list select ENTITY/EDGE, then select the vertical edge of the plunger body part as shown in the following figure.

Select this edge for the motion reference.

Figure 25: Vertical Motion Reference

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 33

NOTES

13. Change the positions of the components as shown in the following figure.

Figure 26: New Explode Positions

Task 6. Modify the explode distances in the lower left view to match the distances in Section A-A by changing the type of view to a general view and then back to a projection view. The system recreates the projection based on the new positions of the components. 1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Select the view in the lower left corner of the sheet, and click General > Done . 2. Click View Type and select the same view again. 3. Click Projection > Done . Select Section A-A as the view from which to create the projection.

Figure 27: Exploded Projection

Pag e 4 - 3 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 7. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A of the upper housing. For the plunger part in the upper housing assembly, retrieve a saved crosshatching. 1. Click the [Select] icon and select the cross-hatching lines in Section A-A, then click Edit > Properties f rom the pull-down menu. 2. Click Next Xsec until you highlight the cross-hatching in the upper housing part. 3. Click Spacing from the MOD XHATCH menu. Click Half twice to decrease the cross-hatching spacing. Click Angle from the MOD XHATCH menu and select 135 to change the angle of the cross-hatching. 4. Click Next Xsec to make the plunger cap active. Click Spacing > Value and enter [0.055]. 5. Click Next Xsec > Retrieve > user_def >Open > Done.

Figure 28: Section A-A Cross-Hatching

6. Save and close the drawing.

M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s

Pag e 4- 35

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can change view location, orientation, and origin. You can remove views from a drawing. You can modify view boundaries and callouts.

Pag e 4 - 3 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

5
Showing Dimensions
In this module, you learn how to display dimensions and manipulate their display characteristics.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • • Display dimensions and related details. Change dimension locations. Convert linear dimensions to ordinate dimensions. Create hole charts.

Page 5-1

NOTES

DRAWING DETAILS
After you add views, you should add detail items such as dimensions to complete production drawings. You can create detail items on a drawing directly. You can also show detail items created in Part mode or Assembly mode on a drawing. To avoid repeated work and preserve associativity before you create new dimensions in your drawings, you should show dimensions and other detail items that were created in Part mode or Assembly mode. Keep in mind the following: • • It is quicker to show a dimension on the drawing and move it than to recreate the dimension. Because of Pro/ENGINEER’s associativity, you can modify the dimensions you showed from 3D models at the drawing level and the system reflects it at the part or assembly level. Drawing templates can be used to automate the Displaying and positioning of dimensions.

Showing and Erasing Detail Items
You can use the MODEL TREE, the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, as well as the popup menu to show and erase the detailed items.

Using the MODEL TREE
The easiest way to show dimensions of features in part drawings and dimensions of parts in assembly drawings is using MODEL TREE.

Figure 1 Using Model Tree to Show Dimensions

Pag e 5 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Using the Show/Erase Dialog Box
While the MODEL TREE provides a quick and easy access to feature and part dimensions, the SHOW/ERASE dialog box gives you more options and control when detailing a drawing.
Specifying the Type of Detail Item to Show

The SHOW/ERASE dialog box as shown in the following figure, allows you to show various types of detail items in a drawing. You can show any number of detail items at one time, but it is easier to show one type on the drawing at a time.

Figure 2: Show/Erase Dialog Box Specifying Items to Show

– Shows detail items for a selected feature in a view determined by the system. This option is useful if you did not build the model yourself. You can use the MODEL TREE to make sure that you select every feature.
Feature View

– Shows detail items for a selected view.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5- 3

NOTES

– Select a feature in a view to show detail items for that feature in that view. This option gives you the most control in displaying items.
Feat _ View Part

• • •

– Shows detail items in specific parts within an assembly drawing.

– Shows detail items in a specific part and view within an assembly drawing.
Part _ View Show All

– Shows all detail items in all views. If you use this method to show items, you should also preview the drawing. Note:
When Displaying part dimensions in an assembly drawing, the View and Show All options do not display part dimensions.

Using Filtering Options

• • •

Erased –

Show only items that have been previously erased from the drawing, without displaying items that have never been shown before. Show items that have never been shown on the Show dimensions as ordinate using an existing

Never Shown –

drawing.
Switch to Ordinate –

baseline.

Previewing Detail Items

You can preview detail items in the drawing and decide if you want to show them. You can show all of them, erase all of them, or select individual items to display or remove.

Erasing Detail Items
To erase dimensions and other detail items from a drawing, you can use the SHOW/ERASE dialog box with the same technique that you use to show dimensions. You can also select the item on drawing and using pop up menu to erase and unerase them.

Pag e 5 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 3 Erase and Unerase Dimension Using Pop-Up Menu

MANIPULATING DETAIL ITEMS
After you show the detailed items in a drawing, you can change their locations as well as their appearances.

Changing Location
You can manually change the location of the detailed items using the drag handles and the snap lines. You can also position the detailed items using the [Clean Dim] option.

Move the Detailed Items Manually
Using [Select] icon, dimensions and other detail items can be easily selected and moved. Drag handles will be displayed. They can be used to perform various move operations.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5- 5

NOTES

Figure 4 Move a dimension

Using the Snap Lines
Snap lines are dashed lines used to locate detail items to exact locations on drawings. You can define snap lines on individual drawings to locate detail items such as dimensions, notes, geometric tolerances, symbols, and surface finish symbols. The system positions the snap lines relative to the view outline, or a selected model edge or datum plane. You can manipulate snap lines by changing the offset distances, modifying the length, blanking them or deleting them from the drawing. When working with snap lines, keep in mind the following: • • You can turn on and off snap lines display from the Environment. You can place snap lines on layers and blank them, but once you blank them, you cannot add new items to them. Existing items continue to snap. When you delete a view, the system deletes its snap lines also. You cannot add entities of one view to another view’s snap line. If you place a dimension at the intersection of two snap lines, you can snap to either or both of the snap lines.

• • •

Cleaning Up Dimensions
You can improve or clean up a cluttered display of linear dimensions on a drawing. You can use this option after you initially display dimensions on a drawing to move those that are overlapping one another or to move them

Pag e 5 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

off the model itself. You can also use this technique to automatically locate your dimensions according to exact specifications such as the following: • • • A certain distance away from a view. A certain distance away from each other. Centered in between the witness lines.

You can also use the CLEAN DIMENSIONS dialog box to flip the dimension arrows, create snap lines where the dimensions are located, and break the intersecting witness lines.

Note:
The Clean Dims option only affects linear dimensions. You cannot use it to modify the display of diametric, radial, or angular dimensions.

Changing Dimension Displays
Using Dual Dimensioning
Dual dimensioning allows you to show dimensions in English and metric units at the same time. Through the drawing setup file, you can set the dimensions to dual and specify their format. The following drawing setup file options affect dual dimensioning: • • • • • • dual_dimensioning dual_secondary_unit dual_digits_diff decimal_marker dual_dimension_brackets dual_metric_dim_show_fractions

Ordinate Dimensions
Pro/ENGINEER displays ordinate dimensions in a drawing using a single witness line without a leader. The system associates one set of ordinate dimensions with a baseline reference, as shown in the following figure. For a set of ordinate dimensions to reference the same baseline, they must share a common plane or edge that you can use as a baseline reference.
Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s Pag e 5- 7

NOTES

You can use the following ways to place ordinate dimensions on drawing: • • • Show dimensions as ordinate using an existing baseline Convert existing dimensions to ordinate dimensions Create ordinate dimensions

A suitable baseline is required when using any of the above options.
Creating a Baseline Reference

To create a baseline, you must convert a linear dimension to ordinate and select one of its witness lines as the baseline reference. You can then use it to place dimensions in an ordinate form. You can convert ordinate dimensions back to linear at any time. However, when converting ordinate dimensions back to linear, the system does not automatically remove the baseline for that dimension from the drawing. You must delete it manually. You can delete a baseline reference if none of the drawing dimensions are using it and you do not need it any longer.

Note:
When converting dimensions, you can add a jog to the witness line to improve the spacing of the dimensions.

Figure 5: Ordinate Dimensions Using the Dtl Option

iso_ordinate_delta ― It improves the display of the offset between an ISO-ordinate dimension and the witness line. If you set it
F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Pag e 5 - 8

NOTES

to yes, the system uses the drawing setup file option witness_line_delta. If you set it to no, the offset differs by approximately 2 mm. The default value is no to preserve old drawings. • orddim_text_orientation ― It is used to specify the orientation of ordinate dimensions, you can set the drawing setup file option to parallel or horizontal.

Adding Text to Dimensions
Using the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box, you can manipulate dimension text in the following ways: • • • Add a prefix (R) or postfix (TYP) to a dimension. Change the dimension symbol. Specify that the system always show the symbol, regardless of the other dimensions, by changing the dimension text from @D to @S. This would be useful, for example, if you wanted to indicate the direction of the width of the model. You could change the symbol to width and specify that Pro/ENGINEER always show the symbol instead of the value.

Manipulating Dimension Arrows and Extension Lines
After you clean up the dimension display on a drawing, you can also manipulate the arrows and extension lines in the following ways: •
Flip arrows

– You can change the direction of linear, radial, and diametric dimension arrows, as shown in the following figure.

Arrows flipped

Figure 6: Flipping Arrows

Clip the extension lines

– Clip refers to creating a gap between the end of an extension line and object being dimensioned. ! Pro/ENGINEER automatically determines if it should clip extension lines when it performs an overlap check before plotting. To check if extension lines are properly clipped, you can plot to the screen, as shown in the following figure.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5- 9

NOTES

! System uses the drawing setup file option witness_line_offset to control the gap size. ! You can manipulate the gap of individual extension line using the drag handle when you move a dimension.

Figure 7: Clipping Dimensions • – You can jog the extension line of dimensions or the leader of a note to create more space for text, as shown in the following figure.
Insert Jogs

Figure 8: Making a Jog •
Insert Breaks – You create breaks on extension lines and cutting lines to prevent overlapping and intersecting.

! Dimension cleanup includes automatic breaks in intersecting witness lines ! You can add simple breaks in individual extension lines and cutting lines as shown in the following figure, ! You can create a parametric break on one extension line around another extension line so that it updates when the model changes

Pag e 5 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Break added around geometry

Figure 9: Simple Break •
Align sets of dimensions – Using [Move & align several objects] icon, you can line up sets of dimensions and move them as a group. It is very useful when working with ordinate dimensions. Change the diameter dimension type – You can change a diameter dimension to a linear dimension, or vice versa, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10: Changing the Diameter Type

Erase the witness lines – The system automatically displays dimensions with witness lines, but you can easily remove them to reduce the clutter, as shown in the following figure.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 1 1

NOTES

Figure 11: Line Display •
Change the arrow style – You can remove the dimension arrow, or change it to a dot, double arrow, slash, integral, or box, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 12: Various Arrow Styles

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that affect the display of dimensions on a drawing.

Pag e 5 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Dimension Display Option allow_move_attach_in_ dtl_move yes no Value Definition If set to “yes,” Move acts as Move and Mod Attach for radial and diameter dimensions. If set to “no,” each acts separately. Sets display for angle values to degrees, degrees and decimal minutes, or degrees, minutes, and decimal seconds. Sets default number of decimal places displayed in all modes. Does not affect the number of digits of dimensions changed using Num Digits . Sets largest denominator for fractional dimensions. If the fraction can be reduced, converts it to the lowest possible denominator. Highlights new dimensions added to the drawing until you move or refresh them. When set to “yes,” if a dimension is driven by a relation with a value that is not equal to the displayed dimension, displays a tilde (~) in front of the dimension. Determines display of fractional dimensions (feet-inches or meter-mm). For example, if the units are inches, if you convert 25.125 to a fraction, it becomes 2’ 1-1/8”.

ang_units

ang_deg ang_min ang_sec

default_dec_places

2 value

dim_fraction_denominator

32 value

highlight_new_dims

no yes no yes

mark_approximate_dims

use_major_units

no yes

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 1 3

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that affect the display of dimensions in drawing views.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Dimension Display Option allow_3d_dimensions clip_dimensions no yes no yes Value Definition Shows dimensions in isometric views. Controls display of dimensions in detailed views. When set to “yes,” does not display dimensions totally outside a detailed view boundary, and shows those that cross a detailed boundary with a special double arrow. When set to “no,” displays all dimensions.

decimal_marker

comma_for_metric_dual period comma

Determines which character marks the decimal point in secondary dimensions. Determines whether dimensions display with or without elbows. Sets the length of the dimension leader line when the leader arrows are outside the witness lines.

default_dim_elbows

yes no

dim_leader_length

0.5 value

dim_text_gap

0.5 factor

Controls the distance between the dimension text and dimension leader line, and represents the ratio between the gap size and text height.

Pag e 5 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

draw_ang_units

ang_deg ang_min ang_sec

Sets the display of angular dimensions in a drawing to degrees; degrees and decimal minutes; or degrees, minutes, and decimal seconds. Sets the length of leader line arrows.

draw_arrow_length

0.1875 value

draw_arrow_style

closed open filled

Specifies the arrow type.

draw_arrow_width

0.0625 value

Sets the width of leader line arrows.

dual_digits_diff

-1 value

Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal that the secondary dimension differs from the primary dimension. Displays dimension units that occur second in brackets. Specifies the format for the display of dual dimensions. Primary units are the model units. Sets the units for the display of secondary dimensions.

dual_dimension_brackets

yes no

dual_dimensioning

no primary[secondary] secondary[primary] secondary

dual_secondary_unit

mm inch foot cm m

iso_ordinate_delta

no yes

Improves the display of the offset between an ISOordinate dimension and the witness line.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 1 5

NOTES

lead_trail_zeros

std_default std_metric std_english both

Controls the use of leading and trailing zeros in a dimension. If set to “std_default,” displays the dimension according to its units. If set to “std_metric,” displays the dimension with leading zeros (0.9). If set to “std_english,” displays the dimension with trailing zeros (.90). “Both” displays both leading and trailing zeros, regardless of whether the units are English or metric. Determines the length of the leader elbow (the horizontal leg attached to the text). Specifies the default radius of balloons shown with the model grid in the drawing. Controls the negative values shown in the balloons of the model grid. Controls the number of digits displayed in grid coordinates that appear in grid balloons. You can specify the number of decimal places or use the default (0) to display coordinates as integers. Determines whether the dimension value appears above or below the leader line when “text_orientation” is set to “parallel.” This option does not apply to dual dimensions.

leader_elbow_length

0.25 value

model_grid_balloon_size

0.2 value

model_grid_negative_ prefix model_grid_num_dig_ display

“-“ (default) any string 0 value (integer)

parallel_dim_placement

above below

Pag e 5 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

text_orientation

horizontal parallel parallel_diam_horiz

Sets the orientation of dimension text in the drawing.

witness_line_delta

0.125 value

Sets the extension of the witness line beyond the dimension leader arrows. Sets the gap between a dimension line and the object being dimensioned.

witness_line_offset

0.0625 value

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 1 7

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To show and manipulate dimension on a drawing.

Method
In the first exercise, dimensions are shown for features in any view and for features in a selected view. After the dimensions are shown, they are switched to different views, moved, and the default display is enhanced. In the second exercise, dimensions are shown in their symbolic form and the default symbolic name is modified. In the third exercise, the dimensions on a multi-model and assembly drawing are displayed as dual dimensions.

Pag e 5 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Displaying Dimensions

Figure 13: Plunger Drawing

Task 1. Using MODEL TREE, show dimensions on the plunger body drawing for a selected feature in any view. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.PRT.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 1 9

NOTES

Note:
If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.PRT and PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.

2. Highlight features in MODEL TREE and become familiar with its geometry. Then close the window. 3. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.DRW and turn off all datum features. 4. Show the dimensions for the first protrusion. Right click the first protrusion in MODEL TREE, choose Show Dimensions .

Figure 14 Using MODEL TREE to show dimensions of the first protrusion

5. Repeat this for Cut id 198, Hole id 801, Cut id 772, Hole id 1803. Task 2. Move dimensions, flip arrow of the dimension and use drag handle to move text. 1. Move the dimensions in the front view. First, select the .750 dimension using [Select] icon. Move it to its new position, as shown in the following figure, and press the left mouse button to place it. 2. Select and move the 1.500 dimension and flip the arrow. While moving the dimension, press the right mouse button to flip the arrows. Move it to its new position as shown in the following figure and press the left mouse button to place it. 3. Repeat this for the 1.125 and .250 diameter dimensions.

Pag e 5 - 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 15: Dimension Locations

4. Move the dimensions in lower left view. First, move the 3.000 dimension to its new position, as shown in the preceding figure. 5. Repeat this for the .100 and the .300 linear dimensions. 6. Select the .100 linear dimension and use the correct move handle to move the text to the other side of the elbow. 7. In the upper left view, move the .100 diameter dimension as shown in the preceding figure. 8. Using the correct move handle, move the text to the other side of the leader. Task 3. Switch dimensions to other views

1. Switch the remaining dimensions in the lower left view to Section A-A. Press and hold <Shift> and select the two remaining dimensions, click Edit > Switch to View . When system prompt for a view, select Section A-A. Note:
You can also use pop up menu or perform switch view. [Switch View] icon to

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 2 1

NOTES

2. Once you have switched the dimensions to the new view, reposition them as shown in the preceding figure. Flip arrows as necessary. Task 4. Using SHOW/ERASE dialogue box, show dimensions for a selected feature in a selected view on the drawing. 1. Click View > Show and Erase . Select Show . Select the dimension icon under the TYPE section. Select Feat_View under the SHOW BY section. 2. Show the dimensions for the holes in Section B-B. Click Query Sel from the menu and select the surface of the through hole. Click Accept when the correct feature highlights. 3. Repeat this for the counter-bore hole in Section B-B, as shown in the following figure.
Counter-bore hole

Through hole

Figure 16: Section B-B

4. Click Query Sel from the menu and select the surface of the tab from DETAIL 1, as shown in the following figure. 5. Repeat the previous step for the surface of the round in DETAIL 1, as shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel > Sel To Remove . Select the . 500 dimension. Click Done Sel to finish the selections. 6. Clear the With Preview check box and close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box.

Pag e 5 - 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Tab

Round

Figure 17: DETAIL 1

7. Use the asynchronous pop-up menu to move the dimensions displayed in Section B-B and DETAIL 1 to the locations shown in the following figure. Experiment with the dimension handles that are available for the different dimension types.

Figure 18: Dimension Locations Task 5. Use Mod Attach to move a dimension.

1. Display the .05-radius dimension on the other side of the tab. Right click the .05 dimension to bring up ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up menu

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 2 3

NOTES

2. Click Mod Attach . The system displays all possible locations in magenta. Select the round surface on the other side of the tab and press the middle mouse button to finish. 3. Move and flip the arrows on the remaining dimensions for DETAIL 1 and SECTION B-B so the drawing looks like the preceding figure. Task 6. Show the dimensions for the flanges in the upper left view using learned techniques. 1. From pull down menu, click View > Show/Erase > Show > . Select FEAT_VIEW. Select the flange shown in the following figure to show the dimension, then close the dialog box.
Select this witness line as the baseline Select this flange to display dimensions

Figure 19: Flange Dimensions

2. Move the dimensions to the positions shown in the preceding figure using the techniques discussed earlier. 3. Switch the .05 thickness dimension to DETAIL 2, then reposition it as shown the preceding figure. 4. If the witness lines are extending too far, resize it using appropriate drag handle. Task 7. Convert the .650 and 1.700 dimensions in the upper left view to ordinate. 1. Click Edit > Linear to Ordinate .

Pag e 5 - 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

2. Accept the default of Create Base and select the 1.700 dimension. Specify a baseline by selecting the witness line on the left side. 3. Select the .650 dimension to convert it to ordinate. Task 8. Show the dimensions for the other flanges as ordinate dimensions. 1. Click View > Show and Erase , click the Options tab and select Switch to Ordinate. 2. Select the .00 as the ordinate baseline dimension and press the middle mouse button to finish. Select each flange to display the dimensions as ordinate. Close the dialog box. Task 9. Line up multiple dimensions using [Move & align several objects] icon. Use the draft grid to locate dimensions. Create jogs. 1. Click [Move & align several objects] icon and select each ordinate dimension. Use the middle mouse button to finish selecting and place the dimension above the view. 2. Create a draft grid to locate some jog points. Click View > Draft Grid from pull down menu, click Show Grid from the GRID MODIFY menu. 3. Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing and enter [.2]. 4. To turn the grid snap on, click Utilities > Environment . In the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, select SNAP TO GRID and click OK . 5. Create jogs in the ordinate dimensions to increase the space between them. Click Insert Jog from pull down menu and select the .650 dimension. Select a point on the witness line to start the jog, move to another location and click to finish it. 6. Click other dimensions and create jogs on the ordinate dimensions as shown in the following figure. Note:
Once you have created jogs, you can move the locations of the jog points.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 2 5

NOTES

Figure 20: Ordinate Jog Locations

7. Turn off the grid and the grid snap. Click View > Draft Grid from pull down menu, click Hide Grid from GRID MODIFY menu. 8. Click Utilities > Environment , then clear the Snap to Grid check box and click OK . Task 10. Show dimensions and erase some dimension using the dialog box for any feature in a selected view only, then use the Clean Dims option to clean up the dimension display quickly. 1. Click View > Show and Erase then select VIEW for the SHOW BY option. 2. Select the view in the upper left corner and the view in the lower left corner of the drawing. Close the dialog box. 3. Clean the dimension display by moving the dimensions off of the views and one another. Click Tools > Clean Dims . 4. Select the upper and lower left views as the views to clean. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting. 5. Click Apply to apply the default settings and close the dialog box. 6. Using the options that you used earlier in this exercise, manipulate the dimensions so that they display as shown in the following figure. You must erase some of them.
Pag e 5 - 2 6 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

7. Click Erase and select SELECTED ITEMS for the Erase By option. Select the dimensions to erase, then click Close . Tips & Techniques:
When you place a dimension near two snap lines, the system prompts you to specify a snap line to which it should snap the dimension. You can use the Next option to highlight one or both snap lines and then click Accept .

Figure 21: Dimension Locations

Task 11. Append text to the dimensions in DETAIL 2 to annotate them as being typical. 1. Select both the .050 and .125 dimensions in DETAIL 2 using <Shift>. Click Edit > Properties. 2. Click the Dimension Text tab, then enter [TYP] in the Postfix area. Click OK to finish. 3. Turn off the display of the snap lines. Click Utilities > Environment . Clear the Snap Lines check box, click OK to close the dialog box and repaint the screen.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 2 7

NOTES

Note:
The system does not plot snap lines, regardless of whether they display on the screen.

Pag e 5 - 2 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Displaying Axes
Task 1. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing, and then manipulate them to display them in the correct sizes. 1. Show axes by view. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > . Click
S elect View for the SHOW BY option. click With Preview .

to deselect, if it is currently selected. Click the Preview tab and

2. Select the upper left view, then click Accept All . 3. Select Section B-B. The system shows two axes, one on top of the other. Click Sel To Keep , select one of the axes to retain, and click Done Sel . 4. Select DETAIL 1 and click Accept All . 5. Show the axes for the first protrusion. Select Feature for the SHOW BY option, select the first feature protrusion listed in the MODEL TREE, then click Done Sel . 6. Click Sel To Remove and select the axes in the 3-D view. Task 2. Show the axes using Feat_View option for the tabs in the front view and the left side view. 1. Show the axes for the tabs in the front view. Choose Feat_View for the Show By option, select a tab displayed in the front view, and click Done Sel , select front view. Click Accept All to retain the displayed axes. Note:
When using Feat_View option, you need to pay close attention to the messages.

2. Repeat this for the other tab in front view and the axes of the tabs in the left side view. 3. Show the axes for the .100 diameter hole in Section A-A. Select the hole and click Done Sel . Select Section A-A as the view in which to show the axes and click Accept All to show them.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 2 9

NOTES

4. Repeat the previous step for the lower left side view. Turn off the preview, click the Preview tab and clear the With Preview check box. Close the dialog box. 5. Manipulate the lengths of the individual axis segments in the front [Select] icon to select the segment of the axis view. Use the that you want to move. Place the axis in the new position. Notice that you only moved one segment. 6. To move all four segments of an axis perpendicular to the screen, select the name of the axis. The system moves all four segments together. 7. Use the techniques discussed previously to change the lengths of the axes on the drawing as shown in the following figure. Use [Datum Axis Display] icon to turn off the display of the axis names and repaint the screen.

Figure 22: Axis Locations

8. Save the drawing and close the window.

Pag e 5 - 3 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Displaying Symbolic Dimensions

Figure 23: Barrel Drawing

Task 1. Show the dimensions of the barrel by using the Show All option, then switch them to the correct views. 1. Retrieve BARREL_SHOW_DIMS.DRW. If you have finished the barrel drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 3 1

NOTES

2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show >

. If necessary,

un-select the [Axes] icon. Select SHOW ALL from the Show By area. When the system asks you to confirm, click Yes , then close the dialog box. Note:
When you use Show All , Pro/ENGINEER attempts to show the dimensions in the first view that you created on the drawing. If it cannot show a dimension in that view, it then attempts to show it in the second view, etc.

3. Switch the dimensions for the oval cut to DETAIL 1. [Switch View] icon and click the .10 and the R1.38 4. Click the radius dimensions. 5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting. 6. When the system prompts for a view, select DETAIL 1. 7. Note that the R1.38 dimension move to DETAIL 1, but the .10 does not. Click Done Sel to finish and move the R1.38 dimension to an appropriate position. Task 2. Using Show/Erase instead of switch view to place dimension in the right view. 1. The .10 dimension is attached to a pattern instance outside of the view's boundary. Erase the dimension. Right click the .10 dimension and choose Erase . 2. Show the cut dimensions in DETAIL 1. Using SHOW/ERASE dialogue box, click Show and select Feat_View , then select the oval cut in DETAIL 1, keep the dimension when prompted. Close the dialog box, then move the dimensions to the positions shown in the following figure.

Pag e 5 - 3 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 24: DETAIL 1 Dimension Locations

3. Switch the dimensions for the patterned holes to the view on the right side of the drawing. Using the technique learned early, switch the 1.25 , .75 , and 72.0 dimensions to the view on the right. Reposition the dimensions as shown in the following figure.

Figure 25: Dimension Locations

4. Erase the 90.0 using pop up menu. 5. Reposition the remaining dimensions as shown in the following figure.
Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s Pag e 5 - 3 3

NOTES

Figure 26: Dimension Locations

Note:
The system does not display the width of the barrel and the hole depth dimensions because it cannot show dimensions in Align Cross-Sections, and no other view is suitable for those dimensions.

Task 3. Set part of the dimension to display in symbolic form, then change the symbolic names of the dimensions so that they are more meaningful. 1. Select both the .75 , and 4.00 dimensions using < SHIFT > and [Select] icon. Press and hold the right mouse button to bring up the pop up menu, choose Properties . 2. Click the Dimension Text tab from the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box to change the dimension text for the selected dimensions. 3. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the @D to an @S. Click OK to close the dialog box. 4. Click an empty location on the drawing sheet to deselect both dimensions. 5. Bring up DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box for D7 using technique discussed earlier.

Pag e 5 - 3 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

6. Click the Dimension Text tab and enter [CYLINDER_DIA] for the name. Click OK to close the dialog box. 7. Repeat this step to change D2 to [BARREL_DIA]. Task 4. Show the datum axes for the patterned holes on the drawing and change the appearance of radial patter axis. 1. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > from the SHOW BY area. . Select View

2. Show all the axis in the right side, left side, and DETAIL 1 views. Select the view and click Accept All when prompted. Close the dialog box. 3. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to change the axes to display at an angled orientation with a pattern circle. 4. In the drawing setup file, change the setting of radial_pattern_axis_circle to yes. Click Add/Change > OK . Repaint the screen to view the changes, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 27: Change axis display.

5. Save the drawing and close the window.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 3 5

NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Displaying Dual Dimensions

Figure 28: Upper Housing Drawing

Pag e 5 - 3 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 1.

Set end cap as the active model, and show all of its dimensions.

Note:
If you have finished the upper housing drawing earlier, you can work on UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.

1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_SHOW_DIMS.DRW. Click Sheets > Next to switch to sheet 2. 2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP_MOD_VIEWS to set the plunger cap as the active model. 3. Click View > Show and Erase > Show and ensure is the only item selected. Click Show All > Yes > Accept All . Close the dialog box. Note:
Had you not set the active model to the plunger cap, when using Show All option , dimensions from the other model

will also be shown.

4. Click Tools > Clean Dims and select the two views of the plunger cap to clean the dimension display by moving them off the model. 5. Click Done Sel . Accept the default options and click Apply > Close . 6. Reposition the dimensions as shown in the following figure.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 3 7

NOTES

Figure 29: Dimension Locations

Task 2. Show some dimensions of the parts in the upper housing assembly using PART_VIEW option and move them to other locations. 1. Click Sheets > Previous to switch back to Sheet 1. 2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > . Select PART_VIEW and select the left bolt in the lower left view, accept all dimensions. 3. Select FEAT_VIEW and select the outside surface of the plunger and the tab on the upper housing in the lower right view, as shown in the following figure. 4. Erase any dimensions that do not appear in the following figure. Click Erase then select the dimensions. Click Done Sel to finish and close the dialog box.

Pag e 5 - 3 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 30: Showing Part Dimensions

Task 3. Convert the dimensions on this drawing to dual dimensions so that you can display English and metric values for each dimension. 1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to retrieve the drawing setup file. 2. For dual_dimensioning, select
PRIMARY[SECONDARY]from the VALUE drop down list.

Click Add/Change > OK . 3. Repaint the screen if needed. 4. Clean up the dimension display by moving dimensions, if necessary. 5. Save the drawing and close the window.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 3 9

NOTES

Figure 31: The Finished Drawing

Pag e 5 - 4 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can show detail items in a drawing. You can change the location of dimensions and switch them to other views. You can convert location dimensions to ordinate.

Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s

Pag e 5 - 4 1

Module

6
Creating Dimensions
In this module you learn how to create various types of dimensions.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create driven, reference and draft dimensions. Modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.

Page 6-1

NOTES

CREATING DIMENSIONS ON A DRAWING
To reduce repeated work you should show dimensions from part or assembly when detailing drawings. Sometimes a desired dimension may not exist in the 3-D model because the design intent requires a different dimensioning scheme. In this situation, you can create dimensions directly on a drawing. By creating dimensions on a drawing, you can achieve desired drawing appearance without altering the design intent of the model. The created dimension is referred to as driven dimension because it is driven by the model geometry and reflects changes in the model. Driven dimensions cannot be modified.

Common Reference
If a number of dimensions you are creating reference the same piece of geometry, you can use Common Reference option to reduce mouse picks. The system uses the first reference of the first dimension as the first dimensioning reference for all dimensions that you create.

Attachment Types
When creating dimensions in drawing mode, you have more attachment types in addition to what is available in sketcher in 3-D mode. • • • •
Midpoint Center

— Attach leader to the midpoint of an entity. — Attach leader to the intersection of two entities. — Make a line for leader attachment.

— Attach leader to the center of a circular entity.

Intersect

Make Line

Creating Driven Ordinate Dimensions
You can create driven ordinate dimensions manually by using an existing baseline. Created driven ordinate dimensions cannot be converted back to linear dimension.

Pag e 6 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Create Ordinate Dimensions Automatically
You can automatically create ordinate dimensions for a flat state of a sheetmetal part. Ordinate dimensions to all sharps, axes, bend lines, arc centers, and punch and form centers, and ejector pins (also including vertices, parallel edges, points, and coordinate systems) are created based on a selected model coordinate system.

Creating Reference Dimensions
You can use the same technique to create reference dimensions. Reference dimensions behave in the same manner as driven dimensions except that they have different appearance and they do not show tolerances. You can denote a reference dimension with parentheses ( ) or by appending REF after the dimension value. You can create reference dimensions in part mode. If you create them by setting up named views in the model, you can show the reference dimensions in their true size. Once created in part, you can show reference dimension on drawing using
SHOW/ERASE dialog box.

Redefining Features in Drawing
You can change the design intent of the model while in Drawing mode by redefining feature. You can redefine the shape of the section, the depth type, the feature’s direction, etc. Any dimensions that you deleted from the feature’s section disappear from the drawing. However, you must actually show any dimensions that you created in the section; the system does not display them automatically. When you redefine the feature in Drawing mode, it changes the model in all other modes of Pro/ENGINEER as well. Because this changes the design intent, you should avoid redefining feature to simply display a particular dimension on a drawing.

C re a t i n g Dim en s i o n s

Pag e 6- 3

NOTES

Creating Draft Dimensions
Using the method to create driven dimensions, you can also create reference, associative, or non-associative draft dimensions on a drawing to dimension draft entities. The system displays reference draft dimensions and reference dimensions in the same way.

Associative Draft Dimensions
Associative draft dimensions reflect changes to the entities. When a draft dimension is associative, you can perform the following procedures on a draft entity and its dimension at the same time: • • • • Delete items. Switch items to another sheet. Translate and rotate items. Rescale items, including changing drawing format size.

By altering configuration file and drawing setup file in one of the following three ways, you can make subsequent draft dimensions associative. • • Set the drawing setup file option, ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSIONING, to Yes and select draft entities to dimension. Set the configuration file option,
CREATE_DRAWING_DIMENSIONS_ONLY, to Yes and select model

entities to dimension. • Set the configuration file option, DRAWING_MODELS_READ_ONLY, to Yes and select model entities to dimension. Note:
If the dimensions are non-associative, you must perform the procedures on them individually. If you move or rescale the draft entity, the system does not update the dimension or move it with the draft entity.

Hole Tables
You can create hole tables in a specified view. This functionality automatically creates a table for locations of drillable hole features, datum points and datum axes with respect to a coordinate system of the model.

Pag e 6 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Information displayed in a hole table
Hole table can display the following information: • • • Location of Holes, Datum Points, Datum Axes in X and Y coordinates (Z for datum points). Diameter of holes. User-defined parameters in additional columns.

Manipulating a hole table
• • • • Sort Setup: X, Y, Diameter, Default. Hole Naming: Numerical versus Alphanumerical. Ability to paginate tables. You can modify the hole in the model or the drawing, and update the parameters displayed in the hole table.

Figure 1: Hole Chart

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that affect the creation of dimensions on a drawing.

C re a t i n g Dim en s i o n s

Pag e 6- 5

NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Dimension Creation Option create_fraction_dim Value no yes create_drawing_dims_only no yes Definition If set to yes, displays all dimensions as fractions. If set to yes, stores dimensions that you create in the drawing in the actual drawing. If set to no, stores them in the part. Makes the model in a drawing read-only. Highlights newly-created dimension in red; good for drawings with many dims If set to yes, displays reference dimensions within parentheses. If set to no, appends the dimension with REF.

drawing_models_read_ only Highlight_new_dims

no yes yes no

parenthesize_ref_dims

no yes

Pag e 6 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create driven and reference dimensions on a drawing and modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.

Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create dimensions on a drawing and learn when it is appropriate to do so. You erase some model dimensions and create some driven dimensions. You also modify the dimensioning scheme to change the design intent of the model. In the second exercise, you modify the dimensioning scheme of the barrel from within the drawing and show any new dimensions on the drawing.

C re a t i n g Dim en s i o n s

Pag e 6- 7

NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing

Figure 2: Plunger Drawing

Task 1.

Create a reference dimension for the cut in the upper left view.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_DIMS.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis names appear on the screen, turn them off.

Pag e 6 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. Select Insert > Reference Dimension > New Reference, accept default On Entity option. Select the edge shown in the following figure with the black end of the pointer. Locate the dimension by pressing the middle mouse button. Click Return to finish. Reposition it, if necessary.

Select this edge to dimension

Place dimension here

Figure 3: Reference Dimension

Task 2.

Create ordinate dimensions.

1. Erase the dimensions from the drawing that you no longer need, to avoid changing the design intent of the part. Use the pop up menu to erase the .300 dimension in the lower left view and the 1.750 dimension in the upper left view. 2. Use the [Switch view] icon to move the .500 dimension on the left side of the upper left view to the lower left view. ! ! ! Select [Switch view] icon and select the .500 dimension.

Press the middle mouse button to finish. Select the lower left view to display the dimension.

3. Convert the .500 and 3.000 dimensions in the lower left view to ordinate. Select Edit > Linear to Ordinate and select the 3.000 dimension. Select the left side witness line as the baseline, as shown in the following figure. Select the .500 dimension to convert it, as well.

C re a t i n g Dim en s i o n s

Pag e 6- 9

NOTES Select this as the baseline

Figure 4: Converting to Ordinate Dimension [Move and align objects] icon, select the two 4. Click the dimensions and the baseline to align the ordinate dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting, then place the dimensions using left button. 5. Select Insert > Dimension > Ordinate , accept the default Create Dims and select the .00 baseline to create driven dimensions for the cuts in the lower left view, as shown in the following figure. 6. Left click the vertical edge of the flat cut and press the middle mouse button at the location where you want to display the dimension. Select the second edge and press the middle mouse button where you want to display that dimension. 7. Align all the ordinate dimensions.
Select this edge for the second driven dimension reference.

Select this dimension for the first driven dimension reference

Figure 5: Creating Ordinate Dimensions

Pag e 6 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 3. Modify the dimensioning scheme in drawing mode to accommodate a change in the design intent. Dimension the tabs on the open end of the plunger body from the other tabs. Show any new dimensions on the drawing. 1. Click Edit > Redefine Feature . Select Query Sel and select the tab shown in the following figure. 2. Click Next until the tab protrusion highlights, then click Accept . A sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the tab elements.
Modify the scheme of this tab first

Modify the scheme of this tab second

Figure 6: Modify Dimensioning Scheme

3. Click Section > Define> Sketch . 4. Click Sketch > Dimension > Normal and select the center of the sketched arc to create a new dimension to locate the tab to the other tab on the left side of the model. 5. Select the cylindrical surface of the other tab on the front of the model and place the dimension with the middle mouse button. Delete the .50 dimension. 6. Click Sketch > Done and OK to finish the section. Repaint the drawing to show the changes.

C reat ing Dim ensio ns

Pag e 6- 11

NOTES

Note:
The .500 location dimension disappeared from the drawing because you deleted it. The system does not automatically show the new dimension. To display it, you must show it again.

7. Repeat the procedure for the other tab. After changing the dimensioning scheme of the second tab, show the new dimensions on the drawing. and select FEAT_VIEW, 8. Click View > Show and Erase > then click the tab shown in the following figure. Close the dialog box and move the dimension as shown in the following figure.

Show dimensions for this tab

Figure 7: New Dimensioning Scheme

9. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 6 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme

Figure 8: Barrel Drawing

Task 1. Create two driven dimensions in Section A-A for the barrel width and hole depth. 1. Retrieve BARREL_CREATE_DIMS.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW. 2. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference . Accept the defaults, then select the bottom edge of the barrel in Section A-A. Press the middle mouse button where you want to display the dimension, as shown in previous figure.

C reat ing Dim ensio ns

Pag e 6- 13

NOTES

3. Select the horizontal edge of one of the blind holes and press the middle mouse button to place the dimension. Reposition the dimension, if necessary. Task 2. Modify dimension scheme. The dimensioning scheme of the radial holes in the barrel includes a linear dimension from the center axis to the axis of the radial hole. Change the design intent to use a diameter dimension instead. 1. Click Edit > Redefine Feature . Click Query Sel and select the hole shown in the following figure. Click Next until the hole is highlighted, then click Accept . 2. A sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the hole.

Modify the scheme of this hole

Figure 9: Hole Dimensioning Scheme

3. From the dialog box, select Diameter from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down menu. Select the green checkmark to accept. The system closes the sub-window, and automatically shows a diameter dimension for redefined hole. Task 3. Change the name of a dimension and display symbolic name.

1. Select the 2.50 diameter dimension and use the pop-up menu to bring up the DIMENSION PROPERTY dialog box. 2. Click the Dimension Text tab. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the @D to @S. In the Name area, type [CENTERLINE_DIA], then close the dialog box.

Pag e 6 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. Reposition the Centerline_Dia dimension as shown in the following figure. Task 4. Create an angular dimension to locate the patterned holes.

1. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference . 2. Accept the defaults, then select the axes lines shown in the following figure. 3. Place the dimension using the middle mouse button. Reposition as necessary.

Select this axis from which to dimension

Select this axis from which to dimension

Figure 10: Angle Dimension

4. Save and close the drawing.

C reat ing Dim ensio ns

Pag e 6- 15

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Create Ordinate Dimension Automatically and Create a Hole Table
Task 1. Replace the drawing model with it family table instance.

1. Retrieve the ROTOR_SHIELD_FLAT.DRW. If you have finished the exercises in chapter 1, you can work on ROTOR_SHIELD.DRW that you previously saved. 2. Replace the drawing model with it family table instance. Click View > Dwg Models > Replace . 3. Select SHEETMETAL_FLAT1. Click Open . The drawing should display the flat state of the sheetmetal part. Task 2. Insert Ordinate dimensions on the flat state sheet metal part automatically. 1. Click Insert > Dimension > Ordinate > Auto Create . 2. In the lower left view, select the surface shown in the following picture.

Figure 11: Select the indicated surface to insert its dimensions

3. Select PRT_CSYS_DEF as the coordinate system.
Pag e 6 - 1 6 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Repaint the screen. The view should display the following figure.

Figure 12: Finished view

Task 3.

Create a hole table.

1. Click Advanced > Hole Table > Create > Holes . 2. Select the same coordinate system used in the previous task. 3. Locate the table on top of the view, as shown in the following picture.

C reat ing Dim ensio ns

Pag e 6- 17

NOTES

Figure 13: Finished Hole table

4. Save and erase the drawing.

Pag e 6 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can create driven, reference and draft dimensions. You can modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.

C reat ing Dim ensio ns

Pag e 6- 19

Module

7
Creating Notes
In this module, you learn how to create a drawing note, add it to a drawing, and manipulate it. You also learn how to use style libraries to store text styles for your drawings.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create notes on a drawing. Manipulate drawing notes. Use style libraries to store text styles.

Page 7-1

NOTES

ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING
A drawing note is text that you add to a drawing as supporting information.

Specifying the Content of a Note
Drawing notes are composed of text and symbol. You can also include parametric information in notes. The system updates the parametric information contained in notes to reflect any changes.

Dimensions and System-Defined Parameters
You can add model, reference, or driven dimensions, as well as systemdefined parameters (number of instances in a pattern) to a drawing note by typing in the symbolic name of the parameter preceded by an ampersand. When you are creating a note in Pro/ENGINEER, the dimensions and parameters automatically convert to their symbolic form.

User-Defined Parameters
To associate specific information to a model (such as the color, cost, or vendor), you can create a user-defined parameter at the part, assembly, or drawing level. To place a user-defined parameter in a drawing note, you must precede the name of the parameter with an ampersand (for example, &total_holes).

Drawing Labels
You can use the following drawing labels in a note, preceded by an ampersand: •
&todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. To control the format of the date, set the configuration file option todays_date_note_format. &model_name &dwg_name &scale &type

• • • •

– Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.

– Adds the name of the drawing.

– Adds the scale of the drawing.

– Adds the model type (part or assembly).

Pag e 7 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• • • • • •

&format

– Adds the format size.

&linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear tolerance values for one to six decimal places. &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000

– Adds angular

tolerance values for one to six decimal places.
&current_sheet &total_sheets &dtm_name

– Adds the current sheet number.

– Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.

– Adds the name of a datum plane.

User-Defined Symbols
You can add a user-defined symbol to a note such as electronic symbol or welding symbols by entering [&sym(symbol_name)]. For example, to include the symbol delta in a note, enter [&sym(delta)] using the keyboard.

Special Symbols
You can add common drawing symbols to a note by selecting them from the Symbol Palette tool displayed on your screen during the note creation process.

Manipulating Notes
Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change it in various ways.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Notes
You can manipulate detail items using the Cut , Copy, and Paste commands. These commands use a clipboard to allow a variety of detail items, such as notes, symbols, draft entities, and tables to be copied to the same sheet, a different sheet, or a different drawing.

Deleting notes
After selected using the < DEL >. [Select] icon, notes can be easily deleted using

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 3

NOTES

Moving a Note
Using various techniques, you can change the location of a note in a drawing at any time. After a note is selected, the drag handles will be displayed along with highlighted note. Depending on the note type different drag handles is needed. • • You can move a free note or one that has a standard leader to any location using the drag handle at the center of the note If you created the note with a normal or tangent leader, the system constrains the note leader to a particular orientation, using the center drag handle, you can only move it along the leader line. To rotate the note, you can use the drag handle at the attachment point. must modify the attachment of the arrow. Since the arrow must stay normal or tangent to the entity, if you move the arrow, the note moves with it. To attach the leader of a note to a different entity, you can use the Mod Attach command located in the pop up menu.

Free movement Move text without moving the leader

Resize note

Move attachment point

Figure 1: Asynchronous Move

User Defined Margin and Wrap Function for Long Note
Word wrap functions let you wrap long notes or table entries into a userdefined margin. You can drag the margins to the desired size using an appropriate drag handle, as shown in the preceding figure. Whatever text doesn’t fit on one line will automatically be moved down to the next line.

Changing the Content of a Note
Using ENTER TEXT dialog box, you can change the content of a note as well as modify the text style of the note. You can access the ENTER TEXT dialog box using Edit > Properties or pop up menu.

Pag e 7 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Attaching the Leader to Multi-Line Text
You can attach the note leader to any line of text by entering the placeholder parameter @o (alphabetic character, not zero) at the beginning of that line, as shown in the following figure. Once you add this placeholder to a line, the leader automatically attaches to that line. You can add the parameter to the line as you create the note or add it later. If you add @o to more than one line of note text, the system attaches the leader to the first line containing it.

@o added to the beginning of the second line

Figure 2: Leader Attachment

Entering Superscripted and Subscripted Text
To add superscripted and subscripted text to a note, you can create it separately or include it in a text line with regular text on either side of it. However, you can superscript or subscript only plain text and special symbols; you cannot do so with dimensions, instance numbers, other parameter values, or geometric tolerances. The system positions superscripted and subscripted text by reference to the closest line of regular text, whether that text belongs to another note, or to the note that you are currently creating. • To create superscripted text, enter [@+text@#].

To create subscripted text, enter [@-text@#].

To create both super- and subscripted text, enter: [@+text@#@text@#]

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 5

NOTES

Creating a Box Around a Note
You can enclose a note in a box by entering [@[text@]] .If you place the @[ without @], the system encloses all texts that come after @[ in a box, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3: Boxed Note

Saving Notes
To avoid having to retype standard notes, you can save them for future use in other drawings. Using the configuration file option pro_note_dir, you can set up a library of standard notes that contain parameters, special symbols, and super- or subscripted text. However, you cannot include information concerning text style such as text height, text width, text angle, and slant angle. You must change this information manually after placing the note. You can save a note using one of these methods: • When editing a note using ENTER TEXT dialog box, you can open system text editor to edit and save the note. You should save the note as plain text with a .txt extension. Use the INFO pull-down menu at the top of the Pro/ENGINEER main window to write it to a file. The system saves each selected note as a separate file. When specifying the filename, do not add the extension—Pro/ENGINEER automatically appends .txt and a version number, for example .txt.1. If you type the same filename, it increments this extension automatically to avoid overwriting an existing file.

Modifying the Text Style
Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change its text style. However, Pro/ENGINEER sometimes selects more than just the text that you specifically select. For example, if you choose one word in the first line of a note, the entire line might highlight because all the texts in that line belong to the same text field.

Pag e 7 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Text Fields
Pro/ENGINEER separates a note into portions referred to as text fields, as shown in the following figure. You can manipulate text fields separately from the rest of the note, for example, assigning text style. The system breaks up text strings into portions wherever there is a new line of text or a parameter (such as dimensions), and encloses each portion of the text in {} (braces), giving it an integer label. Labels identify the initial order of the text, and any attributes for that portion.
∅ 1.50 THROUGH HOLE ONE PLACE {0: ∅}{1:&d23}{2:THROUGH HOLE} {3:ONE PLACE} Figure 4: Text Fields

Separating texts into text fields
To assign different text styles to the neighboring texts, you must separate them into different text fields. To break the note into smaller fields, you can add braces and an integer label. When editing text or adding more lines, you can copy the attributes of a text field by using the same integer label. If you do not want to copy the attributes of any existing lines, use an integer label that you have not used already.

Text Style Attributes
The system separates the attributes that you can define into two groups: those that only affect the selected fields and those that affect the entire note, as shown in the following table.
Table 1: Text Style Attributes Attributes Affecting Selected Fields Text font Text height Text thickness Text width Slant angle Underlining Attributes Affecting the Entire Note Line spacing Placement angle Justification Color Mirroring

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 7

NOTES

Creating Style Libraries
You often apply the same text style to many detail items on a drawing. To save time, you should store predefined styles in a style library so that you do not have to specify text attributes each time that you begin a new drawing. To define a style, you need to specify a name and attributes such as font, text height, slant angle, etc. It is a good practice to create the text style library in the drawing templates, so that it is available in the drawings created using the drawing templates.

Using Tables to Access Styles
Pro/ENGINEER only allows you to set up libraries on a drawing-bydrawing basis. However you can use table to transfer the text style library to drawings that does not have a style library.

To use a table to reused text style, first, you need to create a table in a drawing that uses the styles and save it; then retrieve it into the second drawing. Once you have brought the table into the second drawing, you can use its styles. You should then place the table on a layer and blank it so that it does not show on the drawing.

Adding Auxiliary Font
To add the available auxiliary fonts in the text style dialog box, you can add font files in the “text” directory under the installation (loadpoint) directory.

INSERTING OLE OBJECTS
Using the OLE Embedding functionality. You can insert objects, such as text files, images, pictures, charts etc. into a Pro/ENGINEER drawing. The follow discussion is based on an inserted Microsoft Word Document.

Pag e 7 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 5: Insert Object Types

Manipulating the Embedded Object
Using the pop-up menu, you can edit the embedded object within Pro/ENGINEER or open up a separate window to edit the object.

Figure 6: OBJECT Pop-Up Menu

Editing an Object within Pro/ENGINEER
Using pop-up menu or by double clicking the object, you can edit an object within Pro/ENGINEER. A small Microsoft Word window along with Microsoft Word icons will be displayed within Pro/ENGINEER interface. You have access to all Microsoft Word’s functionality.

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 9

NOTES

Figure 7 Edit a Microsoft Word Document in Pro/ENGINEER

Editing an Object from Outside Pro/ENGINEER
If you open a separate window, the Microsoft Word is customized to provide additional functionality: • • • You can implement changes using the Update button under the File pull-down menu. You can use Close & Return button to return to Pro/ENGINEER. You can also access Windchill functionality.

Figure 8: Additional functionality in a separate Microsoft Word window

Pag e 7 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that control drawing notes.
Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Note Creation Option pro_note_dir switch_dims_for_notes Value directory_path yes no symbol_palette_input yes no Definition Specifies a directory from which to retrieve notes. Displays dimensions in their symbolic format during drawing note creation. Controls display of the special symbol palette for note creation.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that control drawing notes.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Note Creation Option default_font draw_attach_sym_height Value font font index name default value default value draw_dot_diameter default value yes_no_parameter_ display yes_no true_false Definition Sets the default text font to those listed in the specified font index. Sets the height of leader line slashes, integral signs, and boxes. If set to “default,” uses the value set for “draw_arrow_width.” Sets the width of leader line for slashes, integral signs, and boxes. If set to “default,” uses the value set for “draw_arrow_width.” Sets the diameter of leader line dots. If set to “default,” uses the value set for “draw_arrow_width.” Controls the display of “yes/no” parameters in notes.

draw_attach_sym_width

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create and manipulate drawing notes.

Method
In the first exercise, you create parametric notes on the plunger body drawing and manipulate the text style of other notes on the drawing. In the second exercise, you add a prefix to the increment angle between holes and also use a parameter to display the number of holes in the view note.

EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing

Figure 9: Plunger Body Drawing

Pag e 7 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 1. Create a parametric note for the holes in Section B-B. The note should include the diameter of the through hole and the diameter and depth of the counterbore. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_NOTES.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. Create a note with a standard leader for the holes in Section B-B. Click Insert > Note > Leader > Make Note . 3. Select the left side edge of the through hole in Section B-B. 4. Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10: Note for Holes

5. Select the symbols from the SYMBOL PALETTE window and type the text as shown in the following figure. For example, you would enter &d63 to have the .100 diameter dimension appear.

Figure 11: Parametric Note Text

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 13

NOTES

6. Click Done/Return . Task 2. Edit view note by adding PARTIAL to the note.

1. Change the note below Section B-B to include the word PARTIAL [Select] icon, select the note in the second line. Using the below Section B-B. Hold down the right mouse button again and click Edit Text . 2. In the ENTER TEXT dialog box, press the left mouse button at the end of the first line, press <ENTER>, and type [PARTIAL] to add the word partial in the second line of the note. 3. Click OK to finish modifying the note. Task 3. Create a new text style to use for the cross-section names. Apply the created text style for the word Section in the view notes. 1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery then click New . 2. Type [sections] for the style name. 3. From the FONT drop-down list, select Filled . 4. For the height, clear the default check box and type [.25]. 5. Type [15 ] for the slant angle. 6. Specify the justification for the text by selecting CENTER from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list. 7. Click OK and then close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box. 8. Click Format > Text Style and select the word Section in the view notes for Sections A-A and B-B. Click Done Sel . 9. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS. Select Apply > OK to make the changes. Task 4. Define a new text style by copying the text style that you just created. Apply the text style to A-A and B-B. 1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery > New . 2. Type [sect_names] as the NEW NAME, STYLE NAME.

Pag e 7 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. From the COPY FROM, STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS to copy the settings. 4. Type [.35] in the HEIGHT text box. Click OK > Close . 5. Click Format > Text Style and select A-A and B-B in the view notes for these sections. Click Done Sel . From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECT_NAMES. Click Apply > OK . 6. Reposition the notes directly beneath the corresponding views. Select the view name Section A-A. Center it beneath the view. Repeat this for Section B-B. Task 5. Create a note by reading in an existing text file . Locate the note in the lower left corner of the drawing. Change text in the first line of the note. 1. Click Insert > Note > No Leader > File > Make Note . 2. Place the note in the lower left corner of the drawing. 3. Open note.txt. The note appears on the drawing. Click Done/Return . Reposition the note, if necessary. [Select] icon. Hold 4. Select the note below Section B-B using the down the right mouse button and click Edit Text. 5. Backspace over the 0.10 and type [0.15] in its place. Task 6. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1. Add a new line that calls out the number of places in which the tab exists on the model. Make the note center-justified. 1. Edit the view note for DETAIL 1 using the pop up menu. 2. Add a third line to the note and type [4 PLACES]. Close the editor to finish the note. 3. Click Format > Text Style and select the view note for DETAIL 1. Select CENTER from the JUSTIFICATION HORIZONTAL dropdown list. Click Apply > OK to finish the modification. 4. Reposition the view note for DETAIL 1 directly beneath the view.

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 15

NOTES

Task 7. Create a note for the 1.125 diameter cut in the center view. Alter the default text field and change the note to read µm instead of mm. 1. Click Insert > Note > Leader > Enter > Normal Ldr > Make Note . 2. Accept Arrow Head and select the edge of the cut in the front view. Locate the note and enter it as shown in the following figure. Note:
Use the technique discussed earlier to include the dimension in the note.

Figure 12: Note Location

3. Reposition the note using appropriate drag handle. Change the text fields so that the first “m” in 20 mm is in its own separate text field. Select the new note. Right click and select Properties . 4. Separate the first “m” into a new text field. Change {3:FINISH SURFACE TO 20mm}, to {3:FINISH SURFACE TO 20}{4:m}{5:m}. Click OK to close the dialog box. 5. Modify the text style for the first “m” in the note in the front view. Click the Text Style from the FORMAT pull down menu. Click the first “m” in the note, followed by Done Sel . 6. Select CAL_GREK from the FONT drop-down list. For Height, clear the Default check box and enter [0.15]. Click Apply. Click OK to finish. 7. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 7 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes

Figure 13: Barrel Drawing

Task 1. Show notes and add a prefix to the increment angle for the patterned holes to show the number of holes. 1. Retrieve BARREL_CREATE_NOTES.DRW. If you have finished the barrel drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW. 2. Show the note for the patterned holes in the left side view. Click View > Show and Erase . Click Show > > Show All . Click Yes to confirm. Choose Accept All > Close .

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 17

NOTES

3. Obtain the symbol for the number of patterned holes. Click Info > Switch Dimensions from the pull-down menu. Switch Dimensions again to return to the numeric form. 4. Add a prefix to the 72-degree increment angle in the right side view. Select the 72-degree angle dimension. Use the pop up menu to bring up the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box. In the Dimension Text tab, type [&p0 x] in the PREFIX area. Click OK . Task 2. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1 to include the number of holes in the barrel. Use the parameter for the number of holes so that the note updates automatically if the number changes. 1. Add a third line to the view note for DETAIL 1 that calls out the number of slots on the model. Edit the view note for DETAIL 1 using the technique learn earlier. 2. Add a third line and type [&p0 PLACES]. Click OK to close the dialog box. 3. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 7 - 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Manipulating the Note and Inserted Objects
Task 1. Use the text wrapping capabilities to drag the note margin.

1. Retrieve the ROTOR_SHIELD.DRW saved in Chapter 1. 2. Notice that the note at the top of the drawing is in a location that may interfere with the Top view. 3. Change the size of the note by dragging the margin. 4. Select the note using the red. [Select] icon. The note will highlight

5. Click the drag handle that is displayed as a little rectangular box on the right hand side of the note. Your mouse cursor will turn into a Drag icon when near the box 6. Move the mouse cursor to the left to resize the margin 7. Click again to finish. 8. Move the note using the center drag handle as necessary. 9. Notice that the note has populated with the model parameters (Modeled _by, Job Number, Revision, Vendor, and Material). Click Info > Switch Dimensions to verify. Task 2. (Optional) Manipulating the embedded MS Word object. Use spell check functionality in Microsoft Word. 1. There is another note at the bottom of the drawing. This note is a Microsoft Word document embedded into the drawing. 2. Double-Click on the note. A small Microsoft Word window with the note inside is displayed. Notice that the Microsoft Word icons show up below the Pro/ENGINEER icons. [Spelling and Grammar] icon and change “drawin” to 3. Hit the “drawing.” 4. Click outside of the note window twice to finish.

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 19

NOTES

5. Save and erase the drawing.

Pag e 7 - 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can create notes on a drawing. You can manipulate drawing notes. You can use style libraries to store text styles.

C re a t i n g N o t e s

Pag e 7- 21

Module

8
Tolerances on Drawings
In this module, you learn how to work with linear and geometric tolerances at the part and drawing level.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Change the format and values of linear tolerances. Create and modify geometric tolerances.

Page 8-1

NOTES

LINEAR TOLERANCES
Linear tolerance can be used to specify the allowable deviation of a product from the exact size specified by a dimension. In Pro/ENGINEER, you can regenerate a model at the limits specified by linear tolerances. It will affect model geometry.

Tolerance Standard
When you create a model, Pro/ENGINEER assigns it a tolerance standard of ISO or ANSI based on the configuration file option tolerance_standard. ANSI standard linear tolerance is based on the nominal dimension’s number of digits. ISO standard linear tolerance is based on a set of tolerance tables. 1The details of manipulating ISO standard linear tolerance can be found in Appendix. In this module, we only discuss ANSI standard linear tolerance.

Specify Dimension Tolerances before Model Creation
Every dimension on a Pro/ENGINEER model has a tolerance. The system determines the linear tolerances for dimensions at the time the model is created. • If the model is created without using any template. The format and the values of the linear tolerance are controlled by the configuration file options that you have established prior to model creation. Therefore, you must specify desired tolerances and format beforehand. Pro/ENGINEER applies these settings to all dimensions. If the model is created using a template, the dimension tolerances are defined by the template. The settings in the template override the configuration file setup.

Tolerance Format
The format of the linear tolerances is controlled by the configuration file option tol_mode. The following table lists the values of this option. You can use these values to specify the formats for linear tolerances.

Pag e 8 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 1: Tolerance Formats Limits Displays the dimensional tolerance as the upper and lower limits. Displays the dimension as a nominal dimension. Displays the dimension with a plus value and a minus value. Displays the dimension with a single ± value.

Nominal Plus Minus

Plus Minus Symmetric

Tolerance Value
The tolerance values are controlled by a number of options such as linear_tol, linear_tol_0.0, linear_tol_0.00, angular_tol, angular_tol_0.0, angular_tol_0.00. • linear_tol_0.0, linear_tol_0.00 — specify a range for default tolerance of linear dimensions. It works in conjunction with number of decimal places of dimensions. linear_tol— An alternate format for setting default linear tolerance dimensions. First value sets the number of decimal places. Second value is the actual tolerance. For example, 6 0.000025 means when the decimal places is set to 6, the default tolerance is 0.000025.

Angular tolerance works the same way.

Displaying Dimension Tolerances
• • To show linear tolerances at the part or assembly level, you can use the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. To show them at the drawing level, you can use the drawing setup file option tol_display.

Changing Dimension Tolerances
After the model is created, the linear tolerance can be modified individually in part, assembly and drawing mode using DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box. • Even though linear tolerances can be modified individually after the model is created, you should set them to the values that you usually use before model creation to reduce unnecessary work.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 3

NOTES

The configuration file options that controls tolerance format and values are not retroactive. When you change them, it only affects new models. For existing models you have to manually change linear tolerance for each dimension. If you need to change the format and value of the majority of tolerance in a model, you should do that in drawing mode. Simply show all dimensions, use pick box to select all dimensions and then edit their properties to change tolerance format and value. Again, this can be avoided by setting up format and value before creating the model. If you specify a new tolerance format and value at the part, assembly, or drawing level, the system reflects that change in every mode of Pro/ENGINEER. Therefore, the tolerance format for a dimension is the same in Part, Assembly, and Drawing mode. To differentiate the tolerance format of a dimension from others, you can control the display independently in Drawing mode. As a result, you can show tolerances on a drawing without having to view them in the part or assembly.

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES
You can use geometric tolerances (gtols) to specify the maximum allowable deviation of a product from the exact size and shape specified by designers. Geometric tolerances provide a comprehensive method of specifying the location of the part’s critical surfaces, how they relate to one another, and how the part should be inspected to determine if it is acceptable. When you store a Pro/ENGINEER geometric tolerance in a solid model, it contains parametric references to the geometry or feature it controls—its referenced entity—and parametric references to referenced datums and axes. As a result, the system updates the gtol’s display when you rename a referenced datum. It creates geometric tolerances as annotations, and always associates them with the model. Unlike dimensional tolerances, geometric tolerances do not have any effect on the part geometry.

Creating a Geometric Tolerance
You use the following procedure to create geometric tolerances in Part mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode:

Pag e 8 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Setting Datums
You can change the name of a datum plane, set it for use in a gtol, and control its placement. To set a datum, you can create a new one or modify an existing datum plane or axis.

Note:
Renaming datums could affect any layouts to which you have declared them.

The system displays a set datum on the screen regardless of the datum display setting in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. In Drawing mode, you can remove it from the drawing by erasing it from a particular view. In Part or Assembly mode, you can place a set datum on a layer and blank it to remove it from the display.

Specifying the Tolerance Type
To specify the geometric tolerance type, select a graphical symbol from the GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box.

Defining the Model References
If you have only one model on your drawing, the system uses it as the default, but if you have a multi-model or assembly drawing, you can choose the model to use. You can also create a drawing-level gtol, which the system stores in the drawing, but it can only reference draft geometry.

Reference Entity
After you have defined the model, you must specify the reference entity (the geometry or feature that the gtol controls). The system does not use the reference entity in place of a set datum or as an attachment type for the gtol. The available reference entity types change based on the type of geometric tolerance that you are creating.

Placement Entity
Once you have specified the type, the model, and the reference entity, you can attach the gtol symbol to an entity on the model, known as the

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 5

NOTES

placement entity. The following placement types are available, depending on the gtol type: • • • • Attaching it to a dimension, datum, or another gtol. Using a leader. Displaying it as a free note. Creating a dimension to which you can attach it (in Drawing mode only).

Defining the Datum References
You can define a primary, secondary, and tertiary datum reference; a basic and a compound datum; and a material condition; however, you do not have to define all of these references. The system displays a message in the dialog box informing you of the minimum number of references that you must specify for the particular type of gtol that you are creating.

Specifying the Tolerance Value
You can define the tolerance value as an overall tolerance or base it upon some unit. To specify the material condition, you can choose from the following: • • • • Maximum (MMC ) Least (LMC ) Regardless of feature size with a symbol (RFS(with symbol) ) Regardless of feature size without a symbol (RFS(no symbol) )

Specifying Additional Symbols
• You can show the following symbols and modifiers in the geometric tolerance. ! ! ! ! ! Statistical tolerance Diameter symbol Free state All around symbol Tangent plane

Pag e 8 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

! • •

Set Boundary

You can set up a projected tolerance zone to display inside or below the gtol, and also specify a value for the zone height.
Additional Text on right

option allows you add the Boundary label to a GTOL as per ASME Y14.5M - 1994 standard

After you have defined the geometric tolerance, you can place it on the drawing and move it. You can either define another gtol immediately or end gtol creation.

Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings
In Assembly drawings, you can create a gtol in a subassembly, a part, or the top-level assembly. •
Subassembly or part gtols – A subassembly or part gtol can refer only to set datums belonging to that model itself, or to components within it. It cannot refer to datums outside its model in some encompassing assembly. Top-level gtols – When you create a gtol in the top-level model (such as a part in a part drawing or the top assembly in an assembly drawing), the system associates the tolerance with the view in which you have specified a reference entity. Reference datums must belong to the same top-level model, but you can select them in any view. You can attach an assembly gtol to a dimension, datum, or another gtol, provided they both belong to the same assembly.

Modifying a Geometric Tolerance
After you place a gtol on a drawing, you can move it; change its attachment position, type, or tolerance value; or redefine the steps in the gtol creation. You can modify every aspect of a gtol symbol, except the model reference.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that control linear tolerances.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 7

NOTES

Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Linear Tolerances Option tol_display tol _mode Value no yes limits nominal plusminus plusminussym linear_tol angular_tol # tolerance Sets tolerance display for linear and angular dimensions. # is the number of places after the decimal point and tolerance is the actual value of the tolerance. Sets tolerance standard when creating the model. Controls display of the small tolerance block on the screen. Sets the default tolerance class for ISO tolerance standard models. Definition Displays dimensions with or without tolerances. Sets default display of tolerances.

tolerance_standard display_dwg_tol_tags

ANSI ISO
yes

no tolerance_class medium fine coarse very coarse tolerance_table_dir directory path

Sets the default directory for user-defined tolerance tables for ISO tolerance standard models. Determines whether the Geometric Tolerance dialog restricts the user by graying out elements that are considered “illegal”

restricted_gtol_dialog

yes

no

Pag e 8 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that control linear and geometric tolerances in drawings.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Linear and Geometric Tolerances Option blank_zero_tolerance Value no yes gtol_dim_placement on_bottom under_value Definition When set to yes, system does not display a plus or minus tolerance value that is zero. Determines the location of a geometric tolerances feature control frame when attached to a dimension symbol that contains additional text.

tol_display

no yes

Controls the display of dimension tolerances. The Environment dialog box is not available in Drawing mode.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 9

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To show linear and geometric tolerances on a drawing.

Method
In this exercise, you show linear tolerances in Part and Drawing mode, and modify the tolerance values and formats. You also create geometric tolerances on the plunger body drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric Tolerances

Figure 1: Plunger Body Drawing
Pag e 8 - 1 0 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 1. Display the tolerance display in the part. Modify the format and values of some tolerances. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.DRW. 2. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT. Note:
If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and PLUNGER_BODY.PRT instead.

3. Click Modify and select the surface of the front tab to show the dimensions for the front tab. The system displays the dimensions in a nominal format, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2: Tab Dimensions in Nominal Format

4. Click Utilities > Environment , select the Dimension Tolerances check box and click OK to turn on the tolerance display. 5. Modify the format of the 2.50 location dimension. Click Dimension from the MODIFY menu and select the 2.50 dimension. Click Done Sel . 6. In the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box, change the tolerance format and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-MINUS from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 1 1

NOTES

7. Type [.02] in the UPPER TOLERANCE text box, and type [.03] in the LOWER TOLERANCE text box. Click OK . 8. Modify the format and tolerance limit of the 0.100 location dimension. Select the 0.100 dimension and click Done Sel . 9. Select +- Symmetric from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box, then type [.02] in the TOLERANCE text box. Click OK . 10. Close the window for the part and activate the window for the drawing. Task 2. Turn on the tolerance display in the drawing. Modify the format and values of some tolerances. 1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . In the drawing setup file, change the setting for the tol_display option to yes . Click Add/Change > OK . 2. Repaint the screen and click Done/Return . 3. Modify the tolerance format and values of the .250 dimension in the upper left view. Select the .250 dimension, right click and choose Properties . 4. Change the tolerance format and the tolerance limits. Select PlusMinus from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list. 5. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box. Type [.02] in the UPPER TOLERANCE text box. Type [.03] in the LOWER TOLERANCE text box. Click OK . 6. Change any dimensions that appear in limits format to nominal. Select dimensions to modify and click Done Sel . Select Nominal from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list and click OK . Click Done/Return . Task 3. Create a geometric tolerance for parallelism and display it on the 3.00 dimension in the lower left view. Use datum A as a reference. 1. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the datum planes, and repaint the screen. 2. Reposition the datum planes appropriately in order to create gtols. Create a new datum plane through the left side surface of the lower

Pag e 8 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

left view. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to display the DATUM dialog box. 3. Define datum plane A through the surface shown in the following figure. Enter [A] in the NAME section of the dialog box and click On Surface . 4. Click Query Sel and then select the surface. Click Next until you highlight the side surface, then click Accept . Click -A- in the TYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE and click OK .

Datum A should pass through this surface

Figure 3: Datum A Location

5. Use the [Select] icon to position the new datum as shown in the preceding figure. Experiment with the two drag handles. Turn off the datum planes and repaint the screen. 6. Erase the extra datum flags from Section A-A and the upper left view. Select the datum flags for datum A in Section A-A and the upper left view, press right mouse button and choose Erase . 7. Click on the empty background to finish. 8. Create the gtol for parallelism on the 3.00 dimension in the lower Select left view. Click Insert > Geometric Tolerance > PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT from the MODEL dropdown list. 9. Define the gtol for parallelism on the right side surface. Select SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list, then select the surface shown in the following figure.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 1 3

NOTES

10. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list and select the 3.000 dimension.

Place the tolerance on this dimension

Select this (end) surface as the tolerance reference.

Figure 4: Parallelism References

7. Click Datum Refs , then select A from the BASIC drop-down list as the primary reference. 8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol Value and type [0.006] as the overall tolerance value. Select LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK to finish the gtol. The tolerance should appear as shown in the following figure except it is displayed vertically.

Figure 5: Parallelism Geometric Tolerance

Task 4. Create a geometric tolerance for concentricity and display it on the 0.250 diameter dimension in the center view. Use datum axis D as the datum reference, which is the axis for this hole. You must rename the axis. 1. Use the toolbar to turn on the axis names and repaint the screen. 2. Change the name of datum axis A_32 and set it. Select axis A_32 in Section A-A. Right click and choose Properties . In the AXIS dialog box, change the name of the axis to [D]. Click -A- in the TYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE and click OK to place the datum with a free placement. 3. Remove the set datum axis from other views using pop up menu.

Pag e 8 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Create the gtol for concentricity on the 0.250 diameter dimension in the front view. Click Insert > Geometric Tolerance > and accept the default PLUNGER_BODY_tolerance.PRT from the MODEL drop-down list. 5. Select SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list and select the surface shown in the following figure. 6. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list and then select the 0.25 dimension.

Specify this surface as the reference

Figure 6: Concentric References

7. Click Datum Refs and select D from the BASIC drop-down list as the primary reference. 8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol Value and type [0.003] as the Overall Tolerance value. Select LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. 9. Define the tolerance to include the diameter symbol. Click Symbols , select the Diameter Symbol check box. The tolerance should appear as shown in the following figure.

Figure 7: Concentric Tolerance

10. Click New Gtol to repeat these steps to create the gtol for the 1.125 diameter dimension for the cut, as shown in the Plunger Body Drawing at the beginning of the exercise. Reference the cylindrical surface of the cut and attach the gtol to the 1.125

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 1 5

NOTES

diameter dimension. The complete gtol should appear as shown in the following figure. Click Done/Return .

Figure 8: Concentric Tolerance for the 1.125 Diameter Dimension

Note:
The system displays the concentric gtol under the dimension because the configuration file option gtol_dim_placement controls its location.

Task 5. Modify the values and information in some of the geometric tolerances that you just created. 1. Click Edit > Value and select the tolerance value .004 in the gtol for the 1.125 diameter. Enter [.005]. 2. Select the gtol for the .250 diameter hole. Right click and choose Properties . Click the Tol Value tab. Select MMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK . 3. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 8 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can change the format and values of linear tolerances. You can create and modify geometric tolerances.

T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s

Pag e 8 - 1 7

Module

9
Drawing Tables
In this module, you learn how to create and manipulate drawing tables.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create and manipulate drawing tables. Save drawing tables for use in future drawings.

Page 9-1

NOTES

PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES
You can use a table in a drawing for many purposes, such as to show a Bill of Materials or to create part catalogue. In Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a table on your drawing, save it to your hard drive, and use it later in other drawings.

Creating a Drawing Table
To create a table in a drawing, you must define the direction of the table, its location within the drawing, and the size of the rows and columns.

Table Direction and Location
You can specify the direction of a drawing table as ascending or descending, and as rightward or leftward, as shown in the following figure. The options that you choose determine the default origin for the table and the direction that the table grows if you add columns or rows. Therefore, you should define a direction that would prevent the table from growing off of the drawing sheet or into a drawing view.

Figure 1: Table Directions

The system prompts you to locate the first corner of the table based on the direction that you have defined. If you have defined the table direction as descending and rightward, for example, the system prompts you to locate the upper left corner.

Row and Column Size
After specifying the direction of the table, you must define the size of each row and column by specifying an actual size value or selecting the number of characters that can fit in each cell.

Pag e 9 - 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Entering a value

– You must define a value for each column and row. To specify the units, set the drawing setup file option drawing_units.

– To select the number of characters, you must select an area on the number bar that appears on the screen, as shown in the following figure. Pro/ENGINEER automatically places padding that is half of a character wide at each end of the cell which means that if you select the 7 in the number bar, you can only fit 6 characters in that cell. Therefore, you should place the cursor slightly beyond the number that you actually want. For example, if you want 8 characters, you should select between the 8 and the 9 in the number bar.
Selecting the number of characters Select here to fit eight characters in the cell

Left border of the table

Select here to fit twelve characters in the cell

Figure 2: Specifying Cell Size

Note:
After you specify the size of the cell by selecting the number of characters to fit in a cell, you can still enter more characters. If you add more characters than the cell can accommodate, they overlap into neighboring cells. Text does not automatically wrap and the cells do not automatically grow. To do that, you need to use wrap text functionality.

Setting the Justification for Each Column
Prior to entering text into a table, you should define the justification for each column, as shown in the following figure. The default justification setting is left justified. You should specify the justification that you want to use for the majority of the table cells. Later, you can change individual cells, if needed.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 3

NOTES

Figure 3: Justification of a Table

Adding Text to the Cells
You can add text to the cells in a table using the keyboard and the symbol palette. A short cut for entering text is to select the cell and use pop up menu. In addition to plain text, you can also include dimension and parameter values, as you would to create a parametric note. To include a dimension or parameter value, you must place an ampersand (&) before the symbolic value. For example, to include the numeric value for cost in a table, you would enter [&cost] into the table.

Changing the Content of a Cell
• • You can change the content of a cell by reentering text in the cell. Pro/ENGINEER overwrites the existing text. You can also edit text using ENTER TEXT dialog box just like note.

Modifying the Text Style and Setting the Justification for Individual Cell
Once you have placed text in a table cell, you can change its style.

Pag e 9 - 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 4: Modified Text

Text in a cell behaves the same way as a note when assigning text style. As discussed in an earlier chapter, Pro/ENGINEER actually breaks up the cell contents into text fields that you can manipulate separately from the rest of the cell text. To set justification of cells after entering text, you need to change the text style instead of setting the justification for the Columns. You can select all of the text that should have the same justification to avoid having to repeat the procedure.

Manipulating a Drawing Table
Once you have created a drawing table, you can manipulate it by doing the following: • • • • • • Inserting and Removing rows and columns. Changing the size of columns and rows. Wrapping text Combining multiple cells into one. Changing the origin of the table. Removing individual cell borders.

Changing the Size of Columns and Rows
After creating the table, you can change the size of any column or row by redefining the length or the number of characters that fit in the cell.

Wrapping text
If the text overlap into neighboring cells, you can use the wrap text functionality to fit text inside the cell.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 5

NOTES

• • •

You can wrap text in a specific cell. You can wrap text in a row or column using pop up menu. If wrapping text doesn’t solve the problem, you need to change the cell size of text size.

Combining Multiple Cells into One
You can combine table rows, columns, or a combination of both into one cell by merging them together. A merged cell acts like any other cell, as shown in the following figure. If you later choose to split the cells apart, you can re-mesh them into individual cells.

Figure 5: Merging Cells

Changing the Origin of the Table
You can move the origin point of the table to any corner. This could be useful if you move the table to the other side of the drawing and want to prevent the table from growing off the sheet.

Removing Individual Cell Borders
You can blank individual cell borders from display . The cells remain separate, as shown in the following figure. If you later decide to show the border again, you can unblank the cell borders.

Pag e 9 - 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Notice cells are still defined

Figure 6: Blanking Cells

Repositioning Drawing Tables
You can reposition drawing tables in the following manners: • • • Use the Table > Move command or simply select the table using the [Select] icon and move it. Use the Sheets > Switch Sheets command. Use the Cut , Copy and Paste commands in the EDIT menu.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 7

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create a table in the drawing.

Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing table, and then modify the table size and format. You also add text to the table and change the style of the table text.

EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing Table
Task 1. table. Switch some of the views to a new sheet to make room for

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TABLES.DRW. You can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW, if you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier. 2. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis names appear on the screen, turn them off and repaint the screen. 3. Switch the cross-section and detailed views to a new sheet. Click Sheets > Switch Sheet , then select the cross-section and detailed views to switch. Click Done Sel > Done to finish. 4. Reposition the views as shown in the following figure. 5. Return to Sheet 1 and move the views to new positions, as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 9 - 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 7: Plunger Body Drawing
D ra w i n g T ab l e s Pag e 9- 9

NOTES

Task 2. Create a drawing table that presents the revision history of the drawing. The table should consist of three rows and three columns. 1. Click Table > Create . 2. Define the table so that it grows toward the bottom left of the sheet. Click Descending > Leftward . 3. Select near the upper right corner of the drawing for the table origin. 4. Using the left mouse button, select immediately after the second zero to create the first column (20 characters wide). 5. Select immediately after the first zero to create the second column (10 characters wide). 6. Select immediately after the first 5 to create the third column (5 characters wide). 7. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the columns. 8. Using the left mouse button, select immediately after the number 2 to create the first row (2 characters high). 9. Select immediately after the number 1 to create the second and third rows. 10. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the rows. The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

5

10

20 2 1 1 Figure 8: Table Size

Task 3. Set up the columns of the table as left and middle-justified. Add text to the cells in the table. Enter text after justification. 1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column . Click Left > Middle . Select all three columns of the table to set the justification.

Pag e 9 - 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

2. Click Enter Text and select the upper left table cell. 3. Type [REV] for the first line of text. When the system prompts you to enter the second line of text, press <ENTER>. 4. Select the upper middle table cell, type [DATE], and press <ENTER>. 5. Select the upper right table cell, type [DESCRIPTION], and press <ENTER>. 6. Repeat the process until the table appears as shown in the following figure.

Figure 9: Adding Text to a Table

Task 4. Change the text style of the column headers. Increase the text height, make the font bold, and center-justify the headers. 1. Click Format > Text Style . Select the three column headers, then click Done Sel . 2. Select Filled from the FONT drop-down list. 3. Type [.30] in the TEXT HEIGHT dialog box. 4. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list. 5. Click Apply > Close . Task 5. Add a new row to the bottom of the table to indicate a new revision. 1. Click Table > Mod Rows/Cols > Insert > Row . 2. Select the bottom border of the last row. Tips & Techniques:
If you insert the row incorrectly, you can use the Remove option to delete any unnecessary rows or columns.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 11

NOTES

3. Enter the text into the new cells as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10: New Row Added to Table

Task 6. Create a new table on the drawing to display the release information. The table should consist of three columns and three rows. 1. Click Create > Descending > Rightward > By Length . 2. Locate this table below the first table. 3. Create a table that is similar to the one in the following figure. 4. For each column width, enter [1.0]. 5. For the height of the first row, enter [1.0] 6. For the height of the second row, enter [.5]. 7. For the height of the third row, enter [.8]. 8. Define the justification of the cell. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column , then click Center > Middle . Select all three columns of the table to set the justification. 9. Merge the cells of the first row. Click Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols , then select the upper left cell and the upper right cell of the table. 10. Merge the cells of the second row. Select the left cell and the right cell of the second row. The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 9 - 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Original cells

Merged cells

Figure 11: Merged Cells

Task 7.

Enter text into the table and manipulate the text style.

1. Click Enter Text and select the top row. 2. Type [RELEASED PRINT] for the first line, [RESPONSIBLE ENGINEERING ACTIVITY] for the second line, and press <ENTER> to finish entering text. 3. Change the size and justification of text you just entered. Use the [Select] icon to select the text. Press the right mouse button, and choose Modify Text Style . 4. In the TEXT STYLE dialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box. 5. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list and Top from the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Click Apply. Close the dialog box. 6. Change the height of RELEASED PRINT. Select Text Style from the FORMAT pull down menu. Select RELEASED PRINT, followed by Done Sel . Clear the default check box for height. Enter [.15] as the height. 7. Click OK to close the dialog box. 8. Using the same technique, enter [REA ORG CODE] in the second row. Set text height to .1, Left / Middle justified. 9. Enter [REV], [REL DATE] and [REL BY] in the bottom three cells. Set text height to .1, center / bottom justified.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 13

NOTES

10. Click Apply > Close . The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

Figure 12: Release Table

11. Save this table for future use. Click Save/Retrieve from the TABLE menu, then click Store and select the table. Type [RELEASE_INFO] as the table name. 12. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 9 - 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Manipulate an Embedded Excel Spreadsheet and Movie Object
Task 1. Modify an embedded Excel Spreadsheet from outside Pro/ENGINEER. 1. Exit Microsoft Excel if it is currently opened. 2. Retrieve the OLE.DRW. This drawing has two objects inserted into it using Object Linking and Embedding, an Excel Spreadsheet and a MPEG Movie showing an assembly sequence of the Rotor Assembly. 3. Select the linked Excel Spreadsheet. Right click and select Open Object . This will open a separate Microsoft Excel window. 4. The content of the cell indicated in the following figure is the equation that drives the Graph. Change the content from SIN to COS.

Figure 13 Change Excel cell content.

5. Drag the modified cell all the way down the column to copy the equation change. 6. Notice how the Graphs in both the Excel and Pro/ENGINEER update with the new values. Close the Excel window and return to the drawing. Task 2. Play an embedded movie.

1. Click Sheets > Next to go to Sheet 2. 2. Right click the inserted object and select Play Object . 3. Locate the movie file if prompted. 4. After the movie is played, erase the drawing.
D ra w i n g T ab l e s Pag e 9- 15

NOTES

Note:
The integration of commonly used programs such as the Microsoft applications, along with other types of objects (MPEGs), can make the documentation a much easier, more robust, and efficient process.

Pag e 9 - 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that: • • You can create and manipulate drawing tables. You can save drawing tables for use in future drawings.

D ra w i n g T ab l e s

Pag e 9- 17

Module

10
Cosmetic Features
In this module, you learn how to create cosmetic features on a part. Also, you learn how to use User Defined Features (UDF’s) to customize the cosmetic threads note.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create sketched cosmetic features. Create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a drawing. Create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and tapping automatically using the Standard Hole functionality.

Page 10-1

NOTES

COSMETIC SKETCHES
Sketched cosmetic features are none solid features that you draw on the surface of a part, such as company logos or serial numbers that are stamped on an object. Other features cannot reference sketched cosmetic features. Unlike solid features, you can set the color, font(if use text), and line style of cosmetic sketched features. You can set each individual geometry segment, whether it is a segment within a feature, a single feature or a pattern, to a line style

Working with Regular Sections
A regular section cosmetic feature remains on the sketching plane. It is a flat feature that Pro/ENGINEER locates directly on the plane on which you sketched it. You can cross-hatch regular section cosmetic features when you create them. The cross-hatching displays in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER, but you can only modify it in Drawing mode.

Working with Projected Sections
With Projected sections, a user can sketch the section on a datum plane or planar surface and then project it onto a part surface, as shown in the following figure. However, projecting it onto the part surface does result in some distortion in the shape of the feature, depending on the shape and orientation of the surface.

Pag e 1 0- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES Sketch

Resulting feature Projection surface

Figure 1: Projected Sketch

Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing
Cosmetic sketches appear on the associated drawing automatically. Using the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, you can erase a cosmetic sketch on a drawing in the same way that you would erase a dimension. You can manipulate the line style of the segments or the sketch, as well as the cross-hatching of the sketch. You can show or erase the cosmetic sketch in the drawing views individually.

COSMETIC THREADS
A cosmetic thread uses a magenta halo to represent the diameter of a thread. Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style of a cosmetic thread, and hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box do not affect them.

Creating Cosmetic Threads
When you create a cosmetic thread, you must define the surface on which to create it, the surface on which to start it, the thread depth, and the thread diameter:

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0- 3

NOTES

Starting Surface
To specify the starting surface, you can select a quilt surface, regular Pro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that belongs to a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). You must then specify the direction of the thread.

Depth
To define the thread depth, you can use Blind , Upto Pnt/Vtx , Upto Curve , and Upto Surface . You must then specify a value or reference.

Thread Diameter
To define the thread diameter, you can accept the default value that the system provides based on the diameter of the thread surface. The geometry of the thread surface determines if the thread is external or internal. If it is a shaft, the thread is external. If it is a hole, the thread is internal. For an internal thread, the default diameter value is 10 percent larger than the hole diameter. For an external thread, the default diameter value is 10 percent smaller than the shaft.

Note Parameters
The following table lists the parameters that you can define for a thread. You can define some of them when you initially create the thread. For example, the system bases the major diameter and placement on the values that you specify for the diameter of the thread. In the following table, pitch is the distance between two threads.
Table 1: Parameters for Thread Definition Parameter Name MAJOR_DIAMETER THREADS_PER_INCH THREAD_FORM CLASS PLACEMENT METRIC Parameter Value Number Number String Number Character TRUE/FALSE Parameter Description Thread major diameter Threads per inch (1/pitch) Thread form Thread class Thread placement (A-external, B-internal) Thread is metric

Pag e 1 0- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

You can manipulate thread parameters just as you would manipulate other user-defined parameters, (add, modify, delete, or display them). Thread parameters can be saved in parameter files that can be reused later.

The MAJOR_DIAMETER Parameter and Thread Diameter
When creating a cosmetic thread, the diameter value you entered will become the dimension that actually controls the size of the thread. The MAJOR_DIAMETER thread parameter you defined is a note parameter. On drawing, the value displayed in the thread note is the value of the MAJOR_DIAMETER parameter, not the dimension. The associativity between the thread diameter and the MAJOR_DIAMETER parameter exist initially. Once modification is made to any one of them, the associativity cease to exit. If you display feature information, Pro/ENGINEER displays both of them.

Placement
Pro/ENGINEER assign the initial thread placement value in the parameter file based on whether the thread is external (surface geometry is a shaft) or internal (surface geometry is a hole).

Displaying Cosmetic Threads and Parameters on a Drawing
Once you create a cosmetic thread on a part, it appears on the associated drawing automatically. The system displays it by default in magenta, just as it would display a surface feature, and hidden line display does not affect it. To control the effect of hidden line removal on cosmetic threads, set the drawing setup file option hlr_for_threads to Yes or No , accordingly. To show cosmetic thread parameters, you can select FEAT _ VIEW from the SHOW page of the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, and then select the thread in the view for which you would like to show the note. The note appears in the drawing in the format shown in the following figure.

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0- 5

NOTES Class

Major diameter

Form

Threads per inch

Placement

Figure 2: Thread Note

Changing the Format of a Thread Note
The note shown in the following figure may not be in the appropriate format for your drawings. Using the following techniques, you can modify the format of a thread note to meet your requirements:

Using standard note to remove the spaces
If the company standards require changing the note format by removing unnecessary spaces, you can modify notes individually or create a standard thread note as shown in the following figure. The note can be created using system text editor and saved as a text file. The format of the text file should meet the company thread note standard. The content of the note will be parametric. They should accurately reflect the parameters of the thread. The new note can be inserted on drawing attached to the cosmetic thread. • • • An ampersand should precede each parameter to make sure the note is parametric.
&—

The postfix :att after each parameter is used to ensure that the system uses the parameters of the feature to which you attach the note.
:att —

[.#] — By adding [.#] after a parameter, you can control the number of
decimal places of a parameter such as the threads per inch parameter. # is the number of decimal places desired, as shown

in the

following figure.
&MAJOR_DIAMETER:att-&THREADS_PER_INCH:att[.0] &FORM:att-&CLASS:att &PLACEMENT:att

:att uses the parameter for the feature to which the note is attached

[.0] controls the number of digits for the parameter

Figure 3: Note Format for Thread Parameter

Pag e 1 0- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Using the UDF to Change the Major Diameter to a Fraction
Using the techniques discussed above, you can not change the format of the major diameter parameter. &MAJOR_DIAMETER:att in the note ensures the parameter value of the feature the note is attached to is displayed, which by default will be displayed in decimal places, not fraction. To change the major diameter to a fraction or remove the leading zero you need to delete the for the major diameter parameter and re-create it as a string. This breaks the associativity with the diameter dimension, but allows you to display a fraction in the note. To simplify this process, you can create a user-defined feature (UDF) for the cosmetic thread with a built in “string” type major diameter . Because creating a UDF can only preset the major diameter to “string”, to display a thread note with a fraction major diameter and remove the unnecessary spaces, you need to place the thread UDF and insert the note using techniques discussed in the previous section.

USER-DEFINED FEATURES
To establish a library of common geometry that you can save for future use, you can create user-defined features (UDFs)—groups of features, their references, and dimensions. The following figure shows screw boss geometry as an example of a UDF. It contains 1 protrusion, 1 hole, 4 ribs, and a draft feature.

Figure 4: Screw Boss Geometry
Cosm etic Feat ures Pag e 1 0- 7

NOTES

Once you create and save a UDF, you can reuse it quickly on future models, as well as display cosmetic thread notes according to your company standard. If you set up the thread parameters so that they display correctly in the UDF, the note then displays correctly wherever you use the UDF.

Creating a UDF
To create a UDF, you must first model the geometry that you want to save. As you create the geometry, you should be aware of the parent/child relationships that you are defining. You should define the features using common external references or references to one another. Once you have defined the geometry, you can define the UDF. This section discusses the steps that you should follow to create a UDF of the cosmetic thread shown in the following figure: • • • • • • • Begin the definition and specify an option for storing it. Store reference parts. Name the group. Select features. Create external reference prompts. Define variable dimensions and elements. Complete the definition.

Figure 5: Cosmetic Thread

Pag e 1 0- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Subordinate / Standalone UDFs
UDFs are classified as either Subordinate or Standalone. If a UDF is stored as a standalone feature, the system stores all of the information that it needs to create the UDF feature in the UDF file itself. If you store it as a subordinate feature, the system uses some of the information from the current model for the UDF features.

Note:
For a subordinate feature, if the current model is not present when you later access the UDF, the system cannot retrieve the UDF.

Storing Reference Parts
When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a reference part to use later in placing the UDF on a new model. The system creates a copy of the current part and assigns it the name UDFNAME_GP.PRT. If you store the UDF as a subordinate feature, the current model automatically becomes the reference part.

Naming the Group
The name that you assign to a UDF should be a valid filename that is independent of the model from which you created it, unique and descriptive, (to ensure that it is easily identifiable). When the system stores the file, it appends the file extension gph. In some cases, your company standards specify the naming convention that you should use for UDFs.

Selecting Features
To assist you in selecting the appropriate model features to include in the UDF, you can use Query Sel or the MODEL TREE.

Creating External Reference Prompts
Once you have finished selecting the features to include in the UDF, you should define prompts for the external references (that is, references to parent features other than those contained in the UDF group) to appear in the message area, as shown in the following figure. You should create

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0- 9

NOTES

descriptive prompts that can assist the user in placing the feature, especially if you are using a standalone UDF that does not have a reference model.

Note:
You must define any parent/child reference that you create with geometry other than the features of the UDF.

Upto surface

Start surface

Thread surface

Figure 6: External References for Cosmetic Thread

Tips & Techniques:
For each reference that you create for a UDF, you must specify a prompt, and then specify a corresponding reference for it when placing the UDF on a new model. Therefore, when creating features for the UDF, you can save time by creating as few references as possible.

Defining Variable Dimensions and Elements
As you select features for the UDF, you can define variable dimensions, variable elements, and predefined variations of the UDF. Specifically, you can do the following: • – You must specify a descriptive prompt for each variable driving dimension to indicate what it controls. For any dimensions that you do not select,
Make some or all of the driving dimensions variable

Pag e 1 0- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

the system uses the same values as you assigned to the UDF when you stored it. •
Increase its flexibility – You can define variable elements for the UDF as well. For example, you can change the depth of the hole from Blind to Thru All , etc. Define prompts and logic statements – Using Pro/PROGRAM, you can define prompts and logic statements within the UDF. Create predefined variations of the UDF – Using family tables, you can store geometry sets of various sizes internal to the UDF instead of requiring the user to enter a set of dimensions.

• •

Completing the Definition
Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can select OK from the dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the reference part to the hard drive. The system assigns the UDF the name UDFname.gph. You may then want to move the file to a common group directory to give all users in your company access to the new feature that you have defined.

Placing a UDF
When you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group within the new model containing the UDF features. To retrieve the geometry from within a new model, you can choose Feature , Create , and User Defined or Feature , Group , Create , and From UDF Library . After you select a UDF file, you should place it by following these steps: • – To control the geometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent or UDF-driven.
Select the driving options to control the geometry

With independent placement, the system makes the group that you created in the current model completely independent of the UDF file. ! With a UDF-driven placement, the system associates the group to the UDF file. As a result, if the UDF file changes, the group in the new model changes when you select Update from the GROUP menu. You can use this method to enforce company standards. ! Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, if necessary. If you retrieve a reference part into a subwindow, you can use it as a visual aid. As the system prompts you for

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-11

NOTES

geometry, it automatically highlights the equivalent of the reference part.

Specify values of any variable dimensions that you created and placement references –The following figure illustrates how to

choose references for UDF placement.

Upto surface

Thread surface Start surface

Figure 7: Choosing References for UDF Placement •
Specify the display for invariable dimensions – The system does not prompt you for invariable dimensions when placing the UDF. You can specify the display as Normal , Read-Only, or Blank .

If you select NORMAL, the system displays dimensions as standard dimensions, using the values from the UDF, but you can modify them. This option is available only if you created the UDF as Independent . ! If you select Read Only, the system displays the dimensions as normal dimensions using the values from the UDF file, but you cannot modify them. ! If you select Blank, the system does not display the dimensions in the new model, as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 1 0- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 8: Invariable Dimensions Blanked •
Define any optional elements – As optional elements, you can only select those elements that you already defined in the UDF. For example, if you had only selected Blind and Thru All , when you place the UDF, the system would only provide you with those two choices.

– Before finishing the placement, you can preview the UDF by selecting PREVIEW from the dialog box, then click Done . If you do not need to preview it, you can choose OK to complete it.
Finish the placement

Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic Threads UDF
In summary, you should follow these steps to use a UDF to create a cosmetic thread and display the thread note in the correct format on a drawing: • • • • Create the cosmetic thread. Delete and recreate the major diameter parameter as a string with the correct format. Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Create a note on the drawing with the correct format and save it to a text file for future use.

Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole
When creating a hole, cosmetic threads can be created using the Standard Hole > Tapped Hole option. The Standard Hole option allows for

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-13

NOTES

standard UNC, UNF and ISO holes to be created. Counterbores, countersinks, and tapping can be included, and default sizes are included. In tapped a hole, a cosmetic thread can be included automatically, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 9: Standard Hole Dialog Box

The Standard Hole automatically generates a 3D note as a callout, as shown in the Hole Note Preview at the bottom of the dialog box in the following figure. This note can be shown on a drawing, but is not parametric.

Note:
The note created by the Standard Hole is not parametric – that is, the values in it cannot be modified directly. To change the values in the note, the feature must be Redefined and modified via the dialog box.

Pag e 1 0- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create cosmetic features on the part and display them on the drawing.

Method
In the first exercise, you create a cosmetic sketch on the plunger body part that says PTC to represent a logo on the model. In addition, you display the sketch on the drawing of the plunger body. In the second exercise, you create a cosmetic thread on a bolt by creating a user-defined feature so that you can display the thread information differently on the drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch
Task 1. Create a projected section cosmetic sketch.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_ COSMETIC_FEATURES .PRT. You can continue on your own project by working on PLUNGER_BODY.PRT and corresponding drawing. 2. Click Insert >Cosmetic > Sketch . Click Project Sec > Done . 3. When the system prompts you to select the surface on which to project the sketch, select the surface shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel > Done Refs .

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-15

NOTES

Select this surface onto which to project the sketch

Figure 10: Projection Surface

4. Define the sketching and reference planes for the cosmetic sketch. Select DTM2 as the sketching plane for the feature and click Okay to accept the default viewing direction. 5. Click Bottom and select DTM3 so that the yellow side of DTM3 faces toward the bottom of the screen. 6. Accept the default references for the sketch, which are DTM1 and DTM3. 7. Sketch the letters PTC in the position shown in the following figure. Click Sketch > Text and select the start and second point as shown in the following figure. 8. Enter [PTC] as the text line. Type [.2] for the Aspect Ration and hit the <Enter> key. Change the font if you would like. Close the text dialog box.
Second Point

Start Point

Pag e 1 0- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 11: Text Location

9. Click Sketch> Done to finish the feature. 10. Save and close the window. Task 2. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and erase the cosmetic sketch from some of the views on the drawing. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.DRW. 2. Use the toolbar icons to turn off the display of datum planes if necessary and repaint the screen. 3. Erase the cosmetic sketch from every view except for the one in the upper left corner of the sheet. Click View > Show and Erase [cosmetic feature ] and click VIEW . Select every Erase > view on Sheet 1 except the upper left view. 4. Erase the cosmetic sketch from the views on Sheet 2. Click Window >New and type [2] as the sheet to view. Erase the cosmetic sketch in Section A-A. Close the window for Sheet 2, and activate the window for Sheet 1. 5. Save and erase both the drawing and the part.

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-17

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads
Task 1. Create a cosmetic thread on a bolt.

1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.PRT. 2. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Thread . Select the cylindrical surface of the bolt as the thread surface, as shown in the following figure.

Start surface

Thread surface

Figure 12: Thread Surfaces

3. Define the thread so that it starts at the end of the bolt. Select the surface at the end of the bolt, as shown in the following figure, as the start surface. 4. Define the direction of feature creation to be toward the head of the bolt. Make sure the arrow points in the correct direction, then click Okay . 5. Define the depth of the thread as 1.00 and the diameter as 0.45. Click Blind > Done . Type [1.00] as the depth value. Type [0.45] as the thread diameter. 6. Modify the thread parameters to define the class, form, placement, and threads per inch. Click Mod Params . 7. Set the values for the thread parameters. Type the values as shown in the following table.

Pag e 1 0- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 2: Values for Thread Parameters MAJOR_DIAMETER THREADS_PER_INCH FORM CLASS PLACEMENT METRIC 0.45 15 UNC 2 A False

8. Click File >Exit from the text editor. Click Done/Return > Preview > OK to create the feature. Task 2. Show the note for the cosmetic thread. Alter the display of the thread and the note. 1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.DRW. 2. Change the display of the cosmetic threads so that the hidden line removal process affects them. Edit the drawing set-up file. Click Advanced > Draw Setup and set hlr_for_threads to [yes]. Update and apply changes. 3. Show the thread note on the drawing in the upper left view. Click View > Show and Erase . Click Show > [note] and select FEAT_VIEW. Select the thread in the upper left view and close the dialog box. 4. Position the note as shown in the following figure. Click [Select], select the note to highlight it, and press the left mouse button to move it. 5. To change the arrow position, press right mouse button to access the pop-up menu when the note is highlighted. 6. Click Mod Attach . 7. The default option is Change Ref. With this option you can select a new reference to which to attach the arrow. 8. To access more options, click Same Ref from the menu manager to move the arrow along the current attachment reference.

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-19

NOTES

Figure 13: Default Note Format

Task 3. Change the format of this note so that the major diameter displays as a fraction. Also, change the spacing and the number of digits in the note. 1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT to return to the part window. 2. Delete the major diameter parameter. Click Set Up > Parameters > Feature , then select the cosmetic thread. Click Delete , select MAJOR_DIAMETER, and click Done . 3. Click Create > String to create a new string parameter called MAJOR_DIAMETER. Type [MAJOR_DIAMETER] as the parameter name and [7/16] as the parameter value. Tips & Techniques:
The new major diameter parameter is not associated with the diameter of the cosmetic thread. If you modify the thread diameter, this parameter does not automatically update. To make the new parameter associative to the diameter dimension, you can use some advanced relations to convert the dimension to a fraction.

4. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW to return to the drawing window. The note no longer displays the major diameter. 5. Modify the thread note to use the new major diameter parameter. [Select] and select the note. Press and hold the right Click mouse button, select Properties . 6. Replace *** in the first field of the note by entering [&major_diameter:fid_#], where # is the same number displayed for the other parameters.

Pag e 1 0- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

7. Remove the spaces around the dash between the major diameter and the threads per inch. Remove the spaces around the dash between the form and the class. 8. Remove the space between the class and placement. Click OK to finish the change. Note:
The system displays the feature id in the format after all of the parameter names, where FID stands for the feature ID and the number represents the cosmetic thread ID. Since these parameters are feature parameters, they must call out the feature using this format.

9. Modify the number of digits for the threads per inch parameter. Click Format > Decimal Places and enter [0] as the number of digits to display. 10. Select the number 15.000 in the note and click Done Sel . The new note should appear as shown in the following figure.

Figure 14: New Note Format

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-21

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Using UDF to Standardize a Thread Note
Task 1. To avoid making these changes every time you use a cosmetic thread on a drawing, create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Create some feature parameters to use with the thread to display the note differently. 1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.PRT to return to the part window. 2. Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Click Feature > UDF Library > Create . Type [COSM_THREAD] as the name. 3. Define the UDF so that changes to the geometry on the original model do not affect it. Click Stand Alone > Done . 4. When the system prompts you to include a reference part, enter [yes ]. The system creates a copy of the current part and gives it the name COSM_THREAD_GP.PRT. Tips & Techniques:
When creating the geometry for the UDF, use a very simple part so that the reference part will be small and easy to interpret.

5. Specify the features to include in the UDF. Select the cosmetic thread feature. Click Done Sel > Done > Done/Return . 6. Provide prompts for the external references, as shown in the following figure. These are references to features other than those contained in the UDF. 7. When the system highlights the cylindrical surface of the bolt, type [Thread Surface] as the prompt. 8. When it highlights the flat surface at the end of the bolt, type [Start Surface] as the prompt. Later, when you place the UDF, these prompts appear in the message area.

Pag e 1 0- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Start surface Thread surface

Figure 15: Reference Prompts

9. Verify the accuracy of the prompts. As Pro/ENGINEER highlights a surface on the screen and displays the prompt in the message area, click Next to view the next prompt or click Enter Prompt and type the correct prompt. 10. After setting all of the prompts, click Done/Return to finish. 11. Define the depth and the note parameters of the cosmetic thread as variable. Select VAR ELEMENTS and click Define , then select the cosmetic thread. Select DEPTH and click Done > Done Sel . 12. Define the diameter of the thread as the only variable dimension specifying the prompt for the dimension as Thread Diameter. Select VAR DIMS and click Define . Select the .45 diameter dimension, click Done Return > Done Return and type [Thread Diameter] as the prompt. 13. Click OK to finish UDF definition. Save the model and quit the windows. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW , then click Window > Close . 14. Activate the part window, click Window > Activate . Save the part and close the window. Task 2. Retrieve SCREW.PRT and place the cosmetic thread UDF on it. Retrieve the screw drawing and create a note for the thread. 1. Place the cosmetic thread UDF on the screw part. Click Feature > Create > User Defined. Select COSM_THREAD.GPH and click Open . Select YES to retrieve reference part.

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-23

NOTES

2. Click Independent > Done to define the new thread as completely independent of the UDF file. 3. The system displays the SCALE menu with options for retaining the dimensions or using a scale. Click Same Dims > Done . Type [.80] as the new thread diameter. 4. Define the invariable dimensions on the UDF so that they display as normal dimensions. Click Normal > Done . 5. Specify the placement references that you used in the UDF, as shown in the following figure. Select the cylindrical surface of the screw as the thread surface and the flat end of the screw as the start surface.

Up To surface

Thread surface Start surface

Figure 16: Placement References

6. Change the depth of the thread so that it goes up to the surface, as shown in the following figure. Select DEPTH and click Define . 7. Click Up To Surface > Done . Select the surface as shown in the following figure. Click Preview > OK , then click Done to finish the thread. 8. Retrieve SCREW.DRW. 9. Create a note for the cosmetic thread parameters. Click Insert > Note. Click Leader > File > Horizontal > Standard > Default > Make Note . 10. Attach the note with an arrowhead to the edge of the cosmetic feature in the left side view. Click On Entity > Arrow Head >

Pag e 1 0- 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES Query Sel ,

then select the right side edge of the thread as shown in the following figure.

11. Click Next until the edge of the thread highlights, then click Accept . Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note by selecting to the right of the view.

Select the hidden edge of the thread

Figure 17: Note Attachment

12. Retrieve the note COSM_THREAD_NOTE.TXT and click Done/Return . 13. Change the values for the thread diameter and the threads per inch on the note. Click Advance > Parameters > Feature . Select the cosmetic thread. 14. Click Modify > MAJOR_DIAMETER . Enter [13/16]. Click Modify > THREADS_PER_INCH . Type [12]. Repaint to update the note with the new parameter values as shown in the following figure.

Figure 18: New Thread Note

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-25

NOTES

15. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 1 0- 2 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard Holes
Task 1. Create a 5”h x 5”w x 3”t protrusion.

1. Create a new part using the default template. 2. Create a rectangular protrusion. Sketch a 5 x 5 rectangle and extrude to a depth of 3. Task 2. Create a Standard Hole.

1. Click Insert > Hole and observe the dialog box as shown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Standard Hole Options

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-27

NOTES

2.

In the HOLE TYPE section, click the Standard Hole radio button and make sure the following checkboxes are selected:
! ! Add Thread Surface Add Counterbore Add Countersink

!

3. Set the hole size to 7/8-9 using the SCREW SIZE drop-down list. 4. Select the top surface as the placement plane, the front and right side surfaces as the reference planes. 5. Type [2.50 ] in the DISTANCE boxes for each reference. Note:
At the bottom of the HOLE dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER previews the 3D note that will be created along with this feature. All diameter, depth, and shape callouts are represented in the note.

6. Complete the feature. Notice the cosmetic thread feature is created along with the hole – this is one feature. Task 3. Create a drawing of the part to display the Standard Hole note.

1. Create a drawing using c-drawing template. 3 views are automatically created. 2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > hole. The note appears. Close the dialog box. Task 4. and select the

Modify the hole diameter in the note in drawing mode.

1. Click [Select] and select the note. Press and hold the right mouse button, choose Properties . Notice that it is non-parametric. 2. The texts in the hole note are plain texts. To make sure the note accurately reflects the size of the hole. You need to redefine the hole in part mode. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Pag e 1 0- 2 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 5.

Modify the hole diameter by redefining the hole in part mode.

1. Activate the part window and press and hold the right mouse button over the hole in Model tree. Click Redefine . 2. Change to hole size to 14-20 and complete the feature. 3. Activate the Drawing. The note may have disappeared. Click to display the note of the modified hole. The note should display the true size of the hole.
Show >

4. Save the part and close the window.

Cosm etic Feat ures

Pag e 1 0-29

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • • • You can create sketched cosmetic features. There is a difference between sketched and projected sections for cosmetic features. You can create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a drawing. You can modify the note of a cosmetic callout to match your company’s standards for callouts. You can automatically create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and tapping using the Standard Hole functionality.

Pag e 1 0- 3 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

11
2-D Drafting
In this module, you learn how to use the 2-D Drafting tools.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Create draft geometry in a drawing. Manipulate and modify draft geometry.

Page 11-1

NOTES

2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES
If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can access two-dimensional drafting tools. 2-D drafting tools in drawing mode are similar to the Pro/ENGINEER 3-D Sketcher. 2-D draft entities can be parametric and associative to model geometry. Different from 3-D sketcher, draft entities are created without dimensions. Both associative and non-associative draft dimensions can be created in drawing mode as discussed in the early chapter CREATE DIMENSIONS.

2-D Drafting Applications
You can use Pro/ENGINEER’s drafting functionality to perform the following: • • • • • Add 2-D entities to a Pro/ENGINEER model drawing. Update and maintain legacy data of existing drawings imported from other systems. Create drawing symbols. Create a sketch of a design in Layout mode. Create formats. Note:
The configuration file option

draw_points_in_model_units defines the current
draft entities’ coordinate values as model units, rather than drawing units.

Types Draft Geometry
You can create various types of draft geometry such as lines, arcs, fillet, circles, ellipses, splines, points, and chamfers. Construction line, crossed paired and circles can also be created to assist in creating other draft geometry.

Pag e 1 1- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Locating Draft Geometry
You can create free-hand sketch with rough size and location. The draft entities can be easily resized and relocated. However, most of the time, the draft geometry need be created with exact size and location.

Locate Draft Geometry Approximately
Cross hairs are useful tools for lining up new geometry with existing geometry. When creating draft geometry, cross hairs appear at the end of the cursor. When one of the cross hair lines is in line with existing geometry, the cross hair changes to cyan. The cyan color of a cross hair does not indicate that the new geometry lines up perfectly with the existing geometry. Instead, it simply indicates that the new and existing geometry are relatively close.

Locate Draft Geometry Accurately
To locate draft geometry accurately, you can use any of the following: • • •

Snapping References Draft grid Construction geometry
SKETCH MENU

Snapping References
When you start to create draft geometry, the SNAPPING REFERENCES dialog box is displayed. You can select draft geometry, as well as model geometry as references to locate and create draft geometry. When sketching, the specified references attract the mouse cursor. As a result, the draft geometry snaps to the references. In addition, constraints such as parallel, perpendicular midpoint, and tangent, can be applied while sketching referencing the Snapping References.

Parametric Sketch
When using Snapping Reference, the draft geometry is attached to the references at the time of the creation. To attach the draft geometry to the

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1- 3

NOTES

references permanently, you need to select the Parametric Sketch option in the sketch menu.

Draft Grid
By turning on the grid snap in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, you can use the draft grids to locate the draft entities. Grid snap causes the mouse picks to snap to the grid points, making it much easier to line up and locate draft entities to specific locations. You can alter the grid type from Cartesian to Polar, and vice versa, as well as change the grid size.

Note:
You can still use the grid snap if the grid display is off.

Construction Geometry
Construction geometry entities are lines and circles that can be used as snap references to locate and create 2-D draft geometry. They are similar to the guidelines that drafters use on drawing sheets to locate other geometry; Pro/ENGINEER displays them on the screen in gray phantom font. Using the options similar to those for creating regular draft entities, you can create construction geometry such as, lines, crossed pairs and circles. Using the default layers the display of the construction geometry can be easily controlled.

Using the Sketch Menu
There are additional options in the Sketch menu that can help to locate points for draft geometry in the following ways: • • • • Relative to the last point you selected using specified x- and ycoordinate values Relative to the drawing origin (located in the lower-left corner) using absolute coordinate values. Specify angle when creating lines Specify offset value when creating construction lines

Pag e 1 1- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• •

Specify radius when creating circles Specify start and end tangency when creating splines

Chaining Geometry
By default, when you create draft geometry, Pro/ENGINEER allows you to create only one entity at a time. To create more than one draft entity, it may be easier to start a chain. Chaining geometry enables you to create a series of entities with the end point of the current entity as the starting point of the next entity. The system continues to create the next entity until you end the chain by clicking the middle mouse button.

Manipulating Draft Geometry
In some cases, you may find it easier and faster to manipulate or reproduce existing draft geometry rather than draft new geometry. Using the 2-D drafting tools available with Pro/ENGINEER, you can either alter existing geometry or copy existing geometry.

Altering Existing Geometry
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can change 2-D geometry in the following ways: • • • • • Translate or rotate the geometry to a new location. Trim or extend the geometry to square off corners. Break up the geometry into smaller segments. Change the size of entities. Modify the line style of entities.

Copying Existing Geometry
You can quickly and easily create new geometry by copying existing geometry in the following ways: • • • • Create multiple copies of entities. Mirror entities about a construction line. Offset an entity to create a new one. Copy model geometry.

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1- 5

NOTES

Grouping Draft Geometry
When manipulating draft geometry, you can group entities together and manipulate the entire group using some of the same options that you use with individual entities. However, when working with draft geometry groups, you should keep in mind the following: • • • • You can control the display of a group by suppressing and resuming the group. You can delete all of the entities in a group or ungroup the group and retain the entities. You can include notes, symbols, and geometric tolerances in draft groups. A group of draft cross-sections contains the cross-hatching and the bounding entities.

Modifying Draft Geometry
You can fill or hatch draft entities that form a closed loop. You can use the same method that you would use to modify cross-sections in parts and assemblies to modify the hatching. You can also change the font, width, and color of draft geometry lines by using the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, or copy a line style from an existing entity. To save time, Pro/ENGINEER also allows you to create your own user-defined fonts and store them in a font library for future use.

Pag e 1 1- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that pertain exclusively to two-dimensional drafting:
Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Drafting Option associative_dimensioning yes no aux_line_font # line font name (# = 1 through 10,000) Value Definition Automatically updates a dimension if the associated draft geometry changes. Sets auxiliary line fonts to a specified font. Uses the integer number to associate a line font to draft geometry. In this way, you can make a blanket change by changing the font name associated with a number. Sets the drawing scale for the draft entities. Sets the length of elements composing a font. You must enter this value whenever you want to modify the length. Enter the font name and the desired value for the font length in system units.

draft_scale line_style_length

1.0 value font_name default font_name value

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1- 7

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.

Method
In the first exercise, you update a drawing after importing it from another system. You also use the 2-D drafting functionality to accommodate a change in the design intent of the model.

EXERCISE 1: Updating a 2-D Drawing
Task 1. Import an IGES file into Pro/ENGINEER to create a new drawing called FIXTURE, as shown in the following figure. 1. Create an empty C size drawing. 2. Enter [fixture] as the name. 3. Click OK > Empty. 4. Choose C from the STANDARD SIZE drop down list, followed by OK . 5. Click Insert > Data from File . 6. Select MASTER.IGS and click Open . The drawing should look like the following figure.

Pag e 1 1- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 1: Imported Drawing

7. Zoom in on the view labeled Top View. Task 2. Create the geometry to represent a cut on Top View.

1. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain . 2. Select the horizontal line above the 2.375 dimension and click Done Sel . 3. Enter [-0.4] as the offset value. Select the outside left edge, click Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as the offset value. 4. Select the outside right edge, click Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as the offset value. Task 3. Extend the new vertical entities so that they meet the bottom edge of the view and trim the corners together. 1. Click Trim > Bound , then select the bottom edge of the view as the bounding entity. Select the two new vertical lines to trim to this boundary. 2. Click Corner and select the portion of the new line that you want to retain.

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1- 9

NOTES

3. Repeat this procedure until you have created the view geometry, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2: New Top View

4. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference to create the 1.40 dimension. Select the new horizontal entity and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. Task 4. Using the geometry of the top view, create the new geometry for the front view on the drawing. 1. Refit the screen to display the entire drawing, then zoom in to view the front view and the top view. 2. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain . 3. Select the line in the front view, as shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel and type [0.25] as the offset value.

Pag e 1 1- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Offset this line

Figure 3: Front View Geometry

4. Click Trim > Bound . 5. Select the horizontal line you just created as the boundary to extend the two vertical lines in the top view. Task 5. Break the long vertical entities into pieces and then delete the portions that you do not want. 1. Click Intersect . Select the left vertical line and the bottom edge in the top view. 2. Repeat this procedure for the right vertical line. Intersect both vertical lines again using the edge that you offset in the front view. 3. Click the lines. [Select]. Select the unwanted portions of the vertical

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1-11

NOTES

4. Press <DEL> to delete. 5. [Optional] Create the geometry for the cut in the isometric view using the same techniques that you used earlier, as shown in the following figure.
Offset these edges by –0.55 Offset this edge by –0.2

Figure 4: Isometric View

6. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 1 1- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry. You can use draft geometry to modify an imported drawing.

2-D D raf ting

Pag e 1 1-13

Module

12
Symbols
In this module, you learn how to create drawing symbols.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Use variable text in drawing symbols. Create families of symbols. Set up symbol libraries and place previously defined symbols on a drawing.

Page 12-1

NOTES

CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS
A drawing symbol is a collection of draft geometry and text. When you use a symbol in a drawing, it becomes a single entity or instance. To place it in a drawing, you can either retrieve it from a symbol library or create your own user-defined symbol. If the symbols that you need are commonly used throughout industry, you may be able to purchase a symbol library such as a welding symbol library.

Creating Symbol Geometry
To place a symbol on a drawing, you must first create it and save it as a Pro/ENGINEER symbol with a .SYM extension in a specified directory.

Creating a Symbol Shape by Drafting
Pro/ENGINEER allows you to define an original drawing symbol by drafting the geometry. With this technique, you can define the shape of the symbol and also add notes or cross-sections to it.

Copying 2-D Draft Geometry from an Existing Drawing
Pro/ENGINEER allows you to copy draft entities from drawing to create symbol geometry.

Copying an Existing Symbol
You can copy the existing symbol and change it to create a new symbol.

Importing a Symbol
You can use an IGES, DXF, SET, TIFF, and CGM symbol that was created in another CAD package by importing it into Pro/ENGINEER. Once you have imported it into the system, you can change it by adding or removing geometry or notes.

Adding Text to a Symbol
You can place text on a symbol as a free note. The system places invariable text on a symbol by default, which means that you cannot

Pag e 1 2- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

change the text and it remains the same every time you use the symbol. To create text that varies depending on the placement of the symbol, you can add variable text to the symbol.

Using Variable Text

Figure 1: Creating Variable Text

If the text in your symbol must differ depending upon where you use the symbol in your drawing, you can create the text as variable. To create variable text, enclose the text within two back slashes, for example, \note\. This allows you to change the value of the text when you place the symbol on a drawing. You can specify the type of text to show in the note as text, integer, or floating point. You can also show parameter values in the variable symbol text so that the symbol text updates when the parameter changes. To display the dimension value in the symbol, enter [&dim] as the only preset value for the variable text. When you place the symbol on a drawing and select a dimension, the system shows its value in the symbol. You can use this technique with any user-defined parameters, as well as Pro/REPORT parameters.

Grouping Symbol Geometry
When you need to create several symbols that have similar geometry, you can create a family of symbols, referred to as a group. A single generic symbol contains all entities pertaining to a particular symbol family. You can arrange geometry and text from the generic symbol into groups and subgroups.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2- 3

NOTES

Figure 2: Symbol Groups

Exclusive
For this example, you would create a generic symbol containing a horizontal line and two triangles. From that generic symbol, you would then create two groups—Group A and Group B—defining them as exclusive. By doing so, you cannot combine Group A and Group B to create an instance; you can only use them separately. With these groups, you can create two instances of the symbol: Instance 1 contains Group A and the horizontal line, whereas Instance 2 contains Group B and the horizontal line. The horizontal line appears in both instances because you did not include it in a group. Any entity not in a group appears in all instances.

Independent
For the second portion of the example, you would create the same groups, but define them as independent. By doing so, you can use them separately or together to create an instance. This creates three instances in this family.

Controlling Symbols
You can control the display of symbols in your drawings by defining their placement and setting their height.

Pag e 1 2- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Symbol Placement
When you originally create a symbol, you must define the allowed placement types to limit the ways in which other users can place the symbol. If you assign the placement type as free, for example, other users could only place the symbol on the drawing as free without using a leader. You should set the placement type according to the standard for the symbol you are creating. You should allow other users some flexibility, but prevent them from placing it incorrectly.

Symbol Height
You can control the size of a symbol when you create it by setting the height to a fixed size or as variable. If the symbol height is fixed, the size of the symbol always remains the same. To specify the height as variable, you can use three different methods: • •
Base it on the units of the drawing

– To use this method, you must

change the drawing setup file.
Base it on the units of the model – The system automatically adjusts the symbol’s size to stay proportional to the model if you change the view scale. Relate it to the height of specific text in the symbol – The system changes the size of the symbol if you change the height of the specified text.

Storing Symbols
To specify the directory in which Pro/ENGINEER should store each symbol, set the configuration file option pro_symbol_dir. If you do not specify a path in the configuration file, the system stores symbols in the working directory. You can enter an offset path that branches off of pro_symbol_dir. For example, for a UNIX-based system, if you have specified pro_symbol_dir as /usr/proe/symbols, then: • • If you press <ENTER>, the system places the symbol in /usr/proe/symbols. If you enter [down_one_dir], it stores the symbol in /usr/proe/symbols/down_one_dir. This “down_one_dir” should
be an existing subdirectory.


Sym b o ls

You cannot go up the directory tree by entering [..].
Pag e 1 2- 5

NOTES

If you want to store the symbol in a directory that you cannot access as an offset of the current pro_symbol_dir, change pro_symbol_dir before you begin. You do not have to store the symbol to use it in a drawing. However, if you do not write it to disk, the system only stores it locally in the drawing and does not make it available for use in other drawings or by other users.

Figure 3: Symbol Attributes

PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING
When placing symbols on a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER allows you to retrieve a system symbol or a user symbol. You can obtain system symbols by purchasing a library of welding symbols, electronic symbols, etc. Once you retrieve the appropriate symbol, you must specify the following using the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box: • • • • Placement information. Relationship between the symbol being placed and the original symbol. Values for the variable text in the symbol. Groups that the system should include in this instance.

Create a Symbol Palette
To speed up symbol creation and placement, you can access a Pro/ENGINEER a drawing containing custom symbol definitions as a

Pag e 1 2- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

palette during symbol instance creation. You can access the palette from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box. Configuration file option “symbol_instance_palette_file” is used to specify the path and name of the palette file.

Defining the Relationship between the Symbol Instance and Original Symbol
When you place a symbol on a drawing, you should specify if you want the system to change the symbol instance when the original symbol changes. Using this method, you can avoid having to manually update existing drawings every time the symbol definition changes (for example, because of a new standard). If you do not need to reflect those changes in the symbol instance, you can simply place it independently of the original symbol. Pro/ENGINEER then creates a copy of the instance locally in the drawing.

Figure 4: Symbol Placement

Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol Instance
When you place a symbol with variable text on a drawing, you can change the content of the note included in the symbol instance. To modify the text, you can select any values that you specified when you defined the symbol, but the system limits you to one value for each instance of variable text.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2- 7

NOTES

Figure 5: Variable Text

Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance
After you create a family of symbols by defining a group, you can use the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to place one of the instances of this family on a drawing.

Figure 6: Symbols Group

If the groups are independent, you can select any number of groups to build the instance; if the groups are exclusive, you can only select one group to include in the instance. As you select these groups to include, you can preview the symbol. When the symbol is correct, you can then place it on the drawing.

Pag e 1 2- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS
Once you have placed a symbol on a drawing, you can redefine it at any time using the same method that you used to create it originally. You can change variable text values, grouping information, allowed placement types, and text or lines styles, as well as add or remove geometry or notes.

Note:
Redefining a symbol affects the display of all subsequent instances and all symbol instances that you have added to the drawing using the Use Definition option.

Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing
When you redefine a symbol definition and write it to the disk, it will be save with a different version number. the system tracks changes depending on whether the drawing containing the symbol instance currently active. • If the drawing containing the symbol instance is currently active, when you redefine the symbol definition, the system will update the existing symbol instances (placed with Use Definition option) automatically in the active drawing. If the drawing containing the symbol instance is not in session at the time of symbol re-definition, when you later place the redefined symbol, the system will prompt you whether you want to update the existing symbol instances. If you choose to update, the system update all instances in the drawing using the latest version. Otherwise all instances will use a old previous version.

USING WELDING SYMBOLS
With a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access the Welding Symbols Library, which contains a collection of generic system symbols according to ANSI and ISO standards. Using this library, you can create a variety of welding, brazing, and examination symbols in a drawing. Welding symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN dialog box.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2- 9

NOTES

USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS
If you have a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access a set of standard surface finish symbols in the directory LOADDIRECTORY/SYMBOLS/SURFFINS. The system does not place surface finish symbols as it would place other symbols in a drawing. Before you can place a surface finish, you must specify it as a generic, machined, or unmachined symbol, and provide a roughness height value, if needed. Surface finish symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN dialog box. The following table lists the available configuration file options that control drawing symbols.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing Symbols Option pro_surface_finish_dir Value directory path Definition Sets the default directory to which the system saves surface finish symbols and later retrieves them. Sets the default directory from which the system saves symbols and later retrieves them. Automatically regroups a symbol after moving text.

pro_symbol_dir

directory path

sym_leader_orient_move_ text

no yes

Pag e 1 2- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Drawing Symbols Option node_radius sym_flip_rotated_text default value no yes Value Definition Controls the display of nodes in symbols. Flips any text in a Rotate Text symbol that is upside down. If set to “yes,” and the symbol orientation is +/-90°, the system flips the text, rotating along with the symbol.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create and place symbols on a drawing.

Method
In the first exercise, you create a symbol using variable text and then place it on a drawing. In the second exercise, you create a group of symbols and place the different variations of the symbol on a drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text
Task 1. Draft the geometry of a symbol.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SYMBOLS.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. Create the symbol shown in the following figure. Click Format > Symbol Gallery > Define and type [delta] as the name of the symbol. 3. Increase the size of the sub-window by dragging the corner of the window to a new location.

Figure 7: Delta Symbol

Pag e 1 2- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Set up the draft grid by turning it on, changing the grid size. From the pull-down menu in the sub-window, click View Draft Grid > Show Grid . Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing , then type [0.4]. Click Done/Return . 5. Turn on the grid snap. Click Utility > Environment . Select the Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Click OK to close the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. 6. Zoom in to approximately 4 grid squares. 7. Using the 2-D drafting functionality, sketch a triangle. 8. Click Sketch > Line . Sketch the three sides of the triangle using two grid squares for the horizontal length and the height of the triangle. If you are not using a chain, select a starting and ending point for each line. 9. Round off the corners of the triangle with three fillet arcs. 10. Click Sketch > Fillet , then select the two lines that compose the corner of the triangle. 11. Type [0.1] as the radius of the arc. Repeat this procedure for each corner. 12. Turn off the grid and grid snap. Clear the Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Task 2. Add a note to the symbol with variable text.

1. Create a note in the center of the triangle. From the pull-down menu in the sub-window, click insert > Note. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard > Center > Make Note . Locate the note in the center of the triangle. 2. Create the note so that so that you can easily change the text when you place it. Type [\num\] as the note text and press <ENTER> twice to finish. 3. Click Done/Return . Reposition the note if necessary. Task 3. Define the attributes of the symbol. Allow any user to place the symbol using free placement, a left leader, or a right leader. 1. Click Attributes to define the attributes of the symbol.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-13

NOTES

2. Using the SYMBOL DEFINITION ATTRIBUTES dialog box, define the attributes so that the person that places the symbol can use a free placement, a leader attached to the left side, or a leader attached to the right side. 3. Select FREE and specify the symbol origin by selecting the arc at the top of the triangle. 4. Select LEFT LEADER and select the arc on the left side of the triangle. 5. Select RIGHT LEADER and select the arc on the right side of the triangle. Task 4. Define the height of the symbol based on the text height. Specify the preset values of the variable text as the numbers one through five. 1. Select Variable–Text Related and select the variable note as the reference text. 2. Specify the preset values of the variable text as one through five. 3. Click the Var Text tab. 4. Select NUM on the left side of the dialog box and enter 1 through 5 in five lines in the Preset Values for: area. 5. Select Integer so that the system only uses integers in this symbol. Click OK to finish defining the symbol attributes. 6. Save the symbol for use in future drawings. Click Done from the SYMBOL EDIT menu. Click Write and press <ENTER> to accept the default directory. Click Done . Task 5. Place the delta symbol on the plunger drawing with a leader.

1. Click Insert > Symbol Instance . Select DELTA from the SYMBOL DEFINITION drop-down list. 2. Attach the symbol to the lower left view with a leader, as shown in the following figure. Select With Leaders from the TYPE dropdown list. 3. Accept the defaults On Entity > Arrow Head and select the right side edge of the lower left view.

Pag e 1 2- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Click Done Sel > Done to place the symbol with one leader. Locate the symbol to the right of the view.

Figure 8: Symbol Location

5. Change the variable text to display the number 3 on the symbol. Click the Var Text tab, then select 3 from the NUM drop-down list. 6. Click OK to finish placing the symbol. Note:
After you place the symbol, you can use select the symbol to move it. In addition, you can use pop-up menu, to access Mod Attach to change its position, and Redefine Inst to reopen the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.

Task 6. Place a surface finish symbol on the plunger body drawing. Machine the symbol with a roughness height of 32. 1. Click Insert > Surf Finish > Retrieve > Machined >Open> Standard1.sym > Open to create a surface finish symbol on the plunger body drawing. 2. Attach the symbol to a surface with a leader, as shown in the following figure. Click Leader and select the surface. 3. Click Done Sel > Done . Select a position for the symbol and type [32] as the roughness height. Click Done > Done/Return . 4. Select the symbol and use the appropriate drag handle to reposition the symbol as shown in the following figure.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-15

NOTES

Figure 9: Surface Finish Symbol

Task 7. Create a new symbol to use as a BOM balloon. Copy the symbol created earlier and add two notes to use for the item number and the quantity. Create the values as variable text notes so that they will change when you use them in a drawing. 1. Create a new drawing symbol called DELTA_BOM. Click Format > Symbol Gallery > Define and enter [DELTA_BOM] as the name of the symbol. 2. Copy the delta symbol that you created earlier in the exercise. Click Copy Symbol , select DELTA.SYM and click Open . 3. Locate the symbol in the middle of the new window and click Done from the ADJUST INST menu. Press <CTRL> and the mouse buttons to zoom in on the symbol. 4. Change the variable text in the symbol to use the item number in a BOM. Select the note; right click and choose Properties . 5. In the text tab, change \num\ to \item_num\. Enter [x \comp_qty\] in another text field. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Pag e 1 2- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 8. Define the attributes of the symbol to use whenever you place this custom balloon on a drawing. 1. Define the attributes of the symbol so that it can be placed without a leader, or with a left leader or with a right leader. Click Attributes . 2. Select FREE and select the arc at the top of the triangle. 3. Select LEFT LEADER and select the arc on the left side of the triangle. 4. Select RIGHT LEADER and select the arc on the right side of the triangle. 5. Define the height of the symbol based on the height of the variable text in the symbol. Select VARIABLE –TEXT RELATED and select the variable note as the reference text. 6. Define the default values for the variable text as the index number and quantity for the BOM. Click the Var Text tab. 7. Select ITEM_NUM on the left side of the dialog box and type [index] in lower case in the Preset Values for: area. 8. Select COMP_QTY on the left side of the dialog box and type [qty] in lower case in the Preset Values for: area. 9. Select the Text check box and click OK and Done . 10. Save the symbol for use in future drawings. 11. Save and close the drawing.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-17

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups
Task 1. Create a new drawing and draft the geometry of the symbol by copying the draft geometry from the drawing. The geometry should consist of a circle, a square, and some arrows. 1. Create a new A-size, landscape drawing named GROUPS. Clear the Use default template check box and set Default Model to none . 2. Turn on the display of the draft grid and change the to the grid size. Click View > Draft Grid > Show Grid > Grid Parameter > X&Y Spacing . Spacing , then enter [0.4]. Click Done/Return . 3. Zoom in so that you can see approximately 20 grid squares across the screen. 4. Turn on the grid snap. Click Utility > Environment . Select the Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Click OK to close the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Task 2. Create the sketch as shown in the following figure, using the 2D drafting functionality. 1. Click Sketch > Line . Sketch the geometry of the square that is 10 grid squares by 10 grid squares.

Figure 10: Generic Symbol

2. Create a circle centered inside the square. Click Sketch > Circle . Make sure the circumference of the circle is tangent to the square. 3. Create the arrows to the left and the right of the square. Click Sketch > Line, then sketch the geometry of each arrow.

Pag e 1 2- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Close the SNAPPING REFERENCE dialog box. 5. Create a note with variable text centered in the circle. Click Insert > Note . 6. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal> Standard > Center> Make Note . Locate the note in the center of the circle. 7. Enter [\no\] as the note text and press <ENTER> twice to finish. Click Done/Return from the NOTES TYPE menu. 8. Change the text height to 0.25. Select the note and access Mod Text Style option from the pop-up menu. Clear the Default checkbox for the height and enter [0.25]. Click OK to close the dialog box. 9. Create a symbol called GEN_SYM. Click Format > Symbol Gallery > Define and type [GEN_SYM] as the name. 10. Copy the geometry from the drawing to create the symbol. Click Copy Drawing > Pick Many , select all the entities on the drawing and click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER copies the entities into the sub-window. Task 3. Create two symbol groups: one with the square and one with the circle. Each group will have the option for the right or left arrows. 1. Create a group called square and select all of the entities except for the circle. 2. Click Groups > Create and type [SQUARE] as the name. 3. Click Pick Many and drag a select box surrounding the entire symbol. Click Unsel Item and select the circle. Click Done Sel to finish. 4. Create a group called circle and select all of the entities except for the square. 5. Click Create and type [CIRCLE] as the name. 6. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entire symbol. 7. Click Unsel Item and select one of the lines that compose the square. Click Unsel Item again and select another line of the square.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-19

NOTES

8. Continue with this process until you have unselected the entire square. Click Done Sel to finish. 9. Define the group attributes to be exclusive at this level so that when you use the symbol, you can only place one of the instances (square or circle) at one time. Click Group Attr > Exclusive . Task 4. Create sub-groups.

1. Click Change Level > Square > This Level to change to the square level so you can create some variations of the square symbol. 2. Create two variations within the square group: one with the left arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type [LEFT_ARROW] as the name. 3. Select the square box, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the symbol, then click Done Sel . 4. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Select the square box, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol, then click Done Sel . 5. Define the attributes at the square level as exclusive so that you can display the square on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow or a right arrow, but not both. Click Group Attr > Exclusive . 6. Click Change Level > Up > Circle > This Level to change to the circle level so that you can create some variations of the circle symbol. 7. Create two variations within the circle group: one with the left arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type [LEFT_ARROW] as the name. 8. Select the circle, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the symbol, then click Done Sel . 9. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Select the circle, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol, then click Done Sel . 10. Define the attributes at the circle level as independent so that you can display the circle on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow, a right arrow, or both. Click Group Attr > Independent .

Pag e 1 2- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

11. Click Done/Return from the SYM GROUPS menu. Task 5. Define the attributes for this symbol using a free placement.

1. Click Attributes and select Free . Select the center of the circle as the origin. 2. Click the Var Text tab and enter [1] as the value for the variable text. Select Integer and click OK to finish defining the attributes. Click Done . 3. Save the symbol to disk. Click Write and press <ENTER> to accept the default directory. Click Done . 4. Close the current window. Task 6. Create a new drawing and place the different variations of the symbol on the drawing. 1. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS in a landscape orientation. Do not use a drawing template and set Default Model to none . 2. Place the square variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click Insert > Symbol Instance . 3. Click Retrieve…, select GEN_SYM and click Open . 4. Select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary and select a position on the drawing for the symbol. 5. Click the Grouping tab and select the plus sign beside square. 6. Select SQUARE > LEFT_ARROW. 7. Click New Inst to finish placing the instance and start a new one.

8. Click the Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary. 9. Select below the first symbol. Click the Grouping tab and select SQUARE > RIGHT_ARROW.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-21

NOTES

Note:
When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system automatically unselects LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for the square level are set to exclusive.

10. Click New Inst to finish placing the instance and start a new one. 11. Place the circle variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click the Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select to the right of the first symbol. 12. Click the Grouping tab and click the plus sign next to circle. Select CIRCLE > LEFT_ARROW. When you select CIRCLE, the system automatically unselects SQUARE because the attributes for the top level are set to exclusive. 13. Click New Inst to finish placing the instance and start a new one. 14. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select a position similar to the one shown in the following figure. 15. Click the Grouping tab and select Circle > RIGHT_ARROW. Note:
When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system does not automatically unselect LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for the circle level are set to independent.

16. Click New Inst to finish placing the instance and start a new one. 17. Click the Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select a position similar to the one shown in the following figure. 18. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW >LEFT_ARROW. Click OK to finish.

Pag e 1 2- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 11: Symbol Instances

19. Save and close the drawing. Task 7. Use the saved SYMBOLS.DRW to create a custom symbol definition palette. 1. Click Utilities > Options to access the configuration file. Add an option “symbol_instance_palette_file”, enter the full path and the file name of the drawing saved in the last task. 2. Apply and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 3. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS_PALETTE in a landscape orientation. Do not use a drawing template and set Default Model to none. 4. Place the symbol using the symbol palette. Click Insert > Symbol Instance . 5. Click Pick in Palette . The symbol instance palette file is displayed in a sub-window. 6. Select a symbol from the palette sub-window and place it in the main window. 7. Try moving the symbols in the palette sub-window. Close the subwindow, the symbol instance window. Erase the drawing.

Sym b o ls

Pag e 1 2-23

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can create a symbol with variable text. You can create a group of symbol instances.

Pag e 1 2- 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

13
Using Layers to Control Drawing Display
In this module, you learn how to create and use layers in the drawing mode.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • Set up default layers in drawing mode. Control the display of the layer in the drawing.

Page 13-1

NOTES

LAYERS IN DRAWING MODE
A layer is a placeholder of Pro/ENGINEER items, such as features, components and draft entities. You can use layers to group items together so that you can perform collective operations to them. In Drawing mode, layers are typically used to blank model construction geometry, such as surfaces, curves, planes, points or axis. It is a very effective way to clean up drawing and speed up display. They are also useful for manipulating draft geometry when working with legacy data, as well as printing.

Setting up Default Layers in Drawing
When you create a drawing, you may find there are layers that already exist in the drawing. They could come from the following sources: • • • Default layers specified in the configuration files. Layers from the 3-D model. Layers in the drawing template.

The administrator should use these methods to set the commonly used layers as default layers.

3-D Model Default Layers and Drawing Default Layers
Using default layers, you can automate the drawing layer creation process. Specifically, it can automate the following steps: • • Create a layer. Associate items to a layer.

For the second step to work, you need to setup the appropriate default layer in the appropriate mode. In other words, create default layers for 3-D model items in the 3-D mode and create default layers for drawing items in the drawing mode. For example, using one of the preceding three methods, you can setup two default layers in a drawing. One layer is called “DTM_PLANE” with the default layer type as “DATUM_PLANE”. The other layer is called “DRAFT_DTM” with the default layer type as “DRAFT_DTM”. After the

Pag e 1 3- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

default layers are created, you created a datum plane in the referenced 3-D model, and a draft datum plane in the drawing. The draft datum plane will be associated to the DRAFT_DTM default layer automatically. The datum plane created in the 3-D model will not automatically be associated to the drawing default layer DTM_PLANE. However, it will be associated to the default layer in the 3-D model automatically. So, it is a good practice to create the datum plane default layer in 3-D model and create the draft datum default layer in the drawing mode, using the templates. The good practice is to create the default layers that contain 3D model entities in the part and assembly templates and create the default layers that contain drawing entities in the drawing templates.

Layers From the 3-D Model
Layers, which reside in the 3-D models, are automatically available in the drawing. You do not need to recreate these layers in the drawing mode. The layer display status in drawing and the 3-D model can be associative and non-associative. Using the LAYERS dialog box or detail setup file, the associativity can be easily turned on and off.

Layers from the Drawing Template
Layers, which reside in the drawing template, are automatically available in the drawing. The drawing template is another effective way to standardize the default layers.

Set Up Default Layers Using Configuration File Options
You can use the configuration file option def_layer to create default layers. The value of this option should be layer_type layer_name, where layer_type is the type of item that you want the system to associate to the layer, and layer_name is the name of the layer. Once this option is applied, the system will automatically add default layers to the newly created models and associate entities corresponds to the layer_type to the default layers. The following table lists the available layer_type options.

Usi n g L a y e rs t o Co n t ro l D ra w i n g Di s p l a y

Pag e 1 3- 3

NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Default Layer Value layer_detail_ item layer_assem_ member layer_feature layer_geom_feat layer_nogeom_feat layer_cosm_sketch layer_axis layer_quilts layer_surface layer_datum layer_point layer_curve layer_csys layer_curve_ent layer_dim layer_parameter_ dim 11 default layers of the form: layer_featuretype_ feat Description draft items assembly members all features features with geometry features without geometry cosmetic sketches features with axes quilts surface features datum planes datum points datum curves datum coordinate systems curve entities all dimensions parameter dimension where “featuretype” is any of the following: hole, round, chamfer, slot, cut, protrusion, rib, draft, shell, corn_chamf, assy_cut Value layer_driven_dim layer_draft_dim layer_refdim layer_part_refdim layer_draft_refdim layer_note layer_gtol layer_symbol layer_sfin layer_draft_entity layer_draft_constr layer_draft_geom layer_draft_hidden layer_draft_grp layer_draft_datum layer_dwg_table layer_snap_line Description driven dimensions draft dimensions all reference dimensions part reference dimensions draft reference dimensions drawing notes geometric tolerances symbols surface finish symbols all draft entities draft construction entities draft geometry entities draft hidden entities draft groups draft datums drawing tables snap lines

Pag e 1 3- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Creating a Layer Manually in a Drawing
If the desired layers have not been setup as default layers, you can create them manually.

Figure 1: LAYERS Dialog Box

Although layers can contain different entities, you always create them by following these three steps: • • • Create the layer. Specify the default layer type. Associate items to the layer.

The procedure of creating layers, specifying layer properties, and associating items to layers in drawing is the same as in part mode.

Usi n g L a y e rs t o Co n t ro l D ra w i n g Di s p l a y

Pag e 1 3- 5

NOTES

Creating the Layer
Using the [Create new layer ] in the layers dialog box, you can create a new layer. When layers are created you must enter a layer name. It is recommended that you refer to your company layering standards to ensure the name you choose follows these guidelines. Also, you should verify that the layer you are intending to create does not already exist in the model.

Specify the Default Layer Type
It is a good practice to specify the default layer type when you create a layer. Again, if you are creating a layer in the drawing mode, you should specify drawing items as default layer type. From this point on, the drawing items of the default type will be associated to the layer automatically.

Associating Items to Layers
Default layers are not retroactive. For existing items, you need to manually associate them to the layer. When you associate items to a layer, you can • • • You select features by selecting on the model or in the MODEL TREE. You can quickly copy the items associated with one layer and associate the same items to a new layer using the copy/paste options. Likewise, items can be moved from one layer to another using the cut/paste options.

Specifying the Display of a Layer
You can control the display of the model layer in your drawing without having to change the part or assembly in which that item was created • • •
Showing Blanking Isolating

a layer displays all items on that layer on the screen.

a layer removes from the screen any item on that layer that does not affect mass properties.

a layer displays all items on that layer, but removes all nonmass items on any other layer from the screen.

Pag e 1 3- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Saving the Layer Display Status
By default, Pro/ENGINEER does not change the display status of a layer when you save the object. The next time that you retrieve the object, the display status reverts back to Show for all layers. To save the display status with the object, you must select Save Status from the LAYERS dialog box, then save the file.

Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing
You can control the layer display in a drawing in the following ways: • – Forcing a drawing to ignore the layer status in its model completely when determining if it should display an item on a layer.
Separating drawing and model layers

– Setting the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing layers with the same name.
Controlling drawing and model layers simultaneously

– Displaying drawing layers independently for individual drawing views or making the layer display dependent on the drawing.
Manipulating layer display status in individual views

Separating Drawing and Model Layers
You can set several drawing setup file options to allow you to control the drawing layer display status independent of the model. This is useful when working with GTOL Set Datums. These datums must be displayed on the drawing, but may not need to be visible in the model. Likewise, the construction datum planes need to be visible when manipulating the model features, but do not need to be shown on the drawing.

Controlling Drawing and Model Layers Simultaneously
You can set the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing layers with the same name. For example, if you blank the drawing layer datums, the system also blanks all items on the datums layer of the model. If the model is an assembly and you add another component with a layer of the same name, it automatically sets the display of any items on the model layer named datums to be the same as the drawing layer.

Usi n g L a y e rs t o Co n t ro l D ra w i n g Di s p l a y

Pag e 1 3- 7

NOTES

Manipulating Layer Display Status in Individual Views
There may be cases where the layer display in one view must be different from the other views. Drawing views do not have individual layers for each view—they use the layers in the drawing. However, you can control the display status of drawing layers separately for each view using the LAYERS dialog box.

Independent View Display
The display of a detailed view is dependent on the parent view. You can use the display mode settings to allow you to control these views independent of the parent. This will also allow you to set the layer display of a detailed view different from the parent.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that control layer creation in Drawing mode.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Layers Option draw_layer_overrides_ model no Value yes Description Directs the drawing layer display setting to determine the setting of the drawing model layers with the same name. If set to “yes,” the system implicitly includes drawing model layers in drawing layers with the same name for the purposes of setting display. If set to “no,” it ignores nondrawing layers when you set the display status of layers in the drawing model. If set to “yes,” the system ignores changes to all layer statuses in the model of the drawing made in another mode.

ignore_model_layer_ status

yes no

Pag e 1 3- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To use layers to control drawing display.

Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use layers to control your drawing display and override the environment settings for datum planes, axes, coordinate systems, and points.

EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing Display
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body part. Create a layer for the coordinate system on the model. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.PRT. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.PRT. 2. Turn on the display of coordinate systems and turn off the display of planes and axes; repaint the screen. 3. Create a new layer manually. 4. Click View > Layers . 5. Click [Create new layer ].

6. Enter [CSYS_PART_DEF] as the layer name. 7. Click CSYS to specify the Default Layer Types. 8. Click OK to finish. 9. With the layer CSYS_PART_DEF is selected, click [Add item].

Usi n g L a y e rs t o Co n t ro l D ra w i n g Di s p l a y

Pag e 1 3- 9

NOTES

10. Click Feature , and select the coordinate system CSYS_PART_DEF from the model. 11. Click Done Sel > Done/Return> Done/Return . 12. Select CSYS_PART_DEF layer and click [Blank] and repaint the screen. The coordinate system should no longer appear on the screen. Task 2. Although you have turned off the datum plane display, datum plane A remains on the screen because the environment does not affect datums set for GTOLs. Remove Datum A from display using a layer. 1. Creating a layer using the procedures in the previous task enter [SET_DATUMS] as the name. 2. Associating datum A to that layer. Make sure the layer SET_DATUMS is selected and add feature Datum A to this layer. 3. Blank the layer SET_DATUMS that you just created so that the datum no longer appears on the screen. 4. Save the part and close the window Task 3. Layers created in part mode are available in the drawing. Set up a layer for datum planes and blank the layer. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.DRW. If you worked on PLUNGER_BODY.PRT earlier, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the display of datum planes, coordinate systems, and datum axes; then repaint the screen. 3. Turn off the datum axes using the icon. Notice that the axis nametags are turned off but the axes are still displayed. Note:
To remove the axis from a drawing, you need to use the SHOW AND ERASE dialog box.

4. Click View > Layer to open the LAYERS dialog box. As you can see the layers that you created in part mode are available in the drawing. Show and blank those layers to see the changes.

Pag e 1 3- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

5. Create a layer for datum planes and associate the default datum planes to this layer. Enter [DTMS_PART_DEF] as the layer name. 6. Make sure the layer name DTMS_PART_DEF is selected, and add features DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 from the model using the MODEL TREE. Tips & Techniques:
You can easily select datum planes using the MODEL TREE tool; otherwise, you should always use the Query Sel option to ensure that you select the appropriate datums.

7. Blank the layer DTMS_PART_DEF so that the datums no longer display on the screen. Note:
The system automatically repaints the screen after changing the layer status in the drawing mode.

8. Determine which items are associated to the XSEC_DATUMS layer. In the LAYERS dialog box, click Tree > Highlight . Select XSEC_DATUMS. Another datum plane highlights on the screen. 9. Click Show > Layer Items . Click the plus sign to expand the XSEC_DATUMS layer and plunger body part. The feature associated to this layer is listed. 10. Blank the XSEC_DATUMS layer. The datum plane should no longer appear on the screen. Note:
This system created this layer by using the default layers functionality. When you create datums to use in cross-sections, the system automatically adds them to this layer.

Task 4. Create a layer for the datum axes on the drawing so that you can control the nametags of the set axis and other datum axis seperately. 1. Create a new layer and enter [DATUM_AXES] as the layer name.

Usin g La ye rs to Cont ro l D raw ing Di spla y

Pag e 1 3-11

NOTES

2. Associate all the datum axes, except the set datum D, to the layer DATUM_AXES. When adding items, click Text > Sel By Menu > Axis . Select all axes, then remove axis D from the list. 3. Click Select > Done Sel > Done/Return to finish. 4. Blank the layer DATUM_AXES so that the axis names no longer appear on the screen. 5. Blank the datum coordinate system from all the views on the drawing. Task 5. Create a layer for the set axis D and blank that layer from some of the views on the drawing, but not all views. 1. Create a layer for the set datum axis D. Enter [SET_AXES] as the name. 2. Associate the datum axis D to the layer that you just created. Make sure the layer SET AXES is selected and use add text to select axis D. 3. Make the view in the lower right corner independent of the rest of the drawing. Select DRAWING VIEW from the ACTIVE OBJECT drop-down list; then select the lower right view. 4. Blank the SET_AXES layer. Notice that the nametag of the set datum axis disappeared in the lower right view, but it is still displayed in other views.

5. Repeat this procedure for the upper left view. 6. Turn off the snap lines in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. 7. The drawing should look like the following picture. Save it. The system displays a message to warn you that it is not going to save the layer display status. You must explicitly save the layer display. 8. Click View >Layers > Save Status > Close . 9. Save and erase the file.

Pag e 1 3- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 2: Plunger Body Drawing

Usin g La ye rs to Cont ro l D raw ing Di spla y

Pag e 1 3-13

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can create a layer in a drawing. You can specify the display of a layer.

Pag e 1 3- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

14
Resolving Regeneration Problems
In this module, you learn how to resolve regeneration failures in drawings.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Identify failed model features. Determine why the model features failed. Resolve the regeneration failure.

Page 14-1

NOTES

RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES
Features fail regeneration for a variety of reasons. In Drawing mode, this usually occurs after you modify a dimension and regenerate the model. Regeneration failures are actually beneficial for several reasons: • • • Pro/ENGINEER automatically places you in an environment in which you can diagnose and resolve the problem. After you resolve the problem, the resulting model is more flexible and robust than it was originally. Since the model is more flexible, you can make future changes easily.

If Pro/ENGINEER detects a conflict between two features and is unable to successfully regenerate, it retrieves the model into a sub-window and places you in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Once you enter this environment, you should identify the failed feature and determine the cause of the failure before trying to resolve the problem.

Identifying the Failed Feature
When a feature fails regeneration, a diagnostics window appears on the screen, which provides information about the failed feature such as the feature type and number. Although this information is helpful, sometimes it is not sufficient for determining which feature failed. In those cases, you can investigate further.

Investigating
When a feature fails regeneration, the system displays on the screen only the features that successfully regenerated. Therefore, it does not allow you to view the failed feature or any feature that comes after it in the regeneration cycle. After reviewing the information in the diagnostics window, you can examine the failed feature or subsequent features by working on a backup model. The backup model shows all of the features in their pre-regenerated state. You can use it to view the failed feature on the screen and modify or restore dimensions of features that are not displayed on the current model. If you have selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the DEFAULT ACTIONS area of the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER saves a backup copy of the model to the hard drive upon each regeneration. If the model regenerates successfully, the system automatically removes the backup

Pag e 1 4- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

from the hard drive; but if you have a regeneration failure, the backup model is available for you to use.

Note:
Using the regeneration backup results in longer regeneration times because the system must save the model to the hard drive in addition to regenerating it.

Using the Last Saved Version of the Model
If you have not selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, you can still use a backup model. Pro/ENGINEER uses the last saved version of the model as the backup. However, if you have not saved recently, the features that you need may not exist in the last saved version of your model. To avoid this problem, after the model fails regeneration, undo the changes and save the model. After saving, perform the task that caused the failure again. This technique provides you with a useful backup model.

Determining the Cause of the Failure
Often, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solve regeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration. If the information that the system provides in the diagnostics window is not sufficient, you can use the Investigate menu options to access other tools that can assist you in determining the cause: •
Backup Model – With the backup model, you can view the part prior to the regeneration failure. The current model does not display the failed feature, so you cannot see the problem on the screen. The backup model is probably the most useful tool available when investigating the problem. List Changes – Lists the changes that have been made to the model to direct you to the problem (for example, modified dimensions). Geom Check – Provides you with information or recommendations that may be useful and highlights problematic geometry on the screen. Show Refs

• • •

– Shows each missing or invalid references on the screen that you used for a feature. You can use the backup model to highlight their original location.

– Displays the failed geometry on the screen to help you visualize the problem.
Failed Geom Pag e 1 4- 3

Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s

NOTES

– Simplifies the model by removing some of the features, making it easier to concentrate on the failed geometry.
Roll To

Fixing the Failure
The method that you should use to resolve the regeneration failure depends upon the information that you obtained through your investigation of the problem. If you determine that you should not have made the original modification, you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fix option to undo any changes and return your model to its original state.

Working on the Failed Feature Only
The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on the failed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine, reroute, delete, or suppress the feature.

Working on Any Feature
The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature on the current model or the backup model. Using the FIX MODEL menu, you can resolve the failed feature by doing any of the following: • – If a feature failed regeneration because of an invalid or missing reference, you can redefine or reroute the feature to use a different reference.
Change the references of a feature Redefine a feature

– You can redefine a feature to change the type of depth, the shape of the sketch, the attributes, and the direction of the feature. When redefining the sketch, the system displays it the way it appeared at the time of the feature failure to help you determine the cause.

– You can change dimensions to resolve the problem. For example, changing the radius of a round may result in a successful regeneration.
Modify the dimensions of a feature Insert new features – You can reroute a feature by inserting a datum plane before the failed feature and rerouting to the new plane.

• •

– If the system indicates that you should increase the part accuracy (due to having very small features on a very large model), you can change the part accuracy to resolve this problem. The default accuracy of 0.0012 is acceptable for the majority of cases. If you change the accuracy, you should make very minor changes until you isolate the problem.
Change the part accuracy

Pag e 1 4- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Note:
Increasing the part accuracy results in longer regeneration times and larger file sizes. You should only use this method if you are unable to resolve the problem using any other method.

Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures
When you encounter a regeneration failure, keep in mind that only one feature can fail in Pro/ENGINEER at a time—not the entire part—and the failing feature might not be the actual cause of your problem. You should, do more to investigate the problem beyond simply examining the failed feature. To minimize regeneration failures, you should make changes to the model as you design it. That is, as you add a feature to the design, make some changes to observe how the feature behaves. In this way, you can detect any problems before moving on with the remainder of the design work. Prior to resolving the conflict, gather as much information as possible to ensure that you fully understand the problem before changing your design.

Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s

Pag e 1 4- 5

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To understand why features fail and to resolve the failure.

Method
In this exercise, you change dimensions on the plunger body drawing to cause features to fail, then investigate and resolve the problems.

EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and change the value of the radius on the tabs. After the model fails, investigate to determine which feature caused the failure. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_RESOLVE.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY. DRW. 2. Make regeneration backup model. Click Environment , check Make Regen Backup check box. Show the MODEL TREE if necessary by clicking View > Model Tree . 3. Click Sheets > Next > Done/Return to switch to Sheet 2 of the drawing and zoom in on DETAIL 1. 4. Modify the radius of the round on the tab to 0.15. 5. Click the [Select ] icon and select the 0.05 radius dimension.

6. Right-click and select PROPERTIES. 7. Enter [0.15] as the Nominal value. 8. Click OK to finish. 9. Click Regenerate > Model to update the model to the new dimension. Pro/ENGINEER will place you in resolve mode.

Pag e 1 4- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

10. Click Feature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. An INFORMATION WINDOW appears, indicating that the round with feature number 32 with ID number 961 failed. Read through this information and close the INFORMATION WINDOW. 11. Add the Feature number as a new column in the MODEL TREE window so that you can highlight the failed feature on the screen to determine which feature actually failed. 12. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display. 13. Select Feat #, click [Add column] and click OK .

14. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed feature on the screen, as shown in the following figure. 15. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm , then select the round feature (feature number 32) from the MODEL TREE window. The failed round feature is highlighted in red.

Figure 1: Failed Round Feature

Task 2. Once you have determined why the round failed regeneration, change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully. 1. Choose Resolve Hints from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window and read through the hints provided by Pro/ENGINEER. 2. In the RESOLVE HINTS window, the system advises you to use the Investigate option to obtain information. 3. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION window indicates that when you changed the dimension d75 from 0.05 to 0.15, it caused the feature to fail.

Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s

Pag e 1 4- 7

NOTES

4. Click Current Model > Failed Geom . Some surfaces on the model appear in cyan as shown in the following picture. The SHOW ERRORS menu appears. 5. Click Item Info to display some information about the failed geometry. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window. 6. Click Backup Modl from the INVESTIGATE menu.

These surfaces are highlighted.

Figure 2: Neighboring surfaces

7. Click Analysis > Measure . 8. Select Distance from the TYPE drop-down list and select the two surfaces indicated in the preceding figure. The measured distance should be 0.125. The new radius of the round (0.15) is too large to fit in the space provided. 9. Move the tab to allow more room or change the radius to a value that is less than 0.125. Close the MEASURE dialog box. 10. Click Fix Model > Backup Modl > Modify, then select the round feature to modify the radius of the round. 11. Select the .15 radius dimension and enter [.10]. Click Current Modl > Regenerate to update the model to the new dimensions. Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.

Pag e 1 4- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 3. Modify the height of the flanges in DETAIL 2. After the feature fails, use the tools available in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box to determine which feature fails regeneration. 1. Change the 0.125 dimension for the flange in DETAIL 2. Enter [0.09] as the new value. Regenerate the model. 2. Click Feature Info . An information window indicates that the round with feature ID 772 failed. Read through this information and close the window. 3. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed feature on the screen by selecting it from the MODEL TREE, as shown in the following figure. 4. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm . 5. Click the cut feature from the MODEL TREE window to highlight it.

Figure 3: Failed Cut Feature

Task 4. Once you have determined why the cut failed regeneration, change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully. 1. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION Window indicates that the feature failure occurred because dimension d26 was modified from 0.125 to 0.09. 2. Click Current Modl > Failed Geom to view the failed geometry. The surface of the cut displays along with two points where the geometry becomes invalid. Click Item Info to obtain some information about the failed geometry.

Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s

Pag e 1 4- 9

NOTES

3. Close the information window. 4. Redefine the section of the feature. Click Quick Fix > Redefine . Click Section > Define > Sketch . 5. Sketch a vertical line on the right side of the section. Click Sketch > Done . Click Preview > OK to finish the feature. 6. Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box. 7. Save and close the drawing.

Pag e 1 4- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can determine why a feature is failing regeneration. You can resolve the regeneration failure.

Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s

Pag e 1 4- 1 1

Module

15
Drawing Formats
In this module, you learn how to create and use drawing formats.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create drawing formats by importing geometry. Create drawing formats with 2-D drafting tools. Use tables and parameters in formats.

Page 15-1

NOTES

CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT
Creating a drawing format is usually a one-time operation. When you initially begin creating drawings in Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a format for them using one of the following techniques: • • • Import it from another system. Use 2-D drafting functionality. Use Sketcher mode. Note:
To specify a particular format setup file to use for all new formats, set the configuration file option

format_setup_file.

Using a Format in Conjunction with a Drawing Template
If you want to automate adding drawing format in conjunction with a drawing template, you need to create a start drawing mapkey that will create a drawing using a template and then initiate adding the drawing format.

Importing a Format from Another System
If you have created a format in another CAD system, you can export the format using an industry standard file format such as IGES or DXF, which we refer to as an external format. You can then import this external format into Pro/ENGINEER. There are two ways of importing a format: create a format then insert the data or import the data directly.

Creating a New Format in Pro/ENGINEER then Insert the Data
You can create an empty Pro/ENGINEER format, specify a sheet size and orientation that is appropriate for the format that you want to import. You can then insert the external format.

Pag e 1 5- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

If the new format cannot accommodate the imported format, the system asks you if you want to scale the imported format so that it fits it properly.

Importing the Format into Pro/ENGINEER Directly
You can import the external format directly by opening the external format and specify the IMPORT NEW MODEL TYPE to be format.

Changing the Format
After you import the file into Pro/ENGINEER, it appears on the screen. You can then make any changes that are necessary, such as deleting entities, drafting new entities, adding a table, or adding text or parameters. Bear in mind that you must use a Pro/ENGINEER table in order to reference Pro/ENGINEER model and drawing parameters. Given this, you may need to delete the existing title block from the imported data and recreate it as a native Pro/ENGINEER table.

Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting
You can also create an original format in Pro/ENGINEER using the 2-D drafting tools that are available in Format mode. When drafting format geometry, the sheet outline is the border of the drawing format, as shown in the following figure. Because it is the actual border, it may not appear on pen plots unless you use a paper size that is larger than the drawing size. The system plots everything within the sheet outline border.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5- 3

NOTES

Format sketch

Sheet outline

Figure 1: Format Location

Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode
You can also create a drawing format by creating the format geometry in Sketcher mode, taking advantage of the parametric capabilities of Sketcher. After you create the format using the saved section, format become independent of the section file. You can then manipulate it using various tools available in Format mode.

ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT
After you create a format, you can add tables and notes to it, as well as parametric information.

Including Parametric Information in a Format
Drawing Labels
By using drawing labels, you can incorporate parametric information into your format. When you include parameters in a drawing format, the system evaluates them when you add the format to the drawing. If you include the date label, the system displays the date that you actually added the format.

Pag e 1 5- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

To use the following drawing labels in a format, you should include an ampersand (&) before the name of the parameter: • – Adds the date of the note’s creation. You can control the form of the date using the configuration file option TODAYS_DATE_NOTE_FORMAT.
&todays_date &model_name &dwg_name &scale &type

• • • • • • • • • •

– Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.

– Adds the name of the drawing.

– Adds the scale of the drawing. – Adds the format size.

– Adds the model type (part or assembly).

&format

&linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places. &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angular dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places. &current_sheet &total_sheets &dtm_name

– Adds the current sheet number.

– Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.

– Adds the name of a datum plane.

Including User Defined Parameters
In addition to the drawing labels listed above, you can also include your own parameters. If you include parameters in a table on the format, the system prompts you for their values when it adds the format to the drawing. For example, you could add a table that includes parameters specifying the person who created the drawing or checked it. If you do not include these parameters in a table, the system does not prompt you for the values.

Note:
You can store these parameters on the format as drawing parameters if you set the configuration file option make_parameters_from_fmt_tables to yes . If you set the value of this option to no , the system prompts you for the values whenever you add a second sheet or replace the format.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5- 5

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options controlling format creation.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Formats
Option Value Definition

format_setup_file

filename and path

Determines the format setup file to use for new formats. When including parameters in a table on a format, saves them as drawing parameters.

make_parameters_from_ fmt_tables

yes no

Pag e 1 5- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create and use a drawing format that includes parametric information.

Method
In this exercise, you create a multi-sheet drawing format that includes parametric information. You also set up the format so that the system requires you to provide specific information when you place it on a drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing Format
Task 1. Create a new drawing format and import the geometry of an existing format. 1. Click File > New > Format , type [C_MULTI_FORMAT] for the name and click OK . 2. Define the format in a Landscape orientation with a C size and click OK . 3. Click Insert > Data from File . 4. Select C_DET.IGS and click OK . Task 2. Create a table to replace the right side portion of the title block. Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title block. 1. Create a table. Click Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars. 2. Define the column and row sizes so that they are approximately the same as the existing blocks. The column and row sizes are listed in the following figure.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5- 7

NOTES 4 7

6

13

13 2 4 3 1

Figure 2: First Table Initial Rows and Columns

3. Create a second ascending, leftward table to the left of the first one to replace the left side of the title block. 4. Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title block and to the left of the first table. The column and row sizes are listed in the following figure.
7 7 9 4 2 2 2

Figure 3: Second Table Initial Rows and Columns

Task 3. Change the two new tables so that they look similar to the title block. Change the size of the columns and rows. 1. Before specifying the column to change, measure the existing title block size. Click Analysis > Measure Draft Entities . 2. Accept the default Distance from the TYPE drop-down list in the DRAFT MEASURE dialog box, then select the right and left borders of the SHEET cell in the title block. The measured distance should be 1.625. Close the dialog box. 3. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size >Column > By Length . 4. Select the right column of the first table, use the middle button to finish. Enter [1.625] as the width of the column.

Pag e 1 5- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES 0.625 1 0.75 1.625 1.625 0.546875 1.01563

0.781250 0.312533

Figure 4: Measured Column and Row Size of the First Table

5. Repeat this procedure to measure the draft entities and resize the column and row size of the first table. The measured results are shown in the preceding figure for reference. Task 4. Merge some of the cells in the table into one cell, as shown in the following figure. 1. Click Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols , then select the upper left and upper right cells in the table. 2. Select the left and right cells in the second column. 3. Continue merging the cells together until the table looks like the title block.

Figure 5: First Table Merged Cells

Task 5.

Change the row and column sizes for the second table.

1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size > Column > By Length . 2. Measure the right and left borders of one of the DATE cells in the title block. The measured distance should be 1.12483.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5- 9

NOTES

3. Select the right column of the table and type [1.12483] as the width of the column. 4. Measure the right and left borders of the Drawn cell in the title block. The measured distance should be 1.875. 5. Select the left column, the middle column, click the middle mouse button and type [1.875/2] as the column width. 6. Change the size of the rows in the second table: row 1, 2 & 3 = 0.546875; row 4 = 1.01563. 7. Blank the column borders from the top row of the table. Click Modify Table > Line Display > Blank , then select the two column borders of the top row. 8. Combine the left and middle cells of the bottom three rows together, as shown in the following figure. Click Merge > Columns , then select the left and middle cells of the second row. 9. Select the left and middle cells of the third row then select the left and middle cells of the bottom row. 10. Click Done/Return.

Figure 6: Second Table Merged Cells

Task 6. block.

Delete the entities that compose the borders of the original title

1. Click [Select] icon, press and hold the <Shift> key then select all of the lines that compose the original title block. 2. Click Edit > Delete .

Pag e 1 5- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Note:
You can also press <DEL> to delete entities once they are selected.

3. Move the new table into the correct position for the title block. Click [Select] icon and select the table. 4. Reposition the table in the new location and press the left mouse button to place it. Repeat the procedure to locate the second table, as shown in the following figure. Note:
To precisely position the table in the new location, use the Abs Coords option in the GET POINT menu.

Figure 7: Format with New Tables

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5-11

NOTES

Task 7. Add text to the tables that you just created. The text that you include should be parametric so that it changes automatically based on the drawing to which you add it. 1. Set the column justification by clicking Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column > Center > Middle . Select each of the columns in the table on the right. 2. Click Center > Bottom , then select each of the columns in the table on the left. 3. Click Enter Text , then select the Part cell so that the part name fills in automatically. 4. Type [&model_name] as the name. Press <ENTER> to finish. 5. Enter the following text in the cooresponding cells: ! ! ! !
! ! !

Fscm No. = &fscm_num Drawing No. = &drw_num Scale = &scale Sheet = &current_sheet/&total_sheets .XXX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_000 .XX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_00 Angle Tolerances = &angular_tol_0_0 Drawn = &drawn_by Drawn Date = &drawn_by_date Checked = &checked_by Ckecked Date = &checked_by_date Approved = &approved_by Approved Date = &approved_by_date

! ! ! ! ! !

Pag e 1 5- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 8.

Change the text height of some of the parametric information.

1. Click [Select] icon, select &MODEL_NAME. Press and hold the right mouse button to bring up the pop-up menu and select Mod Text Style . 2. Type [0.3] as the height and close the dialog box. 3. Repeat the procedures to change the height of the &FSCM_NUM and &DRW_NUM to 0.25. Task 9. Copy the table on the right of the sheet so that you can use it on Sheet 2. 1. Click Edit > Copy and select the right table. 2. Click Pick Many and drag the selection box around the first table and the underlying text, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 8: Copying the Table

3. Click Done Sel . The table and text is copied to the clipboard. 4. Add a second sheet by clicking Sheets > Add . 5. Click Edit > Paste . The clipboard window appears. 6. Zoom in on the copied items in the clipboard window. 7. In the clipboard window, click the lower right corner of the table as the first translation vector and select the lower right corner of the format on sheet two as the second translation vector point. Note:
The copied entities will remain in the clipboard until you select something else to copy. You can always delete the table and text and paste it in again, if needed.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5-13

NOTES

Task 10. Remove the top two rows from the copied table. 1. Click Table > Mod Row/Cols > Remove > Row and select the top row. Type [yes] to confirm. 2. Select the new top row and type [yes] again. 3. Delete the remaining text above the table using and <DEL>. 4. Save and close the format window. Task 11. Add the format that you just created to the plunger body drawing. The system prompts you to specify the unknown parameter values, but provides the known ones automatically. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_FORMATS.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. Edit the config.pro and add the option
make_parameters_from_fmt_table

[Select] icon

set to yes . Apply the

changes. 3. Add the multi-sheet format that you created earlier to the drawing. Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open . 4. Type [1] as the sheet number. 5. Specify the values of the unknown parameters in the format. Enter the values as shown in the following table (if the system prompts you to specify the type of parameter, click String ).

Pag e 1 5- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 2: Unknown Parameters

Parameter
Drw_num Fscm_num Approved_by_date Approved_by Checked_by_date Checked_by Drawn_by_date

Value
11473 2172 TBD TBD 5/14/98 JOE CHECKER 5/7/98

6. Clean up the display of the sheet by moving tables, views, or notes to more appropriate positions, if necessary. 7. Switch to Sheet 2 and add the second sheet of the format. Click Sheets > Next followed by Format > Add/Replace . 8. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open . 9. Type [2] as the sheet number. The system should now fill out the parameters automatically without displaying any additional prompts, as shown in the following figure. 10. Save and close the format window.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5-15

NOTES

Figure 9: Plunger Body Drawing

Pag e 1 5- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can create a format by importing an IGES file. You can add parametric information to a format.

D ra w i n g F o rm a t s

Pag e 1 5-17

Module

16
Creating a Bill of Materials
In this module, you learn how to use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of Materials on a drawing.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create an automatic BOM. Manipulate a BOM. Show BOM balloons in the drawing.

Page 16-1

NOTES

CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT
A Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that are contained within the current assembly. When creating an assembly drawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. You can use repeat regions to automate creation and maintenance of the BOM.

Generating a BOM Report
To create an automatic BOM in Pro/ENGINEER, follow these steps: • • • • Create a table. Define a simple repeat region. Enter the report symbols. Update the table.

Creating a Table
When creating a table to display an assembly drawing’s BOM, you should specify the placement and origin carefully to accommodate its growth as the system adds rows to the table.

Defining a Simple Repeat Region
After creating a table, you can create a simple repeat region. A repeat region is an area of the table. The system will extract information from the models and fill in the cells in this area automatically based on the requirements you specified. When you create a repeat region, you need to specify some seed cells, then enter the name of the parameter that you want the system to fill in. There are two types of repeat regions: simple and Two-D. A simple region grows in one direction, repeating a row over and over. To create a simple repeat region, you must define the extent of the region, that is, the area of information that you want the system to duplicate. For a BOM report, this area constitutes the outside cells of the row, as shown in the following figure. A Two-D repeat region will populate in two directions. It will be discussed in a later chapter.

Pag e 1 6- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

INDEX
Select this cell

NAME
Figure 1: Simple Repeat Region

QTY
Select this cell

Specifying the Information to Include
After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to define the information that you want the system to include in the table. You can define parameters by typing them manually, or by making selections from a menu. The following table lists some of the Pro/REPORT system parameters that you can use to create a BOM. • To enter using the keyboard, you need to enter the report symbol in the format of parameters, in other words, you need to include the “&”. For example, to display cost in two decimal places, you need to enter [&asm.mbr.cost[.2]]. The cell you enter the report symbol becomes the seed cell. You can use Switch Sym to check the symbolic name of the report symbols after the system has populated the repeat region. When you need to perform operations related to the report symbol, such as calculation summations, you need to select the seed cell where the report symbol is entered.
Table 1: Pro/REPORT System Parameters Parameter Name &asm.mbr.name &asm.mbr.type &asm.mbr.parametername &rpt.index &rpt.level &rpt.qty Definition Displays the name of an assembly member. Displays the type (part or assembly) of an assembly member. Displays the value of “parametername” (a user-defined parameter) for an assembly member. Ex: cost or vendor Displays the index number assigned to each record in a repeat region. Displays the recursive depth of an item. Displays the quantity of an item.

• • •

To create a simple repeat region, you would specify the parameters, as shown in the following figure.

INDEX
rpt.index

NAME
asm.mbr.name

QTY
rpt.qty

Figure 2: Entering Parameters for a Simple Repeat Region

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-3

NOTES

Updating the Table
When you finish entering the report symbols, you need to update the table. The system will extract information from the models and populate the cells of the repeat region.

Manipulating a BOM Report
When you create a BOM using Pro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER uses default values for many of the attributes to create the initial table, but you can change them later to manipulate the format of the table. After creating the table, you can make the following modifications to the listing to suit your needs:

Controlling Duplicated Components
If a component is used multiple times in an assembly, you can use the repeat region attributes to control the display of duplicated components: • • – The system creates a row for every instance of a component. This is the system default.
Duplicates No Duplicates – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component only once. Therefore, even if the assembly has eight bolts, that component only appears once in the table. No Duplicates/Level – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component once for each subassembly in which you use it. Therefore, if you use a bolt in two different subassemblies, that component appears twice in the table.

Pag e 1 6- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 3: Bill of Materials for Example Assembly

Controlling the Levels Searched for Components
When there are more than one level in the assembly, you can use the repeat region attributes to control the search level. •
Flat

– When you initially create the table, only the top-level components appear because the default attribute of a repeat region

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-5

NOTES

prevents Pro/ENGINEER from searching through lower levels as shown in the following figure. •
Recursive

– It allow the system to search all levels of the assembly.

You can also specify the Flat and Recursive attributes for individual subassemblies.

Figure 4: Region Attributes

Changing the Order of the List
Once the system has filled the table, you can change the order in which it displays the components by sorting. You can sort the table by one or more parameters, moving forward or backward in order. For example, you could display components by type, and then sort alphabetically by part name when the two components are of the same type.

Removing Components from the List
If you want to omit components or certain types of component from the BOM, you can set up a filter so that the system automatically removes those items from the listing.

Pag e 1 6- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• •

By Item

– To remove a component from the BOM, you can simply select that record to remove. – Setup a rule to remove multiple entries from the BOM. For example, remove all components composed of the material steel, you could set up a rule to check for the material.

By Rule

Using Operators to Set Up a Rule
To set up a rule, you use the comparison operators <, >, <=, >=, = =, and != to compare the parameters of the filter. If a record in the table does not satisfy the filter equation, the system removes it from the table. For example, if you added the filter “&asm.mbr.type = = part”, the system would only show parts in the table. If you added the filter “&asm.mbr.material != steel,” the system would remove steel components from the table. You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you added the filter “&ASM.MBR.NAME = = PART_A, PART_B, PART_J”, only those three parts would appear in the table.

Using Repeat Region Relations
Using the repeat region relations, you can show correct quantity for the bulk items, calculate total cost etc.

Showing the Correct Quantity
When you include the quantity of a component in a repeat region, Pro/ENGINEER counts how many times a certain file is used in an assembly. For example, if BOLT.PRT is used in an assembly four times, the system would assign it a quantity of 4. This would be acceptable if none of the components in the assembly are bulk items. Bulk items are components that are created within an assembly to “fill out” the BOM (such as glue, paint, and sealant). It is the placeholder, and doesn’t have any geometry. The system saves a bulk item to a file with a .PRT extension and assembles it once, assigning it a quantity of 1 in the BOM. However, many bulk items should have a quantity such as AS REQUIRED. You can create a relation to display the correct quantity. The procedures are as follow:

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-7

NOTES

• •

Enter report symbol &rpt.rel.qty. When entering using the menu, click rpt > rel > User Defined and enter [qty] as the parameter name. Create the repeat region relation, shown in the following figure.

if asm_mbr_type = = ”BULK ITEM” Qty = ”AS REQUIRED” Else Qty = rpt_qty Endif Figure 5: Quantity Relation for a Bulk Item

By incorporating this relation into the drawing, the system assigns all bulk items a quantity of AS REQUIRED, and assigns the appropriate quantity to each component.

Calculating a Total Cost
A BOM report may contain a cost and quantity for each component. You can write a relation to calculate the total cost for each component. The procedures are as follow: • • In the table, use &ASM.REL.TCOST as the report parameter in the column for total cost of each component. Create the repeat region relation, as shown in the following figure.

if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulk item” tcost = 0.0 Else Tcost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty Endif Figure 6: Cost Calculations

The system will calculate the total cost and fill in the cells in the following figure.

Pag e 1 6- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 7: Relation Added to Define Cost

Creating a Summation
To calculate the total cost of the entire assembly, you could create a summation of the total costs of each component by specifying the particular column to sum and a name for the summation parameter.

Figure 8: Summing the Cost

Pagination
If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page, or you can create a new segment on the same page. As you add more information to the table, the system flows it into the next segment and adds more sheets as necessary. You can also repeat the header information from the original table on the next page.

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-9

NOTES

Showing BOM Balloons
Once you have completed the table, you can show BOM balloons on the drawing, as shown in the following figure. The balloons update if you change the assembly, add components, or remove them.

Figure 9: Examples of Simple and With Quantity Balloons

Creating Custom Balloons
The default shape for a BOM balloon is a circle. To specify a different shape, you can create a custom balloon, which is simply a drawing symbol that contains variable text. To show the quantity or index number of a component in a custom balloon, set the default value of the variable text to RPT_INDEX or RPT_QTY, respectively. Any report symbol displayed in the repeat region can be included parametrically in the custom balloons.

Pag e 1 6- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that control repeat regions and BOMs in reports.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Repeat Regions and BOMs Option Value Definition Sets the default arrow style for BOM balloons in new reports. def_bom_balloon_leader_s arrowhead ym dot filled_dot no_arrow slash integral box filled_box max_balloon_radius 0 non-zero value min_balloon_radius 0 non-zero value Sets the maximum allowable balloon radius. If set to “0,” balloon radius depends only on text size. Sets the minimum allowable balloon radius. If set to “0,” balloon radius depends only on text size.

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of Materials in a drawing.

Method
In this exercise, you create a simple repeat region to automate a Bill of Materials (BOM) so that the system automatically reflects changes to the assembly information. You also change the appearance of the BOM by modifying the repeat region attributes.

EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM
Task 1. Retrieve the drawing and add the
C_MULTI_FORMAT_COMPLETED.FRM format.

1. Retrieve BARREL_ASM.DRW. 2. Click Sheets> Format > Add/Replace . 3. Use the LOOK IN drop down list, browse to the current working directory.(Fund_draw_320 directory) 4. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT_COMPLETED.FRM and click Open . Type [1] as the sheet number. 5. Enter the parameter values as shown in the following table. (These values have effect on the following tasks, so you don’t have to be exact.)
Table 3: Parameter values for the format

Parameter
Drw_num Fscm_num Approved_by_date Approved_by Checked_by_date Checked_by Drawn_by_date

Value
11473 2172 TBD TBD 5/14/01 JOE CHECKER 5/7/01

Pag e 1 6- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 2. Create a table to display the Bill of Materials for the drawing. Include columns for the part name, type, quantity, cost, and total cost. 1. Create a table for the BOM on the drawing. Click Table > Create > Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars . Select the lower right corner of the table as shown in the following figure.
Locate lower right corner of the table here

Figure 10: Table Location

2. Create six columns in this table. ! Using the mouse, select immediately after the 6 for the first column, ! Immediately after the 5 for the second column, ! Immediately after the 4 for the third column, ! Immediately after the second 2 (12) for the fourth column, ! Immediately after the third 5 (25) for the fifth column, ! Immediately after the first 5 for the final column. 3. Create three rows in this table. Select immediately after the 2 for the first row, and immediately after the 1 for the second and third rows. Press middle mouse button to finish. 4. Define the justification of the columns. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Center > Middle . Select all six columns in the table. 5. Add text into the header of the table. Click Enter Text , select the lower left cell, and type [ITEM]. Select the next cell and type

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-13

NOTES

[NAME]. Continue entering the text [TYPE] [QTY] [COST] as shown in the following figure.

Figure 11: Table Header

6. Enter [TOTAL COST] in one line, then use Wrap Text to fit the cell. 7. Select the row. 8. Right click and select WRAP ROW. The table should appear as in the preceding figure. 9. Justify the NAME column. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column > Left > Middle , then select the NAME column. The system maintains the center justification of the existing header, but left-justifies any new text. Task 3. Create a simple repeat region for the information in the BOM and define the parameters to display. 1. Click Repeat Region > Add > Simple, then select the cell above ITEM and the cell above TOTAL COST. 2. Click Enter Text > Report Sym . 3. Select the cell above ITEM and click rpt… > index. 4. Select the cell above NAME and click asm…> mbr… > name . 5. Select the cell above TYPE and click asm… > mbr… > type . 6. Select the cell above QTY and click rpt… > qty. 7. Select the cell above COST and click asm… > mbr… > User Defined , then enter [cost]. 8. Select the cell above TOTAL COST and click rpt… > rel… > User Defined , then enter [total_cost]. 9. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 1 6- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 12: Initial BOM

Task 4. Change the attributes of the repeat region to modify the BOM display. Components should appear only once in the table and all parts should be included in the BOM, regardless of the level at which they reside. 1. Notice the piston assembly displays in the table five times. 2. Click Attributes and select the repeat region in the table. Click No Duplicates > Done/Return The following figure shows the new table configuration.

Figure 13: No Duplicates

3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to include all levels of the assembly. Click Attributes and select the repeat region in the table. Click Recursive > Done/Return .

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-15

NOTES

Figure 14: Recursive

Task 5. Change the information for the total cost column. Create a relation to calculate cost and total cost values. The total cost is based on the quantity and cost values. 1. Click Relations from the Tbl regions menu and select the repeat region. Click Add and type [total_cost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty]. 2. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should display as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15: Total Cost

3. Click Enter Text > Keyboard , then select the cell above COST. 4. Type [&asm.mbr.cost[.2]] to cause the number to display two significant digits.

Pag e 1 6- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

5. Select the cell above TOTAL COST and type [&rpt.rel.total_cost[.2]]. Click Done/Return . 6. Define a cost value for the barrel part. Click Edit > Value and select the cell in the COST column for the barrel part. Enter [8.75] as the value. 7. Click Table > Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should display as shown in the following figure.

Figure 16: Number of Digits for Cost

Task 6. Create a summation for the number of components in the assembly. 1. Click Summation and select the repeat region. 2. Click Add and select the QTY seed cell in the region. 3. Type [assy_qty] as the parameter name.

4. Select the empty cell at the top of the QTY column to place the summation value. 5. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . Task 7. Remove the names of assembly components from the table, as shown in the following figure. 1. Click Filters and select the repeat region. 2. Click By Rule > Add , then type [&asm.mbr.type != assembly].

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-17

NOTES

3. Click Done > Done/Return .

Figure 17: Assemblies Filtered Out

Task 8. Create a summation for the total cost of the assembly and set the decimal precision to two. 1. Click Summation and select the repeat region. 2. Click Add and select the seed cell for the barrel in the TOTAL COST column of the region. 3. Type [assy_cost] as the parameter name. 4. Select the cell at the top of the TOTAL_COST column to place the summation value. Update the table. 5. Change the format for the cost. Click Format > Decimal Places . Enter [2] as the number of digits. 6. Select the assembly total cost value and click Done Sel . Task 9. Combine the upper left cells and add a header for TOTALS.

1. Click Table > Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols . 2. Select the upper left cell in the table and the cell directly to the left of the total quantity. 3. Click Enter Text and select the new cell. 4. Type [TOTALS] as the cell text. The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 1 6- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 18: Total Cost

Task 10. Explore the associativity of the BOM by suppressing the pump head part. Use Fix Index to fix the ITEM numbers when you add or suppress components. 1. Retrieve BARREL.ASM. 2. Click Component > Suppress , then select the pump head. Click Done Sel >Done . 3. Click Window > BARREL_ASM.DRW . Notice that the pump head is no longer in the BOM and the numbers in the ITEM column have changed. If you delete a component from the assembly, you may not want the item numbers of components later in the table to change. 4. Click Window > BARREL.ASM . 5. Resume the pump head part. Click Component > Resume > All > Done . 6. Set the drawing BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window. 7. Change the table so that the deletion or suppression of a component does not affect the existing item numbers. Click Table > Repeat Region > Fix Index , then select the repeat region. Click Fix > Region > Confirm > Done . 8. Set the BARREL.ASM as the active window and suppress the pump head again. 9. Set the BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window. Notice that the item numbers did not change this time.

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-19

NOTES

10. Unfix the region. Click Table > Repeat Region > Fix Index , then select the repeat region. Click Unfix > Region > Confirm > Done . 11. Set the BARREL>ASM active and resume the pump head. 12. Close the assembly window and set BARREL_ASM>DRW active. Task 11. Add BOM balloons to the drawing that include the quantity. 1. Click Table > BOM Balloon > Set Region > With Qty, then select the region. 2. Click Show > By View , then select the 3-D view of the assembly. 3. Reposition the balloons appropriately and change the attachment [Select] and select a balloon to move. locations. Click 4. Modify the attachment point of a balloon. Right-click to bring up the pop menu. 5. Click Same Ref to move the arrow to a new position on the same reference. 6. Click Change Ref to change the reference to which the balloon is attached. Notice that you can not change the reference to a different component. 7. Merge the balloons for the inner and outer races and the bearing spacer, as shown in the following figure. Click Table > BOM Balloon > Merge . 8. Select the balloon for the inner race and then select the balloon for the bearing spacer. Use the MODEL TREE to identify the component as necessary. Repeat this step to merge the balloon for the outer race with the bearing spacer balloon.

Pag e 1 6- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 19: Balloon Locations

9. Split the balloon for the pistons to create two balloons. Click Split and select the balloon for the pistons. Type [2] as the amount and attach the balloon to one of the other pistons. Locate the balloon toward the right side of the view. 10. Change the amounts in the balloons for the pistons. Click Redistribute and select the original balloon for the piston. Enter [1] as the amount to redistribute and select the new balloon. Task 12. Change the type of balloon for the barrel part and the head plate. 1. Click Alt Symbol and select the balloons for the barrel part and the head plate. 2. Click Done Sel > Retrieve > DELTA_BOM.SYM .

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-21

NOTES

Figure 20: Custom Symbol

3. Save the drawing and close the window.

Pag e 1 6- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can create a table with repeat regions to create an automatic BOM. You can change the attributes of the repeat region. You can add BOM balloons to the drawing.

C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls

Pag e 1 6-23

Module

17
Family Tables
In this module, you learn how to create a family table of parts and manipulate it in a drawing.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create a family table of parts. Place a parts catalog table on a drawing. Replace one instance on drawing with another.

Page 17-1

NOTES

ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES
Using family tables is the most effective way to create a parts library in Pro/ENGINEER.

Saving Space with Instances
A family table has only one part file with a table of information about variations of the generic part, referred to as instances. The information in the table pertains to dimension values, parameter values, and features included on the instances.

Reducing Development Time
By using a family table, you can build just one part and then edit a table of information to create multiple variations of the part. By inputting values for different sizes and configurations, you can build parts quickly.

CREATING A FAMILY TABLE
To create a family table successfully, you should follow four basic steps • • • • Create the generic part. Specify items for the table to drive. Create new instances. Verify the instances.

Creating the Generic Part
The first step is to create a generic part that includes every feature that exists on any instance, as shown in the following figure. Because some variations may not have the same features as the other variations, all features must exist on the generic model.

Pag e 1 7- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 1: Generic Bolt Part

Specifying Items for the Table to Drive
After creating the generic model, you should identify the items which will vary from one instance to another, such as dimensions, parameters, features, and components (for an assembly family table).

Creating New Instances
You can add new instances to the table by adding more rows to the table, or by patterning one of the existing instances, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2: Adding Instances

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7- 3

NOTES

Adding Entries to the Table
Each row of the table represents a new instance. When adding entries to the bottom of the table, keep in mind the following: • • •
You must assign every instance a unique name .

If the generic model changes, the value for the instance updates as well.
You can lock an instance . You can lock an instance of a family table to prevent other uses from modifying table-driven characteristics of the instance.

You can use an “*” to use the default value .

Patterning an Instance
By patterning an existing instance, you can automatically create instances with parameters that grow incrementally. The system considers the instance you select for patterning as a seed that it can use to generate new family table members. You can pattern an instance in several directions to vary multiple parameters.

Figure 3: Generating Instances using Patternize

Pag e 1 7- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances
You should verify that each model instance is valid automatically. The system regenerates each instance behind the scenes, and reports whether each instance regenerated successfully or failed.

Retrieving an Instance
When you select a generic model to retrieve into Pro/ENGINEER, you can select the generic model itself to open or one of the instances. You can choose an instance by name or based off of the values of the parameters in the table.

USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE
• • • You can create a drawing of the generic model or one of its instances. Specifically, you can create the following types of drawings: One drawing of the generic model that shows a part catalog A separate drawing for each instance

Creating a Parts Catalog
For library parts, you may want to create a drawing of the generic models and show a table of the different instances in the family table. You can accomplish this by creating a drawing of the generic model, and using Pro/REPORT to automatically create a table using the information in the family table. To create a parts catalog in Pro/ENGINEER, you should follow these three steps: • • • Create a table. Define a 2-D repeat region. Define the information to include.

Naming the Features and Dimensions
By default, all dimensions have a symbolic name similar to d2, d10, d105, and so on. Also, features have default names such F55, F1032, etc. These default feature names will be the column headers in your table unless you specifically change them to more meaningful values.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7- 5

NOTES

Creating a Table
Create the table as described in Tables chapters. You typically need a table with two rows and two columns.

Defining a 2-D Repeat Region
For a parts catalog, you create a 2-D repeat region—one that grows in two directions, horizontally and vertically. To create a 2-D region, you must define the extent of the region, that is, the area of information that you want the system to duplicate. For a parts catalog, you should make three selections, as shown in the following figure.
Select this cell second Select this cell first Select this cell third Figure 4: 2-D Repeat Region

Defining the Information to Include
After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to define the information that you want the system to include in the table. The following table lists some of the Pro/REPORT system parameters that you can use to create a parts catalog.
Table 1: Pro/REPORT Parameters for a Parts Catalog Parameter Name &fam.inst.name &fam.inst.parametername &fam.inst.param.value &fam.inst.param.id Definition Displays the name of a family table instance. Displays the name of a family table parameter. Displays the value of a family table parameter for an instance. Displays the ID of a family table parameter if it is a dimension.

To complete the 2-D repeat region shown in the following figure, you would enter three parameters, as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 1 7- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

fam.inst.param.name fam.inst.name fam.inst.param.value Figure 5: Adding Report Symbols

After you update the table, the system automatically fills in the cells with the family table information, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6: Initial Table

Preventing Information from Displaying
To prevent certain information from displaying in the parts catalog, you can set up a filter to remove particular columns from the listing. The following figure shows the initial with the bolt_dia column filtered using the filter &fam.inst.param.name != bolt_dia.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7- 7

NOTES

Figure 7: Bolt Diameter Filtered from Table

You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you add the filter &fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_length,bolt_dia, the system would remove the columns for bolt_length and bolt_dia from the table.

Manipulating the Format
When you create a parts catalog using Pro/REPORT, the table may not appear in the exact format that you would like. • • You can sort the table to change the order of the rows or continue the table on the next page, if necessary. If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page. You can also create a new segment on the same page. Note:
Pagination only works for rows If the columns grow off the page, you cannot paginate it to add segment or continue to the next page.

Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance
You may need a separate drawing for every instance in the family table. If your company requires individual tables, the quickest way to create them

Pag e 1 7- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

is to complete a drawing and use it to create other drawings. To do this, you can follow the following three steps: • • • Create the seed drawing. Replace the original model with another instance from the family table. Save a copy of the existing drawing to another name.

Creating the Original Seed Drawing
You can create the original seed drawing from the generic model or any of the instances, but you should fully detail it with any necessary dimensions, notes, and special views, such as detailed views as shown in the following figure.

Figure 8: Drawing of Generic Bolt

Replacing the Original Model
Once you have completed the seed drawing, you can replace the model with another instance because the models all belong to the same family table. When you replace a model on a drawing, any dimensions or parameters on the drawing update to the new values based on the family table. The following figure shows the generic bolt drawing after replacing the model with another instance.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7- 9

NOTES

Figure 9: Example of Replacing a Model on a Drawing with Details Preserved

You may have to modify the drawing of the new model by adding sheets, creating new views, and creating new notes. In addition, you may also have to make the following changes: • • •
Reposition views . If the models differed in size significantly, you may have to move the views or change the scale of the drawing. Remove views .

Some views may now be unnecessary.

Show new dimensions . If some of the dimensions of the new model do not appear on the drawing because the feature to which the dimensions belong does not exist on the original model, you may have to show these new dimensions.

Save a Copy of the Existing Drawing to Another Name
After making any necessary modifications to clean up the appearance of the drawing, you must save it as a new drawing. When Pro/ENGINEER asks you to specify a new name for the drawing, type in a name that is unique throughout the database. The system then creates a new drawing file on the hard drive with the new instance as its model. If you follow this process for each instance in the family table, you can create a separate drawing file for each of the instances.

Pag e 1 7- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use to control the display of 2-D repeat regions.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Repeat Regions Option dash_supp_dims_in_ region no yes Value Definition Controls the display of dimension values in Pro/REPORT table repeat regions. If set to “no,'' displays the values in Pro/REPORT table repeat regions. If set to ”yes,'' suppresses the dimension and displays a dash instead. Controls the display of the number of digits 2-D repeat regions. If set to “yes,'' 2-D repeat regions reflect the number of digits of part and assembly model dimensions.

model_digits_in_region

yes no

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create a family table of parts and use them in drawings.

Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create a family table that includes dimensions, parameters, and features. You create instances by manually typing in the information and by patterning an existing instance. In the second exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a generic model and create a table that reflects the family table information automatically. You also manipulate the table display. In the third exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a family table instance. You then replace the current instance with a different instance and create a copy of the drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table
Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table part and create a new chamfer on the model. 1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. 2. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer > 45 x d and type [.1] as the “d” dimension. 3. Select the both of the split circular edges of the center hole on the side towards you in the default view. 4. Click Done Sel > Done Refs . Click Preview > OK to finish the feature. 5. Change the name of the chamfer feature by clicking Set Up > Name and select the chamfer. 6. Enter [HOLE_CHAMFER] as the name. Click Done .
Pag e 1 7- 1 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 10: Chamfer Created

Task 2. Create a family table for the barrel part that includes the diameter of the barrel, the diameter of the patterned holes, and the bolt circle diameter. 1. Click Family Tab . The Family Table editor appears. 2. Click [Add/delete table columns]. Accept the default ADD ITEM type, Dimensions . 3. Click Query Sel , select the outer surface of the barrel. Click
Accept.

4. Select BARREL_DIA. 5. Select one of the holes and select the CYLINDER_DIA and CENTERLINE_DIA dimensions. Click Done Sel . 6. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, select Feature as the ADD ITEM type, select the chamfer, and click OK .

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-13

NOTES

Figure 11: Identifying the Items to Vary

Task 3. Add some new instances to the family table by editing the table and by patterning an instance of the table. After adding the instances, make sure that they regenerate successfully. 1. Add instances to the family table by clicking instance] twice. 2. Edit the data as shown in the following figure. [Insert a new

Figure 12: Add Instances to the Table

Task 4.

Create new instances of the barrel by patterning B_400_80_25. [Patternize].

1. Select B_400_80_25 and click

2. Type [3] as the QUANTITY for the first direction.

Pag e 1 7- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. In the ITEMS area, select BARREL_DIA, click [.25] as the increment followed by <ENTER>. 4. In the ITEMS area, select CYLINDER_DIA, click type [.10] as the increment followed by <ENTER>.

[Add] and type

[Add] and

[Add direction] to specify a dimension for the second 5. Click direction. 6. Type [2] as the QUANTITY for the second direction. 7. Select CENTERLINE_DIA, click increment followed by <ENTER>. 8. Click OK to finish the pattern. Task 5. Remove the duplicate instance from the table and change the names of the other instances in the family table. 1. Select the B_400_80_250, right-click and select Delete Rows . 2. Modify the family table so that it appears as shown in the following figure. Change the names of the instances and the values for the chamfer column. Change other cells if necessary. [Add] and type [.2] as the

Figure 13: Patterned Family Table

3. Click [Verify instances] > Verify to determine if the instances can be regenerated.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-15

NOTES

4. The system verifies the validity of each instance and displays the status in the dialog box. Review the status, and then select the CLOSE button in the dialog box. 5. Click OK to exit the table. Task 6. Create a parameter for the cost and add it to the table. Assign the proper values to all of the instances. 1. Click Setup > Parameters > Part > Create > Real Number . 2. Type [cost] as the name of the parameter and [10.95] as the value of the parameter, then click Done . 3. Click Family Tab > [Insert a new instance].

4. In the ADD ITEMS area, select Parameter , check Cost and click Done Sel . Click OK. 5. Change the values in the cost column to those shown in the following figure.

Figure 14: Cost Parameter

6. Click OK . 7. Save and close the window.

Pag e 1 7- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 7. Retrieve some instances into the family table. Retrieve one instance by selecting its name and retrieve another by selecting its value. 1. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. Select instance B_425_90_27 and click Open . 2. Close the window. 3. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. 4. Retrieve the instance that does not have the chamfer and has a barrel diameter of 4.25. 5. Click the By Parameter tab. 6. Select d2, BARREL_DIA, and 4.25. The number of instances in the bottom of the window decreases. 7. Select F740,HOLE_CHAMFER > N. The number of instances that satisfy these values should decrease to one, B_425_90_25. Click Open . 8. Close the current window.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-17

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing
Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table drawing and create a table in which to display the family table information. 1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.DRW. 2. Click Table > Create . 3. Click Descending > Rightward > By Num Chars . Locate the upper left corner of the table to the right of the detailed view. 4. Specify the width of the first column as 13 units, and the second column as 15 units. 5. Make the height of the first row 2 units, and the height of the second row 1 unit. The table should appear as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15: Initial Table

Task 2. Set up the columns of the table with left and middle justification. Create a 2-D repeat region and define the information to include in the table. 1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column . 2. Click Center > Middle . Select both columns of the table to set the justification. 3. Click Repeat Region > Add > Two-D . Select the cells as shown in the following figure.

Select this cell second Select this cell first Select this cell third Figure 16: Repeat Region Creation

Pag e 1 7- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

4. Click Enter Text > Reprt Sym and select the upper right cell of the table. 5. Click fam... > inst...> param… > name . 6. Select the lower left table cell and click fam... > inst... > name . 7. Select the lower right table cell and click fam...> inst...> param… > value . 8. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should look like the one shown in the following figure.

Figure 17: Family Table

Task 3. Change the order of the columns in the table to reflect the column order of the original family table, as shown in the following figure. 1. Click Sort Regions , then select the region of the table. 2. Click the No Default check box and click Done . The columns are ordered as they are in the Family Table editor.

Figure 18: Sorting the Region

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-19

NOTES

Task 4. Retrieve the barrel family table part and add a new instance to the table. Return to the drawing and notice that the table automatically includes the new information. 1. Retrieve the generic BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. 2. Click Family Tab > [Insert a new instance].

3. Set the values shown in the following table.

Table 3: Values for New Instance
Column Value

Name BARREL_DIA CYLINDER_DIA CENTERLINE_DIA HOLE_CHAMFER COST

B_475_110_25 4.75 1.10 2.5 N 15.00

4. Exit from the table. 5. Close the part window and activate the drawing window. 6. The system may have already updated the table to include the new instance. If it does not display the new instance, click Regenerate > Draft . 7. Save and quit the drawing.

Pag e 1 7- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each Instance
Task 1. Retrieve the bolt drawing and replace the current family table instance with a new instance. Clean up the display of the drawing and create a copy of it for this new instance. 1. Retrieve BOLT_REPLACE.DRW. 2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Replace . 3. Select B_5_20 as the instance to retrieve and click Open . 4. Delete DETAIL 1 from the drawing since there is no chamfer in this instance. Click Views > Delete View and select DETAIL 1 followed by Confirm . 5. Copy the drawing to a new name. Click File > Save a Copy. Enter [B_5_20] as the name of the new drawing and click OK . Task 2. Replace the model of this drawing with another instance.

1. Repeat this process and create new drawings for the instances B_5_20_C. 2. Do not delete the detailed view of the chamfer. 3. Save the drawing as B_5_20_C.DRW.

F a m i l y T a b le s

Pag e 1 7-21

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can create a family table of parts. You can create a parts catalog. You can create a drawing table with a 2-D repeat region.

Pag e 1 7- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

18
Working with Large Drawings
In this module, you learn how to work with large drawings

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Reduce the amount of information displayed on a drawing. Control when a view is regenerated. Limit the number of files that must be retrieved to display a drawing.

Page 18-1

NOTES

MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS
You can define a large drawing in several ways. The term large can be relative, since hardware platforms perform at different levels; however, you can generally classify any of the following as large drawings: • • • A drawing of a part model that is highly complex. A drawing of an assembly that has multiple components. A drawing that consists of a large number of views and sheets.

Working with large assemblies places a greater burden on your system than working with a small assembly or part. Likewise, working with a drawing of a large assembly can place an even greater load on your system. This is due to the fact that most drawings have multiple views that the system must update for hidden line removal, component placement, and so on. Even assemblies, which are not large by your definition may become unacceptably slow once a certain number of sheets and views is reached.

Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration Process
There are many techniques one can implement to improve the performance of large drawings. Prior to choosing a technique, it is important to understand the steps the system performs when a drawing is retrieved and regenerated.

Drawing Retrieval
When you open a drawing, the system will first, load the associated models into memory (RAM), then regenerate all the views on the drawing, at last, display the image on the screen.

Drawing Model Regeneration
When the model of the drawing is changed and regenerate, the system will perform similar operations. For example, when dimensions are modified and regenerated in drawing, the system will first regenerate the model, then regenerate the views on the drawing and display the image on the screen. The following can potentially slow down the system:

Pag e 1 8- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

• • • •

Drawing model retrieval Drawing model regeneration Drawing view regeneration Drawing image display time(repaint time)

Each of the available techniques may target one of the aspects listed above, and it is recommended to estimate which step is impacting performance the most and implement solutions to improve that area.

APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT
In general, you can use the following methods to improve your drawing performance: • • • • • Use the system configuration settings to optimize the modeling environment for use with large drawings. Using various techniques to remove detail from regeneration and display that is not necessary at that specific time. Using drawing reps to reduce retrieval, regeneration and display time. Develop each sheet of the drawing as a separate drawing file, and merge them together when all of the sheets are completed. Create a simplified representation of the model and base the drawing off of this configuration.

The remaining sections of this summary document will discuss each of these approaches in greater detail.

Reducing the Repaint Time
When retrieving a drawing of a large assembly, the time it takes to display the datum, such as datum planes and coordinate system, in a large drawing can result in deteriorating performance.

Turning off the Datum Display
By globally turning off datum, you can greatly reduce the repaint time. If you turn off the display before retrieve the drawing, you can reduce the initial display time when retrieving the drawing. The following configuration file options control the datum plane display.

Wo rk i n g w i t h L a rg e D ra w i n g s

Pag e 1 8- 3

NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Option display_plane display_plane_tags Value yes* no yes* no Controls datum plane nametag display. Definition Controls datum plane display.

Similar configuration file options for other types of datum are also available.

Using Layers to Selectively Display Information
If some datum is needed in drawing manipulation, you should use layers to selectively display the necessary datum instead of displaying them all together. You can use the following configuration file option to control the layer display before the drawing retrieval.
Table 2: Configuration File Options Option display_layer Value Layer id Definition This causes the specified layer to display when you begin a Pro/Engineer session.

Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time
In Drawing mode, the amount of time it takes to generate the graphic information for display depends on the complexity of the model, the complexity of each view and the number of views.

Control the Number of View to Regenerate
You can specify the desired view to regenerate, or erase the views you are not currently working on.
Specify Which View to Regenerate

By default, the system automatically regenerates all the views on all the sheets on your drawing when you perform certain operations such as regenerating the model, switching sheets, and changing the active window. You can change the configuration file option listed in the following table to prevent the system from automatically regenerating your entire drawing.

Pag e 1 8- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 3: Configuration File Options Option auto_regen_view Value yes* no Definition Control whether the system automatically regenerates the display of your drawing when switching window.

If you set the value to no, you can then selectively update specified views, current sheet or the entire drawing. Using this method, you can update the views that are relevant to your current task without having to take the time to regenerate every other view as well.
Erasing Views

You can temporarily remove the views that you do not need by erasing them from the drawing. This not only allows you to focus on the current task, but also reduces the repaint time and view regeneration time. You can resume the erased views at any time to perform general review. By saving the drawing with erased views, retrieval time will also decrease.

Reduce the Regeneration Time of a Specific View
There are numerous techniques to reduce the view regeneration time. You can perform Z-Clipping to remove redundant background geometry, use Area Cross Section, and use configuration file options to further reduce view regeneration time.
Z-Clipping

As mentioned in an earlier chapter, Z-Clipping will allow you to display only the geometry in front of a plane and will ignore all geometry behind it. Essentially, this will: • • Terminate hidden line removal computations at the Z-Clip location. Terminate the displaying of any geometry from the Z-Clip location.

Wo rk i n g w i t h L a rg e D ra w i n g s

Pag e 1 8- 5

NOTES

Figure 1: Front and Side Views

For example, when looking at the front view of the vehicle as shown on the left in the preceding figure, it is not necessary for the system to regenerate any geometry beyond the vehicle center.
Using Area Cross-Section

Cross sectional views require additional system resources in order to: • • • • Determine which components are intersected by the cutting plane. Determine which geometry is in front of the cutting plane in the desired view and eliminate it. Determine which geometry is behind the cutting plane and how it is impacted by display settings such as Hidden Line or No Hidden. Determine cross hatch setting for each model intersected by the cutting plane.

In some cases, an area cross section can be used instead of the default total cross section to improve performance and clarity. With an Area Cross Section, only the geometry intersected by the cutting plane is displayed, preventing the system from calculating the geometry in front of and back of the cutting plane. This type of section may not be appropriate where display of components behind the cutting plane is desired, but can certainly be employed as a temporary, in-process solution.
Configuration File Settings

Using the configuration file options listed in the following table, you can further reduce the view regeneration time.

Pag e 1 8- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Table 4: Configuration File Options Option display_in_adding_view Value default* wireframe minimal_wireframe display_trimetric_dwg_ mode_view yes* no Definition Controls the display of a view when you first place it on the drawing when “auto_regen_views” is set to “no.” Determines if a model is displayed in default orientation when placing a general view on a drawing. When set to “no,” the system does not display a model until you select default. Displays all views in wireframe regardless of the set display. Set to “no” prevents system from calculating and displaying tangencies Set to “no” prevents system from calculating and displaying silhouette edges Decreases tessellation of edges which will speed up display Controls whether the system retains the display of an object that is still in RAM. When set to “yes,” results in faster display of a sheet when switching sheets of a drawing.

force_wireframe_in_ drawings tangent_edge_display

no yes solid* no

display_silhouette_edges

yes* no

edge_display_quality retain_display_memory

normal* low yes* no

Wo rk i n g w i t h L a rg e D ra w i n g s

Pag e 1 8- 7

NOTES

Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time
Using the configuration file options listed in the following table, you can save time when retrieving the drawing as well as when saving and printing the drawing.
Table 5: Configuration File Options Option save_display no* yes save_modified_draw_ models_only interface_quality yes* no 0* Value Definition Controls whether the system saves the display of an object on the screen when it saves the object. When set to “yes”, stores the drawing without storing its model if the model has not changed. Determines the amount of work performed when checking for overlapping lines for pen plotters Stores files in a compressed format. Compressed files are slower to read and write.

compress_output_files

no* yes

View Only Retrieval
One of the most effective ways to reduce the drawing retrieval time is to retrieve the drawing as view only. You can significantly reduce retrieval time by retrieving a drawing in view-only mode because the system does not retrieve any of its associated models. This method is most useful for browsing or plotting out a drawing. If you decide to modify the drawing after viewing it, you can retrieve the models at any time. In order to use the view-only retrieve method, you need to save the display from the Pro/ENGINEER interface or using the configuration file options listed in the previous table.

Implementing the Large Drawing Configuration File Settings
Use the configuration file settings in the previous tables is one of the easiest and the most effective way to handle the large amount of data in an efficient manner.

Pag e 1 8- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

These settings do not need to be in effect at all time. In fact, the users might want to toggle these setting on and off many times during the day. It is recommended that you implement the configuration files in the following steps: • Create two configuration files: ! Large_draw_on.pro – Sets the modeling environment for working with large drawings. ! Large_draw_off.pro – Disables the large drawing settings and returns each of them to your company's standard setting. • Create mapkeys or custom menu selections that will read each of these files in.

Drawing Rep Tool
A drawing representation is a series of commands that specify a display configuration for the current drawing. Using drawing representations, you can improve drawing retrieval performance and minimize display calculations such as view regeneration and repaint time. There are two default reps that display all views and display no views. You can create customized reps using the following commands:

View Display
Using VIEW DISPLAY commands, you can control following: • • • Which views of a drawing the system retrieves and displays. Which sheets of a drawing the system retrieves and displays. Which models the retrieves and displays.

For example, in a multi-model drawing, you can temporarily remove all models and views that are not necessary for current work.

Drawing Display
Using DRAWING DISPLAY commands, you can control following: • • Display a particular drawing sheet. Display a particular zoom state.
Pag e 1 8- 9

Wo rk i n g w i t h L a rg e D ra w i n g s

NOTES

• •

Fit the screen with a particular view. Control whether to update the drawing tables.

Figure 2: The Two Tabs of the Drawing Rep Tools

Open a Drawing Rep
You can open the default reps or any customized reps of a drawing. You can also create a new drawing rep at the time of retrieval.

Merging Drawings
Using the Merge command, you can combine two drawings together. Merging allows for: • • – The individual drawing files will retrieve faster than the multi-sheet drawing would have.
Increased Performance Parallel Development Efforts

– Several users can develop portions of a multi-sheet and/or multi-model drawing as separate drawings in parallel and then merge their separate drawings into a single drawing file.

Pag e 1 8- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

When merging two drawings, a source file is appended to the target file as additional sheets. Models that are used by the source drawing are added automatically to the target drawing during the merge. In this case, the resulting drawing will be a multi-model drawing.

Model Simplification
Using simplified representations, you can limit the components that the system retrieves and displays on the screen. This method allows you to retrieve and display only those components that you need for the current operation, thereby reducing the amount of time the system requires to retrieve, regenerate, and repaint your drawings.

Note:
This technique is targeted at the first stage of drawing retrieval: reducing the number of models retrieved into memory.

Figure 3: Master and Simplified Versions of a Transmission Assembly

Tip!
Create a simplified rep with only a few models in it and use this to place all of your views.

Geometry Representations
A geometry representation requires less time to retrieve than the actual part because the system does not retrieve any of the parametric

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-11

NOTES

information, only the geometry. Although these versions of the part are non-modifiable, you can still extract valuable information such as Mass Properties and show dimensions on drawings.

Note:
It is recommended to base your large drawing on a Simplified Representation where most of the models are displayed as the Geometry Rep.

User Defined Representations
You will typically create your own simplified representation for use in drawing mode. With this rep you can: • • • Exclude components that do not need to be seen. Set models to Geometry Rep that need to be displayed, but will not require modification from the drawing. Substitute detailed parts and sub-assemblies with placeholder parts to represent the volume of that component or subsystem and reduce the detail represented.

Figure 4: Assembly Substituted with a Placeholder Part

Set models to Master Rep that require all of the feature data in memory

View States
As the drawing is built up and the need to show more detail approaches, the rep can be altered or new ones created where more components are

Pag e 1 8- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

displayed. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set each view of your drawing to be displayed as a different Simplified Representation using the View States option.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-13

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To reduce regeneration and repaint time for large drawings.

Method
In the first exercise, you reduce the regeneration and repaint time for a large assembly by reducing the amount of clutter on the screen and using view-only retrieve mode. In the second exercise, you create a few simplified representations for the pump assembly using rules, and then use a representation in the drawing. In the third exercise you merge two drawings into one file.

EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint Time
Task 1. Reduce the amount of information that the system must display on the drawing by erasing views that you do not currently need. 1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW.

Pag e 1 8- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 5: Sheet One of the Pump Drawing

2. Change to Sheet 2.

Figure 6: Sheet Two of the Pump Drawing

3. Click Views > Erase View , and select the detailed view. Accept [no] when the system prompts you to remove all arrows and circles associated with this view.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-15

NOTES

4. Repeat this procedure to erase the two views in the lower left portion of the sheet. Task 2. Alter the configuration file to improve performance while working with large drawings. 1. Edit the config.pro file and add the option disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no , and force_wireframe_in_drawings to yes . 2. Repaint the display. Pro/ENGINEER now does not have to take the time to calculate the removal of hidden lines. Task 3. Add a 3-D view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.

1. Click View > Add View > General > Done . 2. Locate the view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2. Note:
The view does not display on the screen but the Orientation dialog box appears because you changed the setting for disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no .

3. Click Saved Views, select ISO and click Set . Click OK to finish. 4. Remove hidden lines and tangent lines from the new 3-D view. Click Disp Mode > View Disp , then select the 3-D view. Click Done Sel . Click No Hidden > No Disp Tan > Done . 5. Edit config.pro and change the value of the configuration file option force_wireframe_in_drawings to no . 6. Repaint so that the drawing views no longer display in wireframe. 7. Resume the views that you erased earlier by clicking Resume View > Select All > Done Sel . 8. Return to Sheet 1.

Pag e 1 8- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 4. Change the configuration file so that it only regenerates the display when you choose to regenerate it. 1. Modify a dimension. Select one of the .750 dimension, then rightc lick and select Properties . Enter [1.25] as the value. 2. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Notice how much time it takes to regenerate the views. 5. Return to Sheet 2. The views on the second sheet begin to regenerate. The system has to regenerate all the views on sheet 2 because the geometry has changed. 6. Set the configuration file option auto_regen_views to no . 7. Return to Sheet 1. 8. Modify the 1.25 dimension back to 0.75. 9. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the model and the dimension value updates, but the view geometry remains the same. Note:
Setting auto_regen_views to no allows you to control when the views regenerate so that you can make many changes to the model or drawing without waiting for the views to update.

10. Click View > Update > Drawing View . Select the bottom view, then click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER only updates this view. Task 5. When the system retrieves a drawing, it retrieves all of the models used in the drawing. As a result, the system may require a significant amount of time to simply open the drawing for you to view or plot it. Configure this drawing for View Only Retrieval. 1. Save the drawing and erase it from memory. 2. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or assembly [Commands files used in the drawing. Click File >Open . Click and Settings ] and select RETRIEVE DRAWING AS VIEW ONLY. Select PUMP.DRW and click Open .

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-17

NOTES

3. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly, but it only displays the view borders because you did not save the display with the drawing. 4. Click Retr Models > Confirm . The system retrieves the models used in the drawing and displays the views correctly. 5. Change to Sheet 2. The system regenerates all the views on sheet 2. Note:
Saving the display will only save all the regenerated view. Without switching to sheet 2, the display of the views on sheet 2 will not be regenerated, therefore not saved.

6. Save the display. 7. Click Utilities > Environment and select the Saved Display check box. 8. Save the drawing 9. Erase the drawing again. Task 6. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or assembly files used in the drawing. 1. Retrieve the drawing again as view only. 2. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly and displays it correctly on the screen. Pro/ENGINEER displays the graphics the way that they appeared when you last saved the drawing. You can now change sheets, plot, or retrieve the models. Note:
If one of the models changed since you last saved the drawing, the graphics that the system displays may be out of date. Regenerate the views on the drawing to update the graphics.

3. Change to the next sheet, then close the window.

Pag e 1 8- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations
Task 1. The pump drawing only shows the exterior of the model, and the interior components are not visible in the views. Retrieve the pump assembly and create a simplified representation that eliminates the internal components. 1. Retrieve PUMP.ASM.

Figure 7: Master Rep of the Pump

2. Click Simpfd Rep > Create , then type [exterior]. Click Exclude Comp as the default rule. 3. Rather than manually select the external components, use the Simp Rep rule to evaluate this condition for you. Accept the defaults Master Rep then click By Rule . 4. In the BY RULE dialog box, select the Exterior Comps check box and click Evaluate .

5. Scroll down the MODEL TREE to see the components that satisfy this rule. 6. Click Update Screen > Done . 7. Save the assembly.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-19

NOTES

Figure 8: External Components of the Pump

Task 2. Retrieve the pump drawing and swap the current master rep model with the external simplified rep. 1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW and view Sheet 1. 2. Click Views > Modify View > View State . 3. Select the lower view on Sheet 1. Click Confirm , select EXTERNAL, and click OK . 4. Switch to Sheet 2. 5. Repeat this procedure for the 3D view and the four planar views. Any dimensions that can no longer be displayed with the current models in the rep are displayed in magenta. These dimensions could be recreated. 6. Save the drawing.

Pag e 1 8- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One
Task 1. Open a drawing that will be merged to another drawing and review its drawing setup file. 1. Retrieve the BARREL_MERGE.DRW. 2. Notice some of the inappropriate details. The drawing text is large in size. As a result, some dimensions interfere with other text and view. In the upper-left view the axis display for the pattern of holes are horizontal and vertical, not radially displayed. 3. Open the drawing set up file. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . Check the following two options and their values: drawing_text_height=0.4, radial_pattern_axis_circle=no. 4. Erase the BARREL_MERGE.DRW. Task 2. Merge the barrel drawing with the pump drawing.

Note:
The drawing that is being merged is the source drawing. The drawing into which it is being merged is the target drawing.

1. Active the pump drawing. Edit the drawing setup file and set the option “radial_pattern_axis_circle” to yes. Notice that the option “drawing_text_height” has the value 0.2. 2. Click Advanced > Merge . 3. Select the BARREL_MERGE.DRW and click Open . 4. Investigate the added sheet. 5. Notice that the text height and type has automatically taken the values of the target drawing. Also, notice that the axis pattern is now radial with an axis circle being displayed.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-21

NOTES

Note:
After the drawings are merged, the drawing setup file options from the target drawing override the options used by the source drawing.

6. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model . Notice that both the pump and the barrel are associated to the drawing. 7. Save the drawing.

Pag e 1 8- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Create a Drawings Rep
Task 1. Consider this scenario: you need to show the vendor that the patterned hole of the barrel part in the pump assembly needs to be redesigned. To show them what they need to work on, you can set up a Drawing Rep that takes them right to the area of the drawing where they can best see it, instead of retrieving all the models and searching through the entire drawing. 1. Switch to Sheet 3. 2. Click Advanced > Drawing Rep > Create . 3. Enter [barrel_hole] as the name. Task 2. Erase all views then show detail 1 of the barrel.

1. Accept the default Erase > All followed by Add . 2. Click Display > Individual , select the detailed view Detailed 1, followed by Done Sel > Add . Notice all view disappeared except the detailed view. Task 3. Set up the view location

1. Click the DRAWING DISPLAY tab. 2. Check the Go to Sheet check box and select 3 from the drop down list . 3. Check the Go to Center of View check box and click the detailed view . 4. Click the Frozen check box under the Table Preferences . 5. Click Execute > OK . Click Done/Return from the ADV DWG OPTS menu. 6. Save and Erase the drawing.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-23

NOTES

Task 4. Imagine you are the vendor and are told to redesign the hole of the barrel part in the pump drawing. There is a drawing rep already created for you. Retrieve the drawing rep. 1. Click File > Open , select PUMP.DRW, followed by Open Rep . 2. Select the drawing rep BARREL_HOLE you just created. 3. The system brings you right to the location of your interest. Notice that it takes less time than it would if All Views default drawing rep is retrieved.

Pag e 1 8- 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can reduce display of items in the drawing using layers, environment options, and the configuration option. You can control when a view is regenerated. You can use View Only and Simplified Representations to limit the file that needs to be retrieved.

Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings

Pag e 1 8-25

Module

19
Drawing Standards and Templates
In this module, you learn how to implement drawing standards using configurations files, drawing setup files as well as creating drawing templates.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Use configuration and drawing setup options to control the display of items associated with drafting standards. Create drawings according to your company standards. Create the drawing templates.

Page 19-1

NOTES

SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS
Before you use Pro/ENGINEER for the first time, you should select a configuration file and drawing setup file to work with, and then make the necessary changes to meet your established company standards.

Setting up Your Configuration File
As an initial step in establishing your company standards for Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to review every option available in the loadpoint configuration file. If the default setting of an option meets your standards, you do not have to add it to your configuration file. Likewise, if the default setting is not acceptable, you should add it to your configuration file. The loadpoint of Pro/ENGINEER has a text directory containing two configuration files, config.pro and config.sup. You can override the config.pro file with options in other configuration files, but you cannot override the config.sup file with other options. Therefore, you must decide if you want to allow users to override these settings when they start Pro/ENGINEER. To override a setting, you can place an option that is in the loadpoint config.pro in a config.pro file in the user’s home directory.

Setting up Your Drawing Setup File
As an additional step in establishing your company standards for Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to decide which drawing setup file is the most appropriate for your needs. In the text directory of the loadpoint, Pro/ENGINEER provides a variety of drawing setup files that are set to certain standards. You should copy each file to a new name and then make any necessary changes.

Note:
You should not accept the settings in the standard drawing setup files as final standards. Instead, you should review each option to determine if the setting is appropriate for your company.

Pag e 1 9- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

After you change your drawing setup file, you should set it up so that all new drawings use this setup file by default. To do this, specify the name of your drawing setup file (FILENAME.DTL) as the value for the configuration file option drawing_setup_file. Several drawing setup file options control the appearance of items associated with drawing standards. You can change the settings of these options at any time. If you accept the default value, any changes are retroactive; it is, therefore, important to make changes to the drawing setup file rather than the individual items. Retaining the default settings makes is easier to update the drawing later if the standards change.

Note:
You should not accept the values std_ansi, std_din, and std_iso, etc., as final. Changes to the standards, and different interpretations, can produce different results. Select the option that produces the correct appearance in your drawing, regardless of the name of the setting.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9- 3

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the available configuration file options that you can use to set drawing standards in Drawing mode.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing Standards Option allow_rfs_default_gtols_ always chamfer_45deg_dim_text Value yes no ASME/ANSI ISO/DIN JIS Definition If set to yes, the system creates RFS/Default gtols even if the ANSI standard does not allow it. Controls the appearance of dimension text of newly created dimensions.

Pag e 1 9- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS
The following table lists the drawing setup file options that you can use to set the standard for gtols, dimension and linear tolerance display, and view geometry in a drawing.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling Drawing Standards Option gtol_datums Value STD_ANSI STD_ANSI_MM STD_ISO STD_JIS STD_DIN STD_ISO_JIS STD_ASME STD_ANSI_DASHED new_iso_set_datums no yes Options Controlling Dimensions and Linear Tolerances angdim_text_orientation horizontal horizontal_outside parallel_above parallel_outside parallel_fully_outside Controls the placement of angular dimensions to meet the ISO standard. If set to “yes,” set draft datums conform to the ISO standard. Definition Sets the drafting standard for displaying reference datums in drawings. The display affects both axes and datum planes. Options Controlling Geometric Tolerances

Horizontal

Horizontal Outside

Paralle l

Parallel Fully

Parallel Above

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9- 5

NOTES

chamfer_45deg_leadestyle

STD_ASME_ANSI STD_ISO STD_DIN STD_JIS

Affects the display of the leader in the drawing and all 45-degree chamfer dimensions. Improves the display of the offset between an ISO ordinate dimension line and the witness line. If set to “yes,” the system uses the “witness_line_delta” value. If set to “no,” the offset differs by about 2 mm. Sets the display standard for ordinate dimensions. When set to “STD_ANSI,” shows dimensions without a connecting line (figure A). Otherwise, places related ordinate dimensions along the connecting line (figure B).

iso_ordinate_delta

no yes

ord_dim_standard

STD_ANSI STD_ISO STD_DIN STD_JIS

tol_text_height_factor

standard number > 0

Sets the default ratio between the tolerance text height and dimension text height, when tolerance is shown in “plus-minus” format. For “standard,” the system uses 1 for ANSI and 0.6 for ISO standard.

Pag e 1 9- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

tol_text_width_factor

standard number > 0

Sets the default ratio between the tolerance text width and dimension text width, when tolerance is shown in “plus-minus” format. For “standard,” the system uses 1 for ANSI and 0.6 for ISO standard.

Options Controlling View Geometry axis_interior_clipping no yes When set to “no,” axes in the drawing conform to requirements of the ANSI Y14.2M standard. If set to “yes,” you can adjust each axis individually by clipping and moving, as illustrated below.

cutting_line

STD_ANSI STD_ANSI_DASHED STD_DIN STD_ISO STD_JIS STD_JIS_ALTERNATE

When set to “std_ansi,” uses the ANSI standard for cutting lines. When set to “std_ansi_dashed,” uses dashed lines. Otherwise, uses the DIN standard cutting line. Displays its thickened portion in white, and its thin portion in gray.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9- 7

NOTES

cutting_line_segment

0 value

Specifies the length in drawing units of the thickened portion of a nonANSI cutting line. When set to “0,” does not show the thickened portion. Controls the display of threads in drawings depending upon whether a drawing complies with ISO or ANSI standard (set by the “thread_standard” option). When set to “yes,” thread edges meet ANSI or ISO standard for Hidden Line display. Controls the text color in drawings. Unless set to STD_ANSI, all text is blue and detailed view boundaries are yellow. Determines whether a threaded hole with its axis perpendicular to the screen is displayed as an arc (ISO) or a circle (ANSI). If set to “improved,” does not display hidden thread lines if the environment is set to No Hidden. Displays them as leader lines if the environment is Hidden Line. When set to std_din, does not use the words SECTION, DETAIL, and SEE DETAIL in viewrelated notes.

hlr_for_threads

no yes

line_style_standard

STD_ANSI STD_DIN STD_ISO STD_JIS

thread_standard

STD_ANSI_IMP STD_ANSI STD_ANSI_IMP_ASSY STD_ISO STD_ISO_IMP STD_ISO_IMP_ASSY

view_note

STD_ANSI STD_DIN STD_ISO STD_JIS

Pag e 1 9- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES
Using the drawing templates, you can greatly improve the efficiency of the drawing creation process. Once setup, these templates will automate the process of laying out the views, setting view display, placing standard notes, placing standard tables, creating snap lines and show dimensions.

Figure 1: A Template and the Resulting Drawing

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9- 9

NOTES

Model Requirements
The drawing templates use standard view names in the models to locate the views. For instance, you may specify that the first view placed in a General view oriented to the FRONT view. The model using the template must contain a view with this exact name, or the view can not be created with the template.

Template View Definition
These drawing templates are developed using the dialog box shown in the following figure.

Figure 2: Template View Instructions Dialog Box

To define the first view for the template you will need to specify the following information: • • • • Name of the template view Type of view to be placed The name of the Saved View that should be used to orient the model The location for the view

Pag e 1 9- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Optional information you can specify for the view: • • • • • • • If a cross-section should be displayed for the view, and the crosssectional view name. Scale for the view. Name of the Explode State for the view. Name of the Simplified Rep to base the geometry on. The display setting for the view, such as No Hidden or Hidden Line. The display setting for tangent edges, such as Tan Phantom. If dimensions should be shown in the view. If dimensions are shown, you can choose to specify: ! ! ! If snap lines should be created The number of snap lines created The initial and incremental spacing of the snap lines

Dimension and Balloon Priority
When you are automatically showing balloons or dimensions, you have control over the view order the system uses for attempting to show the dimensions.

View Symbol
By default, all views are represented by the same symbol on the template. If desired, you can create additional symbols that can be used to represent the different types of views.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To use the drawing file setup options to create standard drawings.

Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use drawing setup file options to set standards for your drawings by manipulating the display of detail items such as dimensions, axes, and set datums. In the second exercise, you create a drawing template.

EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through the Drawing Setup File
Task 1. Retrieve the drawing standards drawing and change some of the settings that will affect dimensions. 1. Retrieve DRW_STANDARDS.DRW. 2. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis names appear on the screen, turn them off. Task 2. Change the display of ordinate dimensions.

1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . 2. Select the ord_dim_standard option and select std_iso from the VALUE drop-down list. 3. Apply the changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. Click Add/Change > Apply > Close . Repaint the screen. The ordinate dimensions now appear as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 1 9- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 3: Ordinate Dimension Standard

Task 3. Change the display of the chamfer dimensions in the drawing by modifying the drawing configuration file. 1. Using the procedures found in the previous task to change the chamfer display. In the drawing setup file, set the chamfer_45deg_leader_style option to std_iso . Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the chamfer dimensions in their new style. Repeat this step and change the setting to std_din and std_jis as shown in the following figure.

JIS standard

DIN standard

ISO standard

ANSI-ASME standard

Figure 4: Chamfer Dimensions

Task 4. display.

Modify the drawing setup file to change angular dimensions

1. Set the angdim_text_orientation option to horizontal_outside . Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the angle dimensions in their new style. 3. Repeat this step and change the setting to parallel_above and parallel_outside .

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-13

NOTES

Task 5. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines, datum planes, and axes. 1. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines. Set the cutting_line to std_din. 2. Set the cutting_line_segment to [1.5]. Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 3. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new cutting line style. Change cutting_line_segment to [1.0] and note the difference. In the following figure, the left view shows the ANSI standard and the right view shows the DIN standard.

Figure 5: Cutting Lines.

4. Change the display of set datum planes. Set gtol_datums to std_iso_jis. Apply the changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new datum style. In the following figure, the left view shows the ANSI standard and the right view shows the ISO-JIS standard.

Figure 6: Gtol Datums

Pag e 1 9- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

6. Change the display of datum axes. Set axis_interior_clipping to Yes . Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 7. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new axis style. Click the [Select] icon. Click the axis to highlight it. 8. Use the various drag handles on the axes to move the outside ends and inside ends of the axes.

9. Place it to an appropriate position, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 7: Axis Interior Clipping

10. Change the settings of the drawing setup file options that control arrow style, default font, text height, and text width. Note:
Changing the drawing units affects many other settings in the drawing setup file. The options that control text height and text width, for example, are based on this setting.

11. Close the active window.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-15

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Drawing Templates

Figure 8 Finished drawing created using drawing templates.

Pag e 1 9- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 1.

Create an empty C size drawing used for the template.

1. Click File > New > Drawing . 2. Enter [assembly_C_template] for the name. 3. Clear the Use Default Template check box and click OK . 4. Accept none as DEFAULT MODEL. 5. Select Empty in the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area. 6. Accept the default Landscape and C size. 7. Click OK to create the drawing. Task 2. Initialize the template.

1. Click Applications > Template . This activates the template menu options. Task 3. Create a Bill of Material table.

1. Click Table > Save/Retrieve > Retrieve and open BOM.TBL. The table contains a repeat region and report symbols. 2. Locate the table at the top right corner of the drawing sheet. The position of the BOM needs to be adjusted after adding the format. 3. Click Done/Return from the TABLE menu. Task 4. Create a note by retrieving a text file.

1. Click Insert > Note > File > Make Note . Locate the note at the top left corner of the drawing sheet. 2. Open STANDARD_NOTE.TXT located in the current directory. Notice that the user defined parameter &modeled_by is included in this note. Click Done/Return . Task 5. Create two text styles.

1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery > New .

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-17

NOTES

2. Create a style used for the table titles. ! Enter [table_title] as the STYLE NAME.

! Define the CHARACTER information. Select CG Times from the FONT drop down list. Uncheck the Default checkbox and enter [0.15] for the HEIGHT. Define the Justification of the NOTE/DIMENSION. Select Center from the HORIZONTAL drop down list. Select Middle from the VERTICAL drop down list. Click OK to close the dialog box. 3. Create a style used for notes. ! ! ! Click New from the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box. Enter [note_texts] as the STYLE NAME. !

Define the CHARACTER information. Select leroy from the FONT drop down list. Enter [0.12] for the HEIGHT. Click OK to close the dialog box. 4. Close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box. Task 6. Create the default drawing layers.

1. Click View > Layers > Layer > New . 2. Enter [DRAFT_DTM] for the name. Select DRAFT_DTM as the DEFAULT LAYER TYPES. 3. Create the following layers using the same procedures: ! ! Click Add to add a new layer. Name: DRAFT_ENTITY, Click Add to add a new layer. Name: SNAP_LINE, DEFAULT
DEFAULT LAYER TYPES: DRAFT_ENTITY. LAYER TYPES: SNAP_LINE.

4. Click OK to close the NEW LAYER dialog boxes. Task 7. model. Make the layer display of the drawing associative to that of the

1. In the LAYERS dialog box, click Status > Preferences .

Pag e 1 9- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

2. Clear the Ignore display status of layers in the model check box. Click OK to close the LAYER STATUS CONTROL dialog box. 3. Click Close to close the LAYERS dialog box. Task 8. Modify the drawing setup file of the drawing template.

1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup from the TMPLT DWG menu. 2. Set the value of “tol_display” to Yes. 3. Apply the changes and close the window. Click Apply > Close , followed by Done/Return . Task 9. Define the first view for the template.

1. From the TMPLT DWG menu, click Views > Add Template . The TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTIONS window appears. 2. Enter [front] as the view name. 3. In the VIEW ORIENTATION box, accept the default of General . 4. In the SAVED VIEW NAME box, accept the default of Front . 5. Define the view options: ! ! Check the X-Section check box. Enter [A] as the name. Check the Scale check box. Enter [0.75] as the value.

! Check the Exploded State check box. Accept the default name. ! Check the Simplified Rep check box. Enter [major_comp] as the name. ! ! Check the Model Display check box and select No Hidden . Check the Tan Edge Display check box and select Tan Solid .

6. Click Place View and locate the view at the lower left corner of the sheet.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-19

NOTES

Task 10. Create a second view to generate a projection view. 1. Click New in the TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTIONS dialog box. 2. Enter [top_project] as the view name. 3. In the VIEW ORIENTATION box, select Projection . 4. In the PROJECTION PARENT VIEW box, select FRONT . 5. Define the view options: ! ! ! Uncheck X-Section and Explode State check box. Check the Model Display check box and select No Hidden . Check the Tan Edge Display check box and select Tan Solid .

6. Click Place View and locate the view above the FRONT view. Task 11. Create a second projection view and a 3-D view. 1. Repeat the above procedures to create a projection view with the following values: ! ! ! ! ! ! View Name = right_project View Orientation = Projection View Parent = FRONT Uncheck X-Section and Explode State check box. Model Display = No Hidden Tan Edge Display = Tan Solid

2. Click Place View and locate the view to the right of the FRONT view. 3. Repeat the above procedures to create a 3-D view with the following values: ! ! ! View Name = 3D View Orientation = General Saved View Name = 3D_EXPLODE

Pag e 1 9- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

! ! ! !

Scale = 0.45 Exploded State = EXP0002 Model Display = No Hidden Tan Edge Display = Tan Solid

! Snap Lines = 3. Enter [0.5 ] as both the Initial Offset and the Increment. ! Balloons

4. Click Place View and locate the view above the RIGHT_PROJECT view. Click OK to close the dialog box. 5. Specify the BOM balloon region. From the TMPLT DWG menu, click Table > BOM Region > Set Region > With QTY . Select the repeat region on top of the BOM table header. 6. Save and close the window. Task 12. Create an assembly drawing using the assembly template. 1. Click File > New > Drawing . 2. Enter [1000pump_upper_housing] as the name. 3. Leave the Use default template check box checked. 4. Select 1000_UPPER_HOUSING.ASM as the DEFAULT MODEL. 5. Browse and open ASSEMBLY_C_TEMPLATE.DRW as the template. 6. Click OK . The system creates the drawing using the specified template. Specifically, the system does the following: ! ! Fills in the BOM. Places views according to the view template definitions.

! The layer, drawing setup file settings and text styles are also carried into the new drawing. 7. Reposition the balloons and blank the snap line layer.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-21

NOTES

Note:
The advantage of using the layers to control the snap line display as opposed to using the environment display is that you can control it in individual views. The disadvantage is, once the snap line layer is blanked it ceases to work.

8. Save the drawing. Task 13. Add the C size format. Apply text style to the table title. 1. Click File > Open . Open the C_ACME.FRM located in the current directory. 2. Zoom in on the title block and examine it’s content. The following drawing labels have been entered and saved in the table. ! !
! &todays_date &model_name &dwg_name &type &scale &format &current_sheet &total_sheets

! ! ! !
!

!

A user defined parameter &modeled_by is also included.

3. Close the format window. 4. Activate the 1000PUMP_UPPER_HOUSING.ASM window. 5. Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Open the C_ACME.FRM from the session. 6. The system adds the format and fills in the values for the parameters in the title block. 7. Reposition the note and BOM if necessary.

Pag e 1 9- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

8. Click Text Style from the FORMAT menu. Apply the table_title text style to the ACME PUMP CO. text in the title block. Task 14. Create a C size part drawing template. 1. Open the ASSEMBLY_C_TEMPLATE.DRW window. 2. Click File > Save a Copy . Enter [PART_C_TEMPLATE] as the new name. 3. Retrieve the PART_C_TEMPLATE.DRW from the working directory. 4. Initialize the template. Click Applications > Template . 5. Delete the BOM table. Click Table > Delete . Select the BOM table. Confirm when prompted. Task 15. Redefine the view templates. 1. Click the [Select] icon.

2. Right-click the FRONT view template and choose Properties . 3. Clear the all the check boxes except for the following 3 options. Fill in the following information. ! ! Model Display = No Hidden Tan Edge Display = Tan Solid

! Dimension: Create snap lines. Enter [0.5] for both the Initial Offset and the Increment. ! Click OK to close the dialog box.

4. Redefine the two projection views using the same procedure and settings. 5. Set the dimension display priorities. ! ! When redefining the last projection view. Highlight the Dimension check box and click Set Display Priorities . Using the arrow to set the priorities to be: FRONT, TOP_PROJECT and RIGHT_ PROJECT.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-23

NOTES

!

Click OK to finish.

6. Redefine the 3D view. ! Change the Model “Saved View” Name to 3D.

! Clear the all check boxes, except for the Model Display and the Tan Edge Display . Click OK to finish. 7. Save the template. Task 16. Create a part drawing. 1. Create a new drawing. Enter [1000_plunger_cap] as the drawing name. 2. Specify 1000_PLUNGER_CAP.PRT as the DEFAULT MODEL. 3. Specify PART_C_TEMPLATE.DRW as the TEMPLATE. Click OK . 4. The system creates views and shows dimensions. 5. Reposition the dimensions as necessary. Blank the snap lines layer. 6. Add the C_ACME.FRM format. Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Open the C_ACME.FRM from the session. Click Done/Return . Task 17. Merge the part drawing to the assembly drawing. 1. Active the assembly drawing. 2. Click Advanced > Merge . 3. Select the 1000_PLUNGER_CAP.DRW and click Open . 4. Investigate the added sheet. 5. Save and erase the drawing.

Pag e 1 9- 2 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can use configuration and drawing setup options to control the display of items associated with drafting standards. You can implement company drawing standards using the drawing templates.

D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s

Pag e 1 9-25

Module

20
Plotting
In this module, you learn to how to create plot files.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Plot a drawing interactively. Configure the plotter. Plot using the Batch utilities.

Page 20-1

NOTES

PLOTTING INTERACTIVELY
Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can create plot files of the current object (part, drawing, assembly, etc.) and send them to the print queue of a plotter. Interactive plotting provides flexibility in creating a plot file because you can scale, clip, or output the plot to the screen to preview it. Once you have properly set up all of the plotting options, you can send the plot directly to the plotter from within Pro/ENGINEER. Using the PRINT dialog box, you can specify the configurations such as print destination, sheets information and plotter command.

Figure 1: Print Dialog Box

Print Destination
Using the [Command and Setting], you can specify an existing printer or add new printer types, as shown in the following figure.

Pag e 2 0- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 2 Add Printer Type.

Configuring the Plotter
After specifying the appropriate printer, you can use the PRINTER CONFIGURATION dialog box to configure the selected printer as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3: Printer Configuration

The Page Tab
You can specify the following information concerning the plotted page:

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0- 3

NOTES

– You can specify the size of the sheet to which you are going to print (for example, you can print a C-size drawing on an A-size sheet) or create a customized size.
Dimensions of the paper Offset on the paper

• •

– You can specify the offset distance of the plot

from the origin. – You can include a label on the plot and control its height. The system prints the label as NAME:<OBJECT DATE> and shifts the plot to the right, which may clip some geometry along the right border.
Label to include on the plot Units of the paper

– You can define the variable plot size in inches or

millimeters.

The Printer Tab
You can specify the following information concerning the printer: •
Pen information

– You can select the pen table file to control which pens the system uses for different types of lines. You can also set the pen velocity to a printer that has pen speed control.

– You can specify that you want to install a cutter on a plotter. It is only active when a plotter that supports the hardware has been selected.
Cutter information

• • •

– You can access either the software plotter handshake mode or the hardware plotter handshake mode.
Handshake information Sheet type – You can specify the type of paper as cut-sheet or roll, it is only active when a roll feed plotter driver has been selected. Rotation

– You can properly print a landscape orientation drawing on a portrait type laser printer or a portrait orientation drawing on a landscape type laser printer.

Model Tab
You can specify the following information concerning the model you are plotting: •
Type of plot

– You can select the following plot types:

! Full Plot – Creates a plot of the entire object. ! Clipped – Creates a clipped plot by defining a box around the area to plot. This area appears on paper in its normal location relative to the lower-left corner.

Pag e 2 0- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

! Based on Zoom – Creates a scaled, clipped plot based on the paper size and the zoom setting in the graphics window. This is the default setting. ! Plot Area – Creates a plot by shifting the area inside the clip box to the lower-left corner of the paper and scaling the clipped area to match the user-specified scale. ! Model Size – Scales the plot to a specified model scale. For example, if you enter 0.25, the system creates a plot of the model to ¼ scale. This choice is valid only for 3-D objects. Plot scale – You can specify the plot scale in a range from 0.01 to 100 (2-D only). In addition, you can also generate a segmented plot and control whether or not the system plots it with the drawing. A segmented plot plots the drawing in real size, breaking it up onto separate sheets. – You can control whether the system plots all visible layers or only the one specified by ID.
Layers Plot quality

• •

– You can specify the quality of the output file by controlling the amount of checking that Pro/ENGINEER performs for overlapping lines.

To File
By checking the To File check box, you can save an output plot file. If you do not check To File , the system deletes the plot file after it issues the Plotter command. When you print to a file, you can create a single file or a separate file for each sheet of the drawing, as well as append to an existing plot file.

Sheets
You can specify which sheet of the drawing to print. You can print all of the sheets, the current sheet, or a range of sheets (for example, 11-14).

Number of Copies
When you send the plot directly to a printer, you can enter a positive number between 1 and 99 to specify the number of copies that you need.

Plotter command
When you plot to a printer, you can use the Plotter command field to specify the system command that sends a file to the printer. You can enter

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0- 5

NOTES

the command in this field, or use configuration file options “plotter_command” to specify the command.

Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility
Using the Pro/BATCH utility, you can process a large number of Pro/ENGINEER files in a batch mode and create output files in a variety of formats. You can schedule the batch process to run on a delayed start time utilizing system resources during off-peak hours. The Pro/BATCH utility outputs files as plot files, IGES, DXF, STL, VDA, and any of the formats that you can create interactively from within Pro/ENGINEER. The Pro/BATCH utility retrieves the specified list of objects and creates the output file without requiring any further interaction with you. When using the Pro/BATCH utility, you should keep in mind the following: • – You must have an available Pro/ENGINEER license and access to all modules required for the scheduled operations.
License requirements

– Filenames listed for processing do not require the local version number. The system retrieves the latest version of the object as it normally would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you specify a local version of the file, Pro/BATCH uses that specific version of the file.
Local version numbers Configuration files

– Pro/BATCH reads the configuration files from the same locations as a Pro/ENGINEER session, including the current working directory from which the Pro/BATCH utility is executed. – The Pro/BATCH utility uses the Pro/ENGINEER search paths to find the files in the list. The system creates output files in the current directory unless you specify the destination directory in the Pro/BATCH interface. – The system generates log files for each Pro/BATCH session listing each command line in the file followed by a success or failure exit code.

Search paths

Log files

Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment
Pro/BATCH allows you to define the actions that you want the system to perform in the batch session, as well as schedule the job for the appropriate time. When you execute the pro_batch command, the system brings you into the Pro/BATCH environment. You can then create

Pag e 2 0- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

batch files and save them, using the same batch process repeatedly, if necessary. To create a batch file, you need to start Pro/BATCH, set up general preferences. You can then create the batch file, specify the files on which to perform the action, set up the options for each action, and schedule the batch process.

Starting Pro/BATCH
To start the Pro/BATCH utility, enter the command [pro_batch] in a system window. The Pro/BATCH interface should then appear on your screen as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4: Pro/BATCH Dialog Box

Setting up Preferences
You should then set up the general preferences for the batch file to define the default action that you want the system to perform on the objects. • The PREFERENCE menu allows the user to set the default Option Preference for all the available actions in the Pro/BATCH, shown in the following fugure. The General preference tab defines the default action for new objects added to the batch file. If you include objects for plotting in the batch file, you must enter the
PLOTTER COMMAND on the Plot options page.

• •

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0- 7

NOTES

Figure 5: Option Preference Dialog Box

Creating a New Batch File
After defining the preferences, you can create a new batch file. The name of the batch file should be entered in the Batch File box in the lower lefthand corner of the PRO/BATCH dialog box, as shown in the following figure. Batch files can be saved and re-executed, eliminating the need to continually gather all the required files.

Adding Objects
You should then specify the files on which you want the system to perform the actions. • Objects are added to the batch file using the Browse button on the FILE pull-down menu. The BROWSE dialog box allows the user to browse the file system selecting and adding objects to the batch file. Each object is added as a separate line item with an action (plot, IGES, etc.) and the configuration options for that action. The default action is defined on the General preference tab. The options for that action are defined on the corresponding tab in the OPTION PREFERENCE dialog box.

Pag e 2 0- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Defining the Action and Options
The OPTIONS menu allows the user to define the action to be taken for selected objects. Configuration options for that action can also be specified. This is useful when the user need to specify actions and configurations that are different from the default.

Pro/ENGINEER Command
A valid Pro/ENGINEER command must be entered to tell the Pro/BATCH utility which license of Pro/ENGINEER to execute.

Saving the Batch file
After you finish specifying options for a batch file, you should save it.

Scheduling the Start of the Batch Process
You can set the exact amount of time that should elapse before the batch process starts.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS
This option lists the Pro/ENGINEER configuration file options that affect plotting. You can add them to the loadpoint configuration file and set them as read-only for other Pro/ENGINEER users. Specific projects may require unique plotter configuration setups. If you place the appropriate configuration file in the project directory, the system can read those configuration settings when you execute it from that directory.

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0- 9

NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Plotting Option delete_after_plotting yes no (default) Value Description Determines if the system deletes a plot file after plotting. When set to “yes,” the system automatically deletes a plot file after successfully plotting it. Controls the edge display quality for wireframe and hidden line removal. It also affects screen display. Determines the default quality check the system uses to check for overlapping lines in a plot or 2-D export. Sets the weights of the entities plotted to pens 1 through eight to a value of 1 through 16, where 1 is the thinnest, 16 being the thickest in increments of .0006 in. Default values are Pen 1 4, Pen 2 1, Pen 3 2, Pen 4 3, Pen 5 2, Pen 6 3, Pen 7 1, Pen 8 4. The default thickness for Pen 1 is .0024 in. Sets the pen speed for both x and y directions for plotters that are compatible with this option. Sets the pen speed for x and y directions separately for plotters that are compatible with this option. The first value is for the x direction and the second is for the y direction. Specifies a default pen mapping table (table.pnt) file.

edge_display_quality

very_high normal (default) high low

interface_quality

value (0-3)

pen#_line_weight

(# = 1-8) value (1-16)

pen_slew

value

pen_slew_xy

value and value

pen_table_file

path and name

Pag e 2 0- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

plotter

plot driver name

Specifies the plotter driver as shown in the list of supported devices in the Plot dialog box. Specifies a command to initiate the plot from the operating system. (for example, lp, lpr etc.) Specifies the directory to where the system writes plot files. When set to yes, system gives plot files extensions to identify plot format. (.ps, .hp, .hp2, .ver etc.). Allows full support of 8 pens (uses 4 pens by default). When set to “yes,” plots the exact line style used in Pro/ENGINEER. When set to “no,” the plotter plots lines using its own font.

plotter_command

command

plot_file_dir

directory name

plot_names

yes no (default)

use_8_plotter_pens

yes no (default)

use_software_line_ fonts

yes no (default)

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0-11

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To plot a drawing interactively, and by using batch utilities.

Method
In this exercise, you create plot files for drawings. You create plot files manually and by using the Pro/BATCH tool.

EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings
Task 1. Create a plot file by manually changing the settings through the PRINT dialog box. Create a plot file for both sheets of the drawing on Asize sheets. 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 2. Set up the print configuration to print to an A-size sheet. Click File > Print . 3. Set Generic Postscript as the destination. Click [Commands and Settings] from the PRINT dialog box and select Generic Postscript . 4. Click Configure… . Click the Page tab and select A from the SIZE drop-down list. 5. Ensure that the system plots the entire drawing, regardless of whether you zoom in on it. Click Model and select Full Plot from the PLOT drop-down list. 6. Confirm the With Format check box is selected and click OK to close the PRINTER CONFIGURATION dialog box. 7. In the PRINT dialog box, select the To file check box, clear the To printer check box, and select All for the SHEETS. Click OK .

Pag e 2 0- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

8. Create a plot file. Accept the defaults Create Single File and [PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.PLT] (depending on the file you are working on) as the name of the plot file and click OK . 9. Open a system window to make sure that the plot file is in the current directory. Click Window > Open System Window from the pull-down menu. ! For DOS, enter [dir *.plt*] to list all of the postscript files in the directory. ! For UNIX, enter [ls *.plt*] to list all of the postcript files. 10. Enter [exit] to close the system window. 11. Exit Pro/ENGINEER. Task 2. Start the Pro/BATCH utility and create a new batch file, then set up the preferences for plot files. 1. Open up a system window and begin the Pro/BATCH utility. Open a system window and enter [pro_batch] at the command line. 2. Create a new batch file. In the PRO/BATCH dialog box enter [DRW_PLOT] as the name in the BATCH FILE box. 3. Specify the command to start Pro/ENGINEER. Type the command used to start Pro/E in the PRO/ENGINEER COMMAND box. (For Windows make sure to include the .BAT extension.) 4. Define the default option preferences for this file. Click Preference > Set Preference . 5. Define the default action for this batch file as plotting. Click the General tab and select Plot from the DEFAULT ACTION dropdown list. 6. Define the preferences for plot files. Click the Plot tab. Select DEFAULT from the PLOTTER drop-down list, select C as the PAPER SIZE, select 3 as the OUTPUT QUALITY, and type [1.0] as the USER SCALE. Click OK . Task 3. Specify the files to plot during this batch process. After selecting the files, set up the options for each action. 1. Specify the list of drawings to plot. Click File > Browse .

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0-13

NOTES

2. In the DIRECTORIES area, navigate to the FUND_DRAW_320 directory by double clicking the directory name or drive name. Use the DRIVE drop-down list to select an appropriate drive as necessary. 3. Filter for drawings. Select drawing file (*.drw) from the FILTER drop-down list. 4. Select the BOLT_REPLACE, screw, and threaded bolt drawings. Holding down the <CTRL> key, select BOLT_REPLACE. DRW, SCREW.DRW, and THREADED_BOLT.DRW. 5. Click Add Objects . Click Close Browser when you have finished. 6. Change the plot options for the screw and threaded bolt drawings to plot to an A-size sheet. Press and hold <SHIFT> key and select SCREW.DRW and THREADED_BOLT.DRW. 7. Click Options > Set Option from the pull-down menu. Change only the plotting option for the sheet size. 8. Select A from the PAPER SIZE drop-down list and click OK . The OPTION column changes from 'default' to 'userdefined.' Task 4. Save the batch file and schedule it to start immediately.

1. Click File > Save in the PRO/BATCH dialog box. 2. Execute the batch process. Click Schedule > Start the Task . 3. Specify the task to start immediately. In the SCHEDULE dialog box, type [0] as the number of hours to delay before starting the batch process. 4. Click OK to start the task. If there is no printer set up in the training facility, change the action to IGES and proceed. 5. Exit from batch processing. Click File > Exit > OK from the PRO/BATCH dialog box. 6. In the system window, list the contents of the batch file saved in the pro/batch start up directory. ! Open up a system window if necessary. ! Navigate to the directory where you entered [pro_batch], if necessary.

Pag e 2 0- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

! For the DOS window, enter [type pro_batch.log.1]. ! For UNIX, enter [more pro_batch.log.1]. 7. After viewing the log file, close the system window.

Plo t t i n g

Pag e 2 0-15

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • You can interactively plot drawing, parts, and assemblies. You can plot using the Batch utilities.

Pag e 2 0- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Module

21
Markup Model
In this module, you learn how to create engineering markups. You also learn how to superimpose drawings using overlays.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Create markups for different types of objects. Save and retrieve markups. Superimpose drawings with overlays.

Page 21-1

NOTES

ENGINEERING MARKUPS
A markup is an informal sketch that you can create in Pro/ENGINEER and superimpose over an object, as shown in the following figure. Each markup acts like a set of transparent sheets on top of a drawing sheet. It enables you to superimpose text and sketched entities in a variety of colors to indicate where changes might be required.

Figure 1: Markup Example

Creating a Markup
You can create a markup for a part, assembly, drawing, report, layout, or manufacturing model. However, the object that you use for the markup is read-only, which means that you cannot make any changes to your part or drawing while in Markup mode. You can only indicate the changes that

Pag e 2 1- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

To create a markup, you must select an object and then specify a name for the markup. The default name is your login name. The system creates the file and attaches a .MRK extension to it to signify that it is a markup. You can then set up the markup by specifying the color, text height, and line width to use for the markup entities. After setting up the markup, you can create notes and sketched entities (sketch, curve, arrow, or line) on the markup, as well as modify, move, or delete entities. If your drawing contains multiple sheets, you can mark up all of the sheets at the same time and in the same markup. You do not need to have a separate markup for each sheet.

Saving and Viewing a Markup
When you save a markup, Pro/ENGINEER saves the specified markup only; you must save other markups separately. It saves all of the sketched entities and notes with the markup file, not the object. Because the object does not change, the system does not save it with the markup.

Retrieving Markups
When you retrieve a drawing that has an associated markup, Pro/ENGINEER does not inform you that a markup exists for it because it considers the drawing to be independent of the markup. Therefore, you may want to implement a notification system for your users using email, voice mail, memos, or a database manager. When you retrieve a specific markup, Pro/ENGINEER lists the markup name with the related model in brackets; then it automatically retrieves the related model and the markup. You can then toggle between different markups for that model without having to open each individually.

Naming Conventions
Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically create a new version of a markup when you create a new version of the associated drawing. Therefore, you may want to create a new markup with each version of your drawing to maintain current markups.

M a rku p M o d e l

Pag e 2 1- 3

NOTES

OVERLAYS
Using overlays, you can superimpose the image of one drawing on top of another to view changes among the source drawing, the drawing in which you created the overlay, and a target drawing. This is a useful tool for viewing the differences between family table drawings in which you have replaced the views from one instance with another. An overlaid view contains all detail items from the source drawing, and it automatically updates to reflect any changes. When using overlays, keep in mind the following: • • • Overlays are read-only in the target drawing. You cannot select an overlay for any drawing operation in the target drawing. If the size of the target drawing sheet is different from that of the source drawing, they both consume the same graphics area. The system rescales the model from one size to another. You can place overlays from multiple drawings on individual sheets that contain no detailing that was originally in the target drawing. This allows you to create a master target drawing with multiple sheets composed of overlays of the source drawings.

Pag e 2 1- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create markups for a drawing in order to indicate the changes needs to be made.

Method
In this exercise, you create two markups for the plunger body drawing. The first markup specifies the removal of the triangular symbol and modification of the detailed view scales. The second markup specifies the modification of the scale of the 3-D view.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing
Task 1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Sketch a circle and an arrow around the triangular symbol 1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Click File > New > Markup . Enter [CHANGE_A] as the name and click OK . 2. Open PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW. If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. 3. Define the settings for the first markup. Change the color, the text height, and the line width. Click Setup > Color > Green. Click Text Height and enter [.3]. Click Line Width and enter [.1]. 4. Sketch a freehand circle around the triangular symbol in the lower left view on Sheet 1. Click Sketch and drag the mouse while pressing the left mouse button. To finish the sketch, release the left mouse button. 5. Create an arrow pointing to the freehand sketch that you just created. Click Arrow and click the left mouse button to specify the position of the arrowhead. Move the mouse to another position and click the left mouse button to create the other end of the arrow.

M a rku p M o d e l

Pag e 2 1- 5

NOTES

Task 2. Create a note specifying the removal of the symbol from the drawing. In addition, create a note and two arrows specifying a change in the scale of the detailed views. 1. Click Note and pick near the end of the arrow for the location of the note. 2. Enter [REMOVE THIS SYMBOL] as the first line of the note and enter [FROM THE DRAWING] as the second line of the note. 3. Press <ENTER> on a blank line to finish the note, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 2: Remove Symbol

4. Switch to Sheet 2 to add more geometry to this markup. Click Setup > Switch Sht > Next until Sheet 2 appears. 5. Create a note between the two detailed views to specify the adjustment of the scales. Click Done/Return > Note and locate the note between the detailed views. 6. Enter [CHANGE THE SCALE] as the first line of the note, [FOR THESE VIEWS] as the second line, and [TO 5.00] as the third line. 7. Create arrows pointing from the note to DETAIL 1 and DETAIL 2, as shown in the following figure using techniques discussed earlier.

Pag e 2 1- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 3 Change Scales

8. Save this markup. 9. Click Done/Return to finish this markup. Task 3. Create a new markup that specifies a modification of the scale for the 3-D view, then change the line width and text style. 1. Click New from the ENTER MARKUP menu. Enter [CHANGE_B] as the name of the markup. 2. Switch sheets to Sheet 1 of the drawing. Click Setup > Switch Sht > Previous > Done/Return . 3. Create a curve surrounding the 3-D view on Sheet 1. Click Curve , then pick points through which the curve should pass using the left mouse button, as shown in the following figure. Click the middle mouse button to finish. 4. Create an arrow pointing to the curve that you just created using techniques discussed earlier. 5. Create a note at the end of the arrow. Enter [CHANGE THE SCALE] as the first line of the note and [TO 1.25] as the second line of the note, as shown in the following figure.

M a rku p M o d e l

Pag e 2 1- 7

NOTES

Figure 4: Change View Scale 6. Change the line width of the curve and the arrow that you just created. Click Modify > Line Width , pick the curve and the arrow, and click Done Sel . Enter [.05] as the new line width. 7. Click Setup > Color > Cyan to change the color of the new markup to light blue. 8. Change the justification of the note text and increase the text height. Click Modify > Note > Text Style . Pick both lines of the note and click Done Sel . 9. Enter [.25] for the HEIGHT and click Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list. 10. Click Apply > Close . 11. Save this markup and close the window.

Pag e 2 1- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can create a markup of a drawing. You can display more than one markup simultaneously. You can overlay a drawing on top of another.

M a rku p M o d e l

Pag e 2 1- 9

Appendix

A
Creating ISO-Standard Drawings
In this module, you learn how to create a drawing that conforms to ISO standards.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Use the configuration file and drawing setup options to create an ISO standard drawing. Create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels. Create ISO standard surface finish symbols.

Page A-1

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP FILES
Configuration file options affect all modes in Pro/ENGINEER globally, while drawing setup file options set drawing parameters that are unique to every drawing. You must modify both files to create a correct drawing in accordance with the ISO/DIN standard.

Using Configuration File Options
By setting configuration file options in Drawing mode, you can display chamfer dimensions and reference dimensions in accordance with the ISO standard, as well as show 3-D views in an isometric or dimetric projection.

Displaying Chamfer Dimensions
Using the configuration file option chamfer_45deg_dim_text, you can control the format of the 45-degree chamfer dimension in any mode. If you change the default value ASME/ANSI to ISO/DIN, you can display chamfer dimensions according to the ISO standard, as shown in the following figure.

ASME/ANSI

ISO/DIN

Figure 1: Chamfer_45deg_dim_text

Showing Reference Dimensions in Parentheses
Using the configuration file option parenthesize_ref_dim, you can show reference dimensions in parentheses in accordance with the ISO standard to distinguish them from other dimensions. If you set the value to yes, the system encloses reference dimensions in parentheses.

Pag e A- 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Showing 3-D Views
Using the configuration file options orientation, y_angle, and x_angle, you can display 3-D views in Drawing mode in an isometric projection or dimetric projection. To create either view type, set the value of orientation to user_def to add the option User_Def to the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, in addition to Trimetric and Isometric . For the isometric view, set y_angle to -30, and x_angle to 30. For the dimetric view, set y_angle to -42, and x_angle to 7.

Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options
By setting drawing setup file options, you can create ISO-standard drawings. The following table lists the available drawing setup file options according to their function. The first column gives the name of the option, while the second column specifies the value.

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A- 3

NOTES

Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options for ISO-Standard Drawings OPTION NAME Options controlling views and their annotations: half_view_line detail_circle_line_style projection_type view_note view_scale_format crossec_arrow_style crossec_arrow_place cutting_line cutting_line_segment hlr_for_threads thread_standard Options controlling leaders: draw_arrow_style Options controlling gtol information: gtol_datums new_iso_set_datums Options controlling dimensions: angdim_text_orientation chamfer_45deg_leader_style iso_ordinate_delta lead_trail_zero ord_dim_standard text_orientation tol_text_height_factor tol_text_width_factor Miscellaneous options: decimal_marker line_style_standard weld_symbol_standard comma std_iso std_iso parallel_fully_outside std_iso or std_din yes std_metric std_iso parallel 0.6 0.6 std_iso_jis yes filled symmetry phantomfont first_angle std_iso ratio_colon head_online above_tail std_iso 10 yes std_iso OPTION VALUE

Options controlling cross-sections and their arrows:

Options controlling solids shown in views:

Pag e A- 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

TOLERANCE TABLES
You can create dimensional tolerances using a set of tolerance tables that the system assigns to each model in either the ANSI or ISO standard. Pro/ENGINEER assigns the ANSI tolerances based on the nominal dimension’s number of digits. However, tolerance tables drive the ISOstandard tolerances.

Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards
The system loads tolerance tables into the part file when you create an ISO-standard model if you have set the configuration file option tolerance_standard to ISO (the default is ANSI). However, you can also switch the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO using the Tol Setup option in Part mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode. Since the tables determine how the model regenerates, the system stores them permanently with the model and controls only the driving dimensions. In general, four types of tolerance tables are available. The General Dimension and Broken Edge tolerance table exist just once for every model. However, you can have several different holes and shafts tables per model. When you create a dimension, the system assigns it automatically to the General table. You can switch the tolerance table reference of the dimension to any other table using Modify, DimCosmetics, Assign Tol . You can also display or change the tolerance table as illustrated in the following table.
Table 2: Tolerance Tables Parameter TABLE_TYPE TABLE_NAME TABLE_UNIT RANGE_UNIT
DESCRIPTION

Value GENERAL_DIMS or BROKEN_EDGES DEFAULTS MILLIMETER MILLIMETER
0.5 - 3 3-6

FINE MEDIUM COARSE VERY COARSE

0.05 0.1 0.2 -

0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A- 5

NOTES

Each ISO-standard model also needs an extra attribute called the model class, which determines the general coarseness of the model (fine, medium, coarse, or very coarse), as shown in the following table. The system uses the tolerance class in conjunction with the dimension value when retrieving tolerances for General or Broken Edge dimensions. The configuration file option tolerance_class sets the default tolerance class for ISO models. After you load a new table, the system assigns the new dimension tolerances and you can regenerate the model. If you modify a dimension tolerance, it deletes the tolerance table reference for that dimension and the tolerance value remains the same until you modify it again or reassign the tolerance table. The configuration file option tolerance_table_dir sets the default directory for a user-defined tolerance table.

Displaying Dimensions
All holes and shafts tables overwrite existing tables. The following figure illustrates how Pro/ENGINEER displays dimensions in ISO models, which are driven by holes or shafts tables.

Figure 2: Display of Dimensions with Tolerances

When changing the tolerance table reference, keep in mind the following: • If a holes or shafts tolerance table drives a dimension’s tolerances, you cannot show it in a plus-minus symmetric format. The system assumes that the General and Broken Edge tables have symmetric values. If a dimension value falls outside the ranges specified in the table, the system uses the closest range to obtain tolerances.

Pag e A- 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

If you place a dimension tolerance in a family table, the system deletes its tolerance table reference. Also, if you switch a model from ANSI to ISO, or vice versa, it preserves the tolerances in the family tables and does not assign a table reference to those dimensions.

ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS
To create an ISO-standard surface finish symbol, you must place an instance of a symbol using a generic ISO surface finish symbol consisting of building blocks, or groups. The following table presents a brief overview of groups that you can use to create an ISO surface finish symbol (group names are in bold print).
Table 3: ISO Surface Finish Symbol Groups GROUPS UNSPECIFIED LEADER DESCRIPTION Surface can be produced by any method. Used to create a symbol leader. Material removal by machining is required. Material removal prohibited. Designates the direction of lay: PARALLEL - Approximately parallel to the line representing the surface to which the symbol is applied. PERP - Approximately perpendicular to the line representing the surface to which the symbol is applied. ANGULAR - Angular in both directions to the line representing the surface to which the symbol is applied. MULTI_DIR - Multidirectional. CIRCULAR - Approximately circular relative to the center of the surface to which the symbol is applied. RADIAL - Approximately ILLUSTRATION

MACHINED NO_REMOVAL LAY

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A- 7

NOTES

GROUPS

DESCRIPTION radial to the center of the surface to which the symbol is applied. NON_DIR - Nondirectional, or protuberant.

ILLUSTRATION

ROUGHNESS

Indicates permissible roughness range (micrometers or inches): AVERAGE - Roughness average. MAX_MIN - Maximum and minimum roughness average values.

REMOVAL ALLOW

Material removal by machining that is required to produce the surface (millimeters or inches). Roughness sampling length or cutoff rating (millimeters or inches). Text used for specifying other roughness. Text used for specifying production method.

SAMPLE_LEG

OTHER_ROUGH PROD_METHOD

Pag e A- 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To create a drawing to ISO standards.

Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing that follows the ISO standard by changing the drawing setup file and defining ISO tolerance tables for hole or shaft dimensions.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance with the ISO Standard
Task 1. Retrieve the ISO_DRAWING.PRT in Part mode as shown in the following figure, and obtain information about how the part was created.

Figure 3: Part with Tolerances

1. Turn on the tolerance display using the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Display the MODEL TREE as necessary. 2. Check the dimensions of the first protrusion. Click Modify and select PROTRUSION ID 9 from the MODEL TREE.

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A- 9

NOTES

3. Continue to use modify to check the dimensions of hole id 465. Notice that the diameter dimension is displayed in plus/minus format. 4. Check the remaining features using the MODEL TREE. Task 2. Change the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO. Since the cover will hold bearings, you will change additional dimensions to display a tolerance. 1. Click Utilities > Options to change the configuration file. 2. Add the configuration file options.
Table 4
OPTION VALUE

CHAMFER_45DEG_DIM_TEXT ORIENTATION Y_ANGLE X_ANGLE

ISO/DIN USER_DEFAULT -42 7

3. Save the file and name it [ISO_CONFIG]. Apply the changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. 4. Change the tolerance standard to ISO. Click Set Up > Tol Setup > > Standard > ISO/DIN . Click <Enter> to regenerate the part. 5. Assign the model to a tolerance class. This part is used in an engine, and the general coarseness is medium. Click Model Class > MEDIUM . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part. 6. The dimensions that had their tolerances displayed have been added to the General tolerance table. To view the values inside the table, click Tol Tables > Show > General Dims . Click File > Exit to close the table. Task 3. Retrieve a hole tolerance table so that it can be used in two dimensions. 1. Click Retrieve . Select the TOLERANCE TABLE DIRECTORY from the LOOK IN drop-down list and select HOLE_J.TTL. 2. Click Open . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.

Pag e A- 1 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

3. Repeat the procedures to apply a shaft tolerance table SHAFT_H to the model. Click Done/Return > Done to return to PART menu. 4. Assign J6 hole tolerance table the to the ∅50 dimensions of the bearing. Click Modify > DimCosmetics > AssignTol > Holes and enter [j6] in the message area. 5. Select HOLE ID465 and HOLE ID 520 from the MODEL TREE to show the dimensions. Pick the two ∅50 dimensions as shown in the following figure. Click Done from the MODIFY menu.

Figure 4: Changing the Two Diameter Dimensions

6. Save the changes. 7. Close the window. Task 4. Open the ISO_DRAWING, start the conversion to an ISO standard drawing, and change the drawing setup file in accordance with an ISO standard. 1. Open the file ISO_DRAWING.DRW. 2. Modify the existing drawing setup file to reflect the values shown in the following table.

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-11

NOTES

Table 5: Changing the Drawing Setup File to the ISO Standard
drawing_text_height text_thickness detail_circle_line_style projection_type view_note view_scale_format crossec_arrow_length crossec_arrow_style crossec_arrow_width crossec_text_place cutting_line cutting_line_segment hlr_for_threads thread_standard angdim_text_orientation chamfer_45deg_leader_style dim_leader_length dim_text_gap iso_ordinate_delta lead_trail_zeros ord_dim_standard text_orientation tol_display tol_text_height_factor tol_text_width_factor witness_line_delta witness_line_offset draw_arrow_length draw_arrow_style draw_arrow_width draw_attach_sym_height draw_attach_sym_width draw_dot_diameter leader_elbow_length axis_line_offset circle_axis_offset radial_pattern_axis_circle gtol_datums decimal_marker drawing_units 3.5 0.35 PHANTOMFONT FIRST_ANGLE STD_ISO RATIO_COLON 6 HEAD_ONLINE 3.5 ABOVE_TAIL STD_ISO 10 YES STD_ISO PARALLEL_FULLY_OUTSIDE STD_DIN 5 1.2 YES STD_METRIC STD_ISO PARALLEL YES 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.5 3.5 FILLED 1.5 DEFAULT DEFAULT 1.0 6 4 4 YES STD_ISO_JIS COMMA MM

3. Apply the changes then save a copy of the drawing setup file. Enter [ISO] for the name. 4. Repaint the screen and notice the changes. Close the OPTIONS dialog box.

Pag e A- 1 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Task 5. Note that the cross section projected view did not change from third angle to first angle projected, as specified in the drawing setup file. To avoid recreating the view and the dimensions. You can change the view orientation by changing the view type to general first and back to projection. 1. Click Views> Modify View> View Type to modify the view type. Pick the cross section projected view. 2. Click General> Done to define the type as general. 3. Click Done from the XSEC TYPE menu to leave the existing cross section definition. 4. Modify the view type again. Click View Type . Pick the same view. 5. Click Projection> Done to set the view type back to projected. 6. Click Yes to allow the system to reorient the detail view. 7. Click Done from the XSEC TYPE menu to leave the existing cross section definition. 8. Resolve the conflict in the views’ parent. Select the general view to the left of the view you are changing. Task 6. The cut direction for the cross section is defined by the views initial orientation. Change the orientation for the cross section view so that it is correct. 1. From the VIEW MODIFY menu, click X-Section> Flip and pick the projected views cross-hatching to redisplay the cross section by modifying it. 2. Return to the top level menu. Click Done/Return . Task 7. Some of the notes on the drawing do not comply with ISO standards. Change the notes to meet compliance. 1. Modify some of the notes on the drawing. Click the [Select] icon and select the DETAIL C. Right click and choose Properties . Remove the text field containing the word detail. 2. Blank the words SECTION A-A using a layer. Click View> , enter [Note] for layer name and click OK . Layers . Click

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-13

NOTES

3. Associate the note to the layer. Click Item and Add . Select 2D Items . Then pick the note SECTION A-A and click Done Sel and Done/Return . 4. Change the display of the layer. Select the NOTE layer from the list [Blank]. Click Save Status > Close . then click Task 8. Set the dimension offsets to be correct according to ISO standards. 1. Click Insert > Snap Line > Att View and pick the four cyan view boarders in the projection view. 2. Click Done Sel to create snap lines in the projected view to control the position of the dimensions. 3. Enter [10] as the distance of the first snap line, enter [5] as the number of snap lines, and enter [8] as the distance between snap lines. 4. Click Done/Return . [Select] icon and select 5. Move the dimension to snap. Click the the dimensions so that they appear as show in the following figure. 6. Remove the extra snap lines. Click the the extra snap lines, followed by <Del>. [Select] icon and select

Task 9. Add the number of holes to the 60 degree angular dimension as parametric information. 1. Add the pattern parameter of six holes to the 60.0 dimension. Click [Select] icon and select the 60.0 dimension in the general the view on the left. Right click and choose Properties . 2. Click Dimension Text and enter [&p0 X] in the PREFIX text box. Click OK . 3. Erase the 6 holes note. Click View > Show and Erase . Click Erase > and select the 6 HOLES note followed by Done Sel . Close the dialog box. The drawing should appear as shown in the following figure.

Pag e A- 1 4

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

Figure 5: Completely Dimensioned Drawing

Task 10. Change tolerances and the number of decimal places in Drawing mode. 1. Click Format > Decimal Places , then enter [3]. Click Pick Many and create a box around the entire drawing. 2. Click Done Sel . 3. Apply the tolerance table to the diameter dimension. Click the [Select] icon and select the ∅130 dimension. Right click and choose Properties . 4. Select SHAFT from the Tolerance table list. Select H and 6 from the TABLE NAME drop down list. 5. Select LIMITS from the TOLERANCE MODE drop down list then select OK to view the exact values of the dimension. 6. Change the tolerance format of the two ∅50 dimensions. Click the [Select] icon and select the ∅50 dimension. Right-click and choose Properties .

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-15

NOTES

7. For the Tolerance mode, select Limits to show the exact values in parentheses. Click OK to close the dialog box. 8. Finish the clean up of the dimensions. Click the [Select] icon and reposition the snap lines and dimensions so that they do not intersect, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6: Drawing with Tolerances

Task 11. Place surface finish symbols on the drawing according to the ISO standard. 1. Click Insert > Symbol Instance to create ISO-standard surface finish symbols. 2. On the PLACEMENT tab, click Retrieve to retrieve a pre-defined instance. Click System Syms from the LOOK IN drop down list. 3. Double click isosurftext then click isosurftext.sym > Open . The symbol definition is now ISOSURFTEXT. 4. In the HEIGHT box, enter [15].

Pag e A- 1 6

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

5. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list, select With Leaders , then pick the lower attachment locations of the two surface finish symbols as shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel . 6. Use Move to move the symbol to reposition, if necessary.

Figure 7: Surface Finish in the Drawing 7. Use the pro-defined groups to change the symbol. Click Grouping and select MACHINED > ROUGHNESS > AVERAGE > PROD_METHOD , and LEADER . 8. Define the values for the symbol. Click Var Text . Enter [0,8] under AVER_ROUGHNESS. Enter [grind] as the
PROD_METHOD.

9. Click New Inst to create another surface finish symbol without closing the dialog box. 10. Define the attachment for the next symbol. Click PLACEMENT tab and then select PLACE INST from the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED area of the dialog box. 11. Pick the upper attachment of the two surface finish symbols as shown in the previous figure, followed by Done Sel .

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-17

NOTES

12. Move the symbol to the location shown if necessary. 13. Add a third surface finish as the global finish. Select NEW INST from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box. 14. Enter [30] to change the height of the symbol. 15. Define a free placement. Select FREE NOTE from the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list. Pick in the lower right corner, as shown in the previous figure. 16. Move the note if necessary. 17. Remove the production method and leader group options. Click Grouping and clear the PROD_METHOD and LEADER check boxes. 18. Click New Inst from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to add the last surface finish as the global finish. 19. Click Placement > Place Inst to place as a free note. Pick in the lower right corner, next to the previous symbol, as shown in the previous figure. 20. Change the average roughness to 3,2. Click Var Text and change the aver_roughness value of [3,2]. 21. Click OK to finish. 22. Clean up the symbol leaders. Create a jog on the two surface finish symbols with leaders, as shown in the previous figure. Task 12. The configuration file settings affected the display of the chamfer dimension. Change the dimensional text of the chamfer dimension to reflect ISO standards. 1. Show the chamfer dimension. ! Click View > Show and Erase> Show . Select dimension as the show type. ! ! ! Click the Preview tab. Check the With Preview check box. Click Show All > Yes . Keep the two 1 X 45° dimensions and close the dialog box.

Pag e A- 1 8

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

2. Move the chamfer dimension. Click the [Select] icon and select the 1 X 45° dimension. Move it to the other side of the projected view. 3. With the 1 X 45° dimension still highlighted, right click and choose Properties . Click Dimension Text , then enter [{2:2 REQ'D}] in the DIMENSION TEXT area as a second line. Click OK . Task 13. Create a perpendicular gtol placed on the two axes of the bearing holes, in accordance with the ISO standard. 1. Display the axes tags. Click Utilities, Environment then select Datum Axis from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, then click OK . [Select] icon 2. Start changing the display of axis A_19. Click the and select the axis A_19. Right click and choose Properties . 3. In the AXIS dialog box enter [A] as the name. 4. Set the axis to be used for a geometric tolerance reference. Click >OK . 5. Change the display of axis A_20. Repeat the above steps and enter [B ] for the name. 6. Move the set tags to the left of the view so that they snap to the first snap line. Select the tags using the [Select] icon. Rearrange the drawing as shown in the following figure. Note:
You may also need to move the axis so that they extend to the location of the tag.

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-19

NOTES

Figure 8: Drawing with Gtols 7. Start the creation of a perpendicular gtol. Click Insert > in the GEOMETRIC Geometric Tolerance . Click TOLERANCE dialog box. 8. Define axis A_1 as the reference. Select AXIS from the TYPE drop-down list in the REFERENCE: TO BE SELECTED area. 9. Click Select Entity and pick axis A_1 located at the center of the model. 10. Define the placement using a leader associated to the upper witness line of the 130 diameter dimension. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED area, select NORMAL LDR from the drop-down list. 11. Using Query Sel , pick the upper witness line of the ∅130 dimension. Place the gtol as shown in the previous figure.

Pag e A- 2 0

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

NOTES

12. Specify the datum references as the A and B axis. Click Datum Refs . Specify the datum references on the primary tab. select A from the BASIC drop-down list. Select B from the COMPOUND drop-down list. 13. Click Tol Value and enter [0.005] in the OVERALL TOLERANCE text box to define the tolerance value as .005. 14. Show the diameter symbol in the gtol. Click Symbols and click the ∅ Diameter Symbol check box. 15. If necessary, use Move to change the position of the gtol. Select OK to finish the placement. 16. Save the drawing. 17. Erase the drawing and all associated object models from memory.

Figure 9: Finished Drawing

Ap p e n d i x A

Pag e A-21

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that: • • • You can use configuration file and drawing setup options to create an ISO standard drawing. You can create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels. You can create ISO standard surface finish symbols.

Pag e A- 2 2

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g

Appendix

B
Using PTC Help
You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed information on selected topics.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Start PTC Help. Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER. Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.

Page B-1

NOTES

PTC HELP OVERVIEW
PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into Pro/ENGINEER.

PTC Help Features
PTC Help offers: • • • • A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searching capability Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click of the mouse Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes

Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database , which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more information, see the Technical Support Appendix.

USING THE Pro/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM
Launching Help: Four Methods
There are four procedures for launching the help system.

1. From the Main Menu
This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system. Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the following figure.

Pag e B- 2

Ap p e n d i x A

NOTES

Figure 1 Starting PTC Help The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser window.

Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help

In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access subtopics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions, explanations, and tips.

Usin g PT C Help

Pag e B- 3

NOTES

2. Through Context-Sensitive Help
1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.

2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window about which you want an explanation. 3. A browser window opens that explains the topic. 4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon functionality.

Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help

5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that may be of immediate interest.

Pag e B- 4

Ap p e n d i x A

NOTES

6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.

Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics

3. Through Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager
1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.

2. Click any menu command from the menu manager. 3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links that explain the menu command. 4. Click the topic you want to read. 5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list of two useful topics.

Usin g PT C Help

Pag e B- 5

NOTES

Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager

4. By Right-Clicking on Vertical Menu Commands
1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP window appears.

Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager

Pag e B- 6

Ap p e n d i x A

NOTES

PTC HELP MODULE LIST
There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents: Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and Using Additional Modules.

Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System

Consult the following list to find a particular module in the table of contents:

Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help

Usin g PT C Help

Pag e B- 7

Appendix

C
PTC Global Services: Technical Support
PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we also have Web-based offerings that are designed to fit your individual needs by providing 24 hour / 7 day availability. PTC Global Services is also committed to continually improving customer service. Through our Quality Monitoring program, we have demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO 9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • • Open a Technical Support Call. Register for on-line Technical Support. Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base. Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.

Page C-1

NOTES

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE
Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to www.ptc.com/support/support.htm.

OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail
Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.com with copen as the e-mail subject. Please use the following format (or download the template from www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm): FNAME: LNAME: First Name Last Name U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or

CALLCENTER: Tokyo PHONE: CONFIG_ID: PRODUCT: MODULE: PRIORITY: DESC_BEGIN: description starts

NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN NNNNNN X XX X

description continues description ends DESC_END

Pag e C- 2

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone
Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for your Local Technical Support Center). The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following information when logging a call: • • • • Your PTC software Configuration ID Your name and telephone number The PTC product (module) name Priority of the issue

Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web
You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL LOGGER

Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support
To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm. When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 3

NOTES

Routing Your Technical Support Calls
Call
Customer question

Telephone Call

Web Call

Tech SupportEngineer creates a call in the database

Call is automatically created in the database

Investigation

Call Back and Investigation

Support Engineer solves issue or reports it to Development (SPR)

Software Performance Report SPR fixed from Development

SPR

Software Performance Report (SPR) SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer

Update CD to customer

Pag e C- 4

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

Assigning Technical Support Call Priorities
• • •
• • Extremely Critical Critical Urgent

– Work stopped

– Work severely impacted – Work impacted

Not Critical General Information

Software Performance Report Priorities
• • •
Top Priority

– Highly critical software issue that is causing a work

stoppage. – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a practical alternative technique is not available.
High Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a practical alternative technique is available.

REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT
Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online , to open the registration form and enter your Configuration ID. To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About Pro/ENGINEER . Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your personal data. Please write down your username and password for future reference.

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 5

NOTES

ONLINE SERVICES
After you have registered you will have full access to all Online Tools.

You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs (SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified automatically. Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and electronic order of software and manuals are available. The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software updates for any PTC product.

FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE
The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents. Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs), Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer upto-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.

Pag e C- 6

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

Terminology used by Technical Support
– Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue. TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue working.
TAN TPI

– Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.

Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.

– Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support database.
FAQ

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 7

NOTES

GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION
To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to www.ptc.com/support. 1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications > Knowledge Base Monitor . 2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get information. 3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.

Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up

Pag e C- 8

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

CONTACT INFORMATION
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services.
These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
Web:

• •
E-mail:

www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support) www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)

• •

cs_ptc@ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data) cs-webmaster@ptc.com (for comments or suggestions about the Customer Service Web site)

FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):

ftp.ptc.com

Technical Support Customer Feedback Line
The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service concerns that are not technical product issues.
E-mail:

cs-feedback@ptc.com

Telephone:

www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 9

NOTES

Telephone
For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone and Fax Information sections below. PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local languages.

North America Phone Information
Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management, and Documentation Requests):
Within the United States and Canada:

800-477-6435

Outside the United States and Canada:

• •

781-370-5332 781-370-5513

Maintenance:

888-782-3774

Education:

888-782-3773

Pag e C- 10

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

Europe Phone Information
Technical Support Phone Numbers: Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany 0800 29 7542 0800-15-241 (French) 0800-72567 (Dutch) 8001-5593 0800-117092 0800-14-19-52 0180-2245132 49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of Germany) Ireland Israel Italy Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Portugal South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland 1-800-409-1622 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew) 177-150-21-34 (English only) 800-79-05-33 0800-23-50 0800022-4519 8001-1872 05-05-33-73-69 0800-991068 900-95-33-39 020-791484 0800-55-38-33 (French) 0800-83-75-58 (Italian) 0800-552428 (German) United Kingdom 0800-318677

License Management Phone Numbers: Belgium Denmark Finland Eastern Europe 0800-75376 8001-5593 0800-117-092 44 1252 817 078

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 1 1

NOTES

France Germany Ireland Italy Netherlands Norway Portugal Russia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom

0800-14-19-52 49 (0) 89-32106-0 1-800-409-1622 39 (0) 39-65651 0800-022-0543 8001-1872 05-05-33-73-69 44 1252 817 078 900-95-33-39 020-791484 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44 0800-31-8677

Education Services Phone Numbers: Benelux France Germany Italy Spain/Portugal Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 31-73-644-2705 33-1-69-33-65-50 49 (0) 89-32106-325 39-039-65-65-652 39-039-6565-1 34-91-452-01-00 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo) 46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby) 41 (0) 1-820-00-80 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK) 44-1252-817-140

Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information
Technical Support Phone Numbers: Australia China* Hong Kong India* 1800-553-565 10800-650-8185 (international toll free) 108-657 (manual toll free) 800-933309 000-6517

Pag e C- 12

Ap p e n d i x B

NOTES

Indonesia Japan Malaysia New Zealand Philippines Singapore South Korea Taiwan Thailand the respective string: China India Center. MTF8309729 MTF8309752

001-803-65-7250 7-2-48-55-00-35 120-20-9023 1-800-80-1026 0800-44-4376 1800-1-651-0176 65-830-9899 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free) 080-3469-001 (domestic toll free) 0080-65-1256 (international toll free) 080-013069 (domestic toll free) 001-800-65-6213

*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with

The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support

License Management Phone Numbers Japan Hong Kong 81 (0) 3-3346-8280 (852) 2802-8982

Education Services Phone Numbers Australia China 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney) 61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne) 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou) 86-21-62785080 (Shanghai) 86-10-65908699 (Beijing) Hong Kong India 852-28028982 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore) 91-11-6474701 (New Delhi) 91-226513152 (Mumbai)

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n

Pag e C- 1 3

NOTES

Japan Malaysia Singapore South Korea Taiwan

81-3-3346-8268 03-754 8198 65-8309866 82-2-3469-1080 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei) 886-4-3103311 (Taichung) 886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)

ELECTRONIC SERVICES
Up-to-Date + Information Worldwide ISO 9000 Certification Quality Control System

= Maximum Productivity with PTC Products

Pag e C- 14

Ap p e n d i x B

INDEX
Fundamentals of Drawing Approaches To Performance Improvement Drawing Rep Tool, 18-9 Merging Drawings, 18-10 Model Simplification, 18-11 Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time, 18-8 Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time, 18-4 Reducing the Repaint Time, 18-3 Approaches To Performance Improvement, 18-3 Arrows, 5-9 Assemblies Drawings, 3-2 Exploded Views, 3-2 BOM Create, 16-2 Filter, 16-6 Level, 16-5 Pagination, 16-9 Repeat Region Attributes, 16-4 Simple Repeat Region, 16-2 Sort, 16-6 Summation, 16-9 BOM Balloons, 16-10 Changing Cross-Sections, 4-9 Configuration File Options, 6-5, 7-11 Configuration File Options, 15-6, 19-4 CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS, 8-7 Configuration Files Config.pro, 1-5 Config.sup, 1-5 Drawing Setup Files, 4-16 Drawing Setup Files, 1-6 Editing, 1-5 Configuration Files Options, 5-12 Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing, 13-7 Cosmetic Sketches Projected Sections, 10-2 Regular Sections, 10-2 Cosmetic Threads Changing the Format, 10-6 Create, 10-3 Using Standard Hole, 10-13 Cross-Sections, 2-6 Changing Cross-Hatching, 4-9 Full, 2-6 Dimension Create, 6-2 Dimension Tolerance Displaying Tolerance, 8-3 Specify Dimension Tolerances, 8-2 Standard, 8-2 Dimensions Creating Draft Dimensions, 6-4 Creating Ordinate Dimensions, 6-2 Creating Ordinate Dimensions for a Flat State Sheetmetal Part, 6-3 Creating Reference Dimensions, 6-3 Hole Tables, 6-4 Redefining Features, 6-3 Dimensions Adding Text, 5-9 Arrows, 5-9 Baseline References, 5-8 Cleaning Up, 5-6 Dual, 5-7 Extension Lines, 5-9 Leaders, 5-9 Move, 5-5 Ordinate, 5-7 Snap Lines, 5-6 Drafting Applications, 11-2 Geometry Types, 11-2 Drawing Setup File Options, 2-9 Drawing Configuration Files, 2-8 Drawing Default Layers, 13-2 Drawing Format Create, 15-2 Including Parametric Information, 15-4 Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration Process, 18-2 Drawing Setup File Options, 7-11, 16-11 Drawing Setup File Options, 13-8, 17-11, 19-5 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS, 8-9 Drawing Setup Files, 5-14 Drawing Setup Files, 1-6 Drawing Templates Create, 19-9

INDEX

Page-1

Dimension and Balloon Priority, 19-11 Model Requirements, 19-10 View Definition, 19-10 Drawings Associative, 1-2 Drawings Assemblies, 3-2 Configuration Files, 1-3 Drawing Interface, 1-7 Icons, 1-9 Menus, 1-7 Message Window, 1-10 Model Tree, 1-10 Exploded Views, 3-2 Multiple Models, 3-2 Creating, 3-3 Setting the Active Model, 3-3 Showing Details, 5-2 Templates, 1-2 Engineering Markups, 21-2 Family Table Create, 17-2 Creating a Parts Catalog in Drawing, 17-5 Generic Part, 17-2 Verify, 17-5 Geometric Tolerance Create, 8-4 Modify, 8-7 Locating Draft Geometry Construction Geometry, 11-4 Cross Hair, 11-3 Draft Grid, 11-4 References, 11-3 Markups Creating a Markup, 21-2 Retrieving Markups, 21-3 Saving and Viewing a Markup, 21-3 Note Content, 7-2 Delete, 7-3 Leader, 7-5 Move, 7-4 Save, 7-6 Superscript and Subscript, 7-5 Text Style, 7-6 Wrap Text, 7-4 Overlays, 21-4 Print Configuration File Options, 20-9 Print

Configuring the Plotter, 20-3 Destination, 20-2 Plotter command, 20-5 Pro/BATCH, 20-6 Pro/ENGINEER, 20-2 Pro/BATCH Adding Objects, 20-8 Creating a New Batch File, 20-8 Defining the Action and Options, 20-9 Pro/ENGINEER Command, 20-9 Setting up Preferences, 20-7 Starting Pro/BATCH, 20-7 Setting up Your Configuration File, 19-2 Setting up Your Drawing Setup File, 19-2 Symbols Create, 12-2 Creating Symbol Geometry, 12-2 Grouping Symbol Geometry, 12-3 Placing Symbol Instance, 12-6 Symbol Palette, 12-6 Variable Text, 12-3 Table Blank the Cell Borders, 9-6 Changing the Size, 9-5 Creating a Table, 9-2 Justification, 9-3 Merge Cells, 9-6 Origin, 9-6 Text Inserting OLE Objects, 7-8 Text Fields, 7-7 Text Style, 7-7 Text Style Libraries, 7-8 Views, 2-2 Adding Cross-Sections, 2-6 Alignment, 4-2 Assembly, 4-10 Assembly Member Display, 4-12 Auxiliary, 2-3 Boundaries, 4-6 Changing the Callout, 4-7 Changing the Reference Point, 4-8 Changing Type, 4-14 Color of Model Geometry, 4-5 Configuration File Options, 4-15 Controlling Displays, 4-5 Controlling View Display, 2-5 Creating, 2-2 Cross Sections, 4-9 Detailed, 2-4

Page-2

INDEX

Exploded, 4-13 General, 2-2 Graph, 2-4 Hidden Lines, 4-5 Modifying Scale, 4-6 Orientation, 4-2 Origin, 4-3 Projection, 2-3 Remove, 4-6 Revolved, 2-4 Snapshot, 4-11 Tangent Lines, 4-5 Z-Clipping, 4-12 Views, 4-2

INDEX

Page-3

Page-4

INDEX

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful